H100 - User Manual - Eng - V3.2 - 200610
H100 - User Manual - Eng - V3.2 - 200610
H100 - User Manual - Eng - V3.2 - 200610
Safety Information
Read and follow all safety instructions in this manual precisely to avoid unsafe operating
conditions, property damage, personal injury, or death.
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in severe injury or
death.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in injury or death.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in minor injury or
property damage.
Safety information
• Do not open the cover of the equipment while it is on or operating. Likewise, do not operate
the inverter while the cover is open. Exposure of high voltage terminals or charging area to
the external environment may result in an electric shock. Do not remove any covers or
touch the internal circuit boards (PCBs) or electrical contacts on the product when the
power is on or during operation. Doing so may result in serious injury, death, or serious
property damage.
• Do not open the cover of the equipment even when the power supply to the inverter has
been turned off unless it is necessary for maintenance or regular inspection. Opening the
cover may result in an electric shock even when the power supply is off.
• The equipment may hold charge long after the power supply has been turned off. Use a
multi-meter to make sure that there is no voltage before working on the inverter, motor or
motor cable.
• Supply earthing system: TT, TN, not suitable for corner-earthed systems
ii
Safety Information
• Do not allow foreign objects, such as screws, metal chips, debris, water, or oil to get inside
the inverter. Allowing foreign objects inside the inverter may cause the inverter to
malfunction or result in a fire.
• Do not operate the inverter with wet hands. Doing so may result in electric shock.
• Do not modify the interior workings of the inverter. Doing so will void the warranty.
• The inverter is designed for 3-phase motor operation. Do not use the inverter to operate a
single phase motor.
• Do not place heavy objects on top of electric cables. Doing so may damage the cable and
result in an electric shock.
Note
Maximum allowed prospective short-circuit current at the input power connection is defined
in IEC 60439-1 as 100 kA. LSLV-H100 is suitable for use in a circuit capable of delivering
not more than 100kA RMS at the drive’s maximum rated voltage, depending on the
selected MCCB. RMS symmetrical amperes for recommended MCCB are the following
table.
Remarque
Le courant maximum de court-circuit présumé autorisé au connecteur d’alimentation
électrique est défini dans la norme IEC 60439-1 comme égal à 100 kA. Selon le MCCB
sélectionné, la série LSLV-H100 peut être utilisée sur des circuits pouvant fournir un
courant RMS symétrique de 100 kA maximum en ampères à la tension nominale
maximale du variateur. Le tableau suivant indique le MCCB recommandé selon le courant
RMS symétrique en ampères.
iii
Quick Reference Table
Situation Reference
I want to configure the inverter to start operating as soon as the power source is
p.17
applied.
I want to configure the motor’s parameters. p.210
Something seems to be wrong with the inverter or the motor. p.330, p.528
What is auto tuning? p.210
What are the recommended wiring lengths? p.40
The motor is too noisy. p.240
I want to apply PID control on my system. p.158
What are the factory default settings for P1–P7 multi-function terminals? p.38
I want to view all of the parameters I have modified. p.249
I want to review recent fault trip and warning histories. p.58
I want to change the inverter’s operation frequency using a potentiometer. p.88
I want to install a frequency meter using an analog terminal. p.38
I want to display the supply current to motor. p.54
I want to operate the inverter using a multi-step speed configuration. p.101
The motor runs too hot. p.307
The inverter is too hot. p.320
The cooling fan does not work. p.535
I want to change the items that are monitored on the keypad. p.302
I want to display the supply current to motor. p.302
iv
Table of Contents
Table of Contens
v
Table of Contents
vi
Table of Contents
vii
Table of Contents
viii
Table of Contents
ix
Table of Contents
7.2
Communication System Configuration ................................................ 340
7.2.1 Communication Line Connection ............................................ 340
7.2.2 Setting Communication Parameters ....................................... 341
7.2.3 Setting Operation Command and Frequency ......................... 342
7.2.4 Command Loss Protective Operation ..................................... 343
7.3 LS INV 485/Modbus-RTU Communication ......................................... 345
7.3.1 Setting Virtual Multi-function Input ........................................... 345
7.3.2 Saving Parameters Defined by Communication .................... 345
7.3.3 Total Memory Map for Communication ................................... 346
7.3.4 Parameter Group for Data Transmission ................................ 346
7.3.5 Parameter Group for User/Macro Group ................................ 348
7.3.6 LS INV 485 Protocol ................................................................. 349
7.3.7 Modbus-RTU Protocol .............................................................. 354
7.3.8 Compatible Common Area Parameter .................................... 358
7.3.9 H100 Expansion Common Area Parameter ........................... 362
7.4 BACnet Communication ....................................................................... 377
7.4.1 What is BACnet Communication? ........................................... 377
7.4.2 BACnet Communication Standards ........................................ 377
7.4.3 BACnet Quick Communication Start ....................................... 377
7.4.4 Protocol Implementation........................................................... 379
7.4.5 Object Map ................................................................................ 380
7.5 Metasys-N2 Communication ................................................................ 388
7.5.1 Metasys-N2 Quick Communication Start ................................ 388
7.5.2 Metasys-N2 Communication Standard ................................... 388
7.5.3 Metasys-N2 Protocol I/O Point Map ........................................ 389
8 Table of Functions.......................................................................................... 392
8.1 Drive Group (DRV) ................................................................................ 393
8.2 Basic Function Group (BAS) ................................................................ 398
8.3 Expanded Function Group (ADV) ........................................................ 404
8.4 Control Function Group (CON) ............................................................ 411
8.5 Input Terminal Group (IN) ..................................................................... 414
8.6 Output Terminal Block Function Group (OUT) .................................... 423
8.7 Communication Function Group (COM).............................................. 429
8.8 Advanced Function Group(PID Functions) ......................................... 436
8.9 EPID Function Group (EPI) .................................................................. 447
8.10 Application 1 Function Group (AP1) .................................................... 454
8.11 Application 2 Function Group (AP2) .................................................... 461
8.12 Application 3 Function Group (AP3) .................................................... 467
x
Table of Contents
xi
Table of Contents
xii
Preparing the Installation
Note
Check the product name, open the packaging, and then confirm that the product is free from
defects. Contact your supplier if you have any issues or questions about your product.
1
Preparing the Installation
Note
The H100 75/90 kW, 400 V inverters satisfy the EMC standard EN61800-3 without installation
of optional EMC filters.
2
Preparing the Installation
0.75–30 kW (3-Phase)
3
Preparing the Installation
37–90 kW (3-Phase)
4
Preparing the Installation
110–132 kW (3-Phase)
5
Preparing the Installation
160–185 kW (3-Phase)
6
Preparing the Installation
220–250 kW (3-Phase)
7
Preparing the Installation
315–400 kW (3-Phase)
8
Preparing the Installation
500 kW (3-Phase)
9
Preparing the Installation
Items Description
Do not allow the ambient temperature to exceed the allowable range while operating the
inverter.
10
Preparing the Installation
• The inverter must be installed on a wall that can support the inverter’s weight.
• The location must be free from vibration. Vibration can adversely affect the operation of
the inverter.
• The inverter can become very hot during operation. Install the inverter on a surface that
is fire-resistant or flame-retardant and with sufficient clearance around the inverter to
allow air to circulate. The illustrations below detail the required installation clearances.
11
Preparing the Installation
• Ensure sufficient air circulation is provided around the inverter when it is installed. If the
inverter is to be installed inside a panel, enclosure, or cabinet rack, carefully consider
the position of the inverter’s cooling fan and the ventilation louver. The cooling fan must
be positioned to efficiently transfer the heat generated by the operation of the inverter.
• If you are installing multiple inverters in one location, arrange them side-by-side and
remove the vent covers. Use a flat head screwdriver to remove the vent covers. Only
the H100 inverters rated for up to 30 kW may be installed side-by-side.
Note
12
Preparing the Installation
13
Preparing the Installation
• Wherever possible use cables with the largest cross-sectional area for mains power wiring,
to ensure that voltage drop does not exceed 2%.
• Use copper cables rated for 600 V, 75 ℃ for power terminal wiring.
• Use copper cables rated for 300 V, 75 ℃ for control terminal wiring.
• The inverters in the range between 15 and 90 kW must be grounded conveniently with
fixed connections.
• The inverters in the range between 5,5kW and 11kW must be grounded with and
industrial connector according to IEC 60309.
• The minimum size of the protective earthing conductor shall comply with the local
safety regulations for high protective earthing conductor current equipment.
• Only one conductor per terminal should be simultaneously connected
14
Preparing the Installation
15
Preparing the Installation
Wire thickness 1)
Terminals
mm2 AWG
P1–P7/CM/VR/V1/I2/24/TI 0.33–1.25 16–22
AO1/AO2/CM/Q1/EG 0.33–2.0 14–22
A1/B1/C1/A2/C2/A3/C3/A4/C4/A5/C5 0.33–2.0 14–22
S+,S-,SG 0.75 18
1) Use STP (shielded twisted-pair) cables for signal wiring.
16
Installing the Inverter
Installation Flowchart
The following flowchart lists the sequence to be followed during installation. The steps cover
equipment installation and testing of the product. More information on each step is
referenced in the steps.
Testing (p.50)
17
Installing the Inverter
The reference diagram below shows a typical system configuration showing the inverter
and peripheral devices.
Prior to installing the inverter, ensure that the product is suitable for the application (power
rating, capacity, etc). Ensure that all of the required peripherals and optional devices
(resistor brakes, contactors, noise filters, etc.) are available. For more details on peripheral
devices, refer to 11.4 Peripheral Devices on page 561.
400[V] : 37~500kW
18
Installing the Inverter
• Figures in this manual are shown with covers or circuit breakers removed to show a more
detailed view of the installation arrangements. Install covers and circuit breakers before
operating the inverter. Operate the product according to the instructions in this manual.
• Do not start or stop the inverter using a magnetic contactor installed on the input power
supply.
• If the inverter is damaged and loses control, the machine may cause a dangerous
situation. Install an additional safety device such as an emergency brake to prevent these
situations.
• High levels of current draw during power-on can affect the system. Ensure that correctly
rated circuit breakers are installed to operate safely during power-on situations.
• Reactors can be installed to improve the power factor. Note that reactors may be installed
within 32.8 ft (10 m) from the power source if the input power exceeds 600 kVA. Refer to
11.5 Fuse and Reactors Specifications on page 563 and carefully select a reactor that
meets the requirements.
Select a wall or panel suitable to support the installation. Refer to 11.3 External Dimensions
on page 556 and check the inverter’s mounting bracket dimensions.
1 Use a level to draw a horizontal line on the mounting surface, and then carefully mark
the fixing points.
2 Drill the two upper mounting bolt holes, and then install the mounting bolts. Do not fully
tighten the bolts at this time. Fully tighten the mounting bolts after the inverter has been
mounted.
3 Mount the inverter on the wall or inside a panel using the two upper bolts, and then fully
tighten the upper mounting bolts.
19
Installing the Inverter
400[V] : 220~500kW
4 Install the two lower mounting bolts. Ensure that the inverter is placed flat on the
mounting surface, and that the installation surface can securely support the weight of
the inverter.
20
Installing the Inverter
400[V] : 220~500kW
• Do not transport the inverter by lifting with the inverter’s covers or plastic surfaces. The
inverter may tip over if covers break, causing injuries or damage to the product. Always
support the inverter using the metal frames when moving it.
• Hi-capacity inverters are very heavy and bulky. Use an appropriate transport method that
is suitable for the weight.
• Do not install the inverter on the floor or mount it sideways against a wall. The inverter
must be installed vertically, on a wall or inside a panel, with its rear flat on the mounting
surface.
21
Installing the Inverter
22
Installing the Inverter
ESD (Electrostatic discharge) from the human body may damage sensitive electronic
components on the PCB. Therefore, be extremely careful not to touch the PCB or the
components on the PCB with bare hands while you work on the I/O PCB.
To prevent damage to the PCB from ESD, touch a metal object with your hands to discharge
any electricity before working on the PCB, or wear an anti-static wrist strap and ground it on a
metal object.
Follow the instructions below to remove the protective insulation strip and enable the RTC
feature on the H100 series inverters.
1 Turn off the inverter and make sure that DC link voltage has dropped to a safe level.
2 Loosen the screw on the power cover then remove the power cover.
37–90 kW Models
0.75–30 kW Models
23
Installing the Inverter
4 Loosen the screws securing the front cover, and remove the front cover by lifting it. The
main PCB is exposed.
24
Installing the Inverter
5 Locate the RTC battery holder on the I/O PCB, and remove the protective insulation
strip by gently pulling it.
6 Reattach the front cover, the power cover, and the keypad back onto the inverter body
7 For detailed information on the RTC battery, refer to the battery specifications on page
541.
Ensure that the inverter is turned off and DC link voltage has dropped to a safe level before
opening the terminal cover and installing the RTC battery.
25
Installing the Inverter
Open the terminal cover, remove the cable guides, and then install the ground connection
as specified. Complete the cable connections by connecting an appropriately rated cable to
the terminals on the power and control terminal blocks.
Read the following information carefully before carrying out wiring connections to the
inverter. All warning instructions must be followed.
26
Installing the Inverter
1 Loosen the bolt that secures the terminal cover. Then remove the cover by lifting it from
the bottom and away from the front.
3 Connect the cables to the power terminals and the control terminals. For cable
specifications, refer to 1.5 Cable Selection on page 14.
27
Installing the Inverter
1 Locate the ground terminal and connect an appropriately rated ground cable to the
terminals. Refer to 1.5 Cable Selection on page 14 to find the appropriate cable
specification for your installation.
28
Installing the Inverter
315~500kW (3-Phase)
2 Connect the other ends of the ground cables to the supply earth (ground) terminal
Note
Install ground connections for the inverter and the motor by following the correct specifications
to ensure safe and accurate operation. Using the inverter and the motor without the specified
grounding connections may result in electric shock.
This product can cause a D.C current in the protective earthing conductor. If a RCD or
monitoring (RCM) device is used for protection, only RCD or RCM of Type B is allowed on
supply side of this product.
• Apply rated torques to the terminal screws. Loose screws may cause short circuits and
29
Installing the Inverter
malfunctions. Tightening the screw too much may damage the terminals and cause short
circuits and malfunctions.
• Use copper wires only with 600 V, 75 ℃ rating for the power terminal wiring, and 300 V,
75 ℃ rating for the control terminal wiring.
• Power supply wirings must be connected to the R, S, and T terminals. Connecting them to
the U, V, W terminals causes internal damages to the inverter. Motor should be connected
to the U, V, and W Terminals. Arrangement of the phase sequence is not necessary.
• Equipment must only be fitted to the closed electric operating areas.
Attention
• Appliquer des couples de marche aux vis des bornes. Des vis desserrées peuvent
provoquer des courts-circuits et des dysfonctionnements. Ne pas trop serrer la vis, car
cela risque d’endommager les bornes et de provoquer des courts-circuits et des
dysfonctionnements.
• Utiliser uniquement des fils de cuivre avec une valeur nominale de 600 V, 90 ℃ pour
le câblage de la borne d’alimentation, et une valeur nominale de 300 V, 75 ℃ pour le
câblage de la borne de commande.
• Les câblages de l’alimentation électrique doivent être connectés aux bornes R, S et T.
Leur connexion aux bornes U, V et W provoque des dommages internes à l’onduleur.
Le moteur doit être raccordé aux bornes U, V et W. L’arrangement de l’ordre de phase
n’est pas nécessaire.
30
Installing the Inverter
0.75–30 kW (3-Phase)
31
Installing the Inverter
37–90 kW (3-Phase)
32
Installing the Inverter
110–250kW (3-Phase)
P(+)
N(-)
33
Installing the Inverter
315–500kW (3-Phase)
P(+)
N(-)
34
Installing the Inverter
Note
• Apply a DC input to the P2 (+) and N (-) terminals to operate the inverter on DC voltage
input.
• Use STP (Shielded Twisted Pair) cables to connect a remotely located motor with the
inverter. Do not use 3 core cables.
• Make sure that the total cable length does not exceed 492 ft (150 m). For inverters < = 3.7
kW capacity, ensure that the total cable length does not exceed 165 ft (50 m).
• Long cable runs can cause reduced motor torque in low frequency applications due to
voltage drop. Long cable runs also increase a circuit’s susceptibility to stray capacitance
and may trigger over-current protection devices or result in malfunction of equipment
connected to the inverter.
• Voltage drop is calculated by using the following formula:
• Voltage Drop (V) = [√3 X cable resistance (mΩ/m) X cable length (m) X current (A)] / 1000
• Use cables with the largest possible cross-sectional area to ensure that voltage drop is
minimized over long cable runs. Lowering the carrier frequency and installing a micro
surge filter may also help to reduce voltage drop.
Distance < 165 ft (50 m) < 330 ft (100 m) > 330 ft (100 m)
Allowed Carrier Frequency <15 kHz <5 kHz <2.5 kHz
Do not connect power to the inverter until installation has been fully completed and the inverter
is ready to be operated. Doing so may result in electric shock.
• Power supply cables must be connected to the R, S, and T terminals. Connecting power
cables to other terminals will damage the inverter.
• Use insulated ring lugs when connecting cables to R/S/T and U/V/W terminals.
• The inverter’s power terminal connections can cause harmonics that may interfere with
other communication devices located near to the inverter. To reduce interference the
installation of noise filters or line filters may be required.
• To avoid circuit interruption or damaging connected equipment, do not install phase-
advanced condensers, surge protection, or electronic noise filters on the output side of the
inverter.
• Connect the MC to the output of the inverter and avoid MC ON / OFF state during
operation.
(It may cause inverter trip and burn-out.)
35
Installing the Inverter
Factory
Switch Description
Default
SW1 Terminating Resistor selection switch (Left: On, Right: Off) Right: OFF
SW2 NPN/PNP mode selection switch (Left: PNP, Right: NPN) Right: NPN
SW3 V1/T1 (PTC) mode selection switch (Left: V1, Right: T1) Left: V1
analog voltage/current input terminal selection switch (Left: I2, Right:
SW4 Left: I2
V2)
analog voltage/current output terminal selection switch
SW5 Left: VO
(Left: VO, Right: IO)
36
Installing the Inverter
37
Installing the Inverter
38
Installing the Inverter
39
Installing the Inverter
• While making wiring connections at the control terminals ensure that the total cable length
does not exceed 165 ft (50 m).
• Ensure that the length of any safety related wiring does not exceed 100 ft (30 m).
• Ensure that the cable length between the keypad and the inverter does not exceed 10 ft
(3.04 m). Cable connections longer than 10 ft (3.04 m) may cause signal errors.
• Use ferrite material to protect signal cables from electro-magnetic interference.
• Take care when supporting cables using cable ties, to apply the cable ties no closer than 6
inches from the inverter. This provides sufficient access to fully close the terminal cover.
40
Installing the Inverter
Select PNP using the PNP/NPN selection switch (SW2). Note that the factory default
setting is NPN mode. CM is the common ground terminal for all analog inputs at the
terminal, and P24 is 24 V internal source. If you are using an external 24 V source, build a
circuit that connects the external source (-) and the CM terminal.
41
Installing the Inverter
Select NPN using the PNP/NPN selection switch (SW2). Note that the factory default
setting is NPN mode. CM is the common ground terminal for all analog inputs at the
terminal, and P24 is 24 V internal source.
42
Installing the Inverter
Step 6 Disabling the EMC Filter for Power Sources with Asymmetrical
Grounding
H100, 400 V 0.75–55 kW, 110~500kW(3 phase) inverters have EMC filters built-in and
activated as a factory default design. An EMC filter prevents electromagnetic interference
by reducing radio emissions from the inverter. EMC filter use is not always recommended,
as it increases leakage current. If an inverter uses a power source with an asymmetrical
grounding connection, the EMC filter must be turned off.
A 3-phase
The end of a connection
single phase without
is grounded grounding
(TN Systems) (TN
Systems)
• Do not activate the EMC filter if the inverter uses a power source with an asymmetrical
grounding structure (corner-earthed systems), for example a grounded delta connection.
Personal injury or death by electric shock may result.
• Wait at least 10 minutes before opening the covers and exposing the terminal connections.
Before starting work on the inverter, test the connections to ensure all DC voltage has been
fully discharged. Personal injury or death by electric shock may result.
Before using the inverter, confirm the power supply’s grounding system. Disable the EMC
filter if the power source has an asymmetrical grounding connection.
43
Installing the Inverter
Refer to the figures below to locate the EMC filter on/off terminal and replace the metal bolt
with the plastic bolt. If the EMC filter is required in the future, reverse the steps and replace
the plastic bolt with the metal bolt to reconnect the EMC filter.
If the EMC filter is required in the future, reverse the steps and replace the plastic bolt with
the metal bolt to enable the EMC filter.
44
Installing the Inverter
Follow the instructions listed below to disable the EMC filters for the H100 inverters rated for
37–55 kW.
1 Remove the EMC ground cover located at the bottom of the inverter.
2 Remove the EMC ground cable from the right terminal (EMC filter-ON / factory default),
and connect it to the left terminal (EMC filter-OFF / for power sources with
asymmetrical grounding).
If the EMC filter is required in the future, reverse the steps and connect the EMC ground
cable to the right terminal to enable the EMC filter.
45
Installing the Inverter
Note
The terminal on the right is used to ENABLE the EMC filter (factory default). The terminal on the
left is used to DISABLE the EMC filter (for power sources with asymmetrical grounding).
46
Installing the Inverter
47
Installing the Inverter
48
Installing the Inverter
Is the total cable length of all control wiring < 165 ft (100
p.40
m)?
Is the total length of safety wiring < 100 ft (30 m)? p.40
Are optional cards connected correctly? -
49
Installing the Inverter
1 Turn on the power supply to the inverter. Ensure that the keypad display light is on.
2 Select the command source.
3 Set a frequency reference, and then check the following:
• If V1 is selected as the frequency reference source, does the reference change
according to the input voltage at VR?
• If V2 is selected as the frequency reference source, is the voltage/current selector
switch (SW4) set to ‘voltage’, and does the reference change according to the input
voltage?
• If I2 is selected as the frequency reference source, is the voltage/current selector
switch (SW4) set to ‘current’, and does the reference change according to the input
current?
4 Set the acceleration and deceleration time.
5 Start the motor and check the following:
• Ensure that the motor rotates in the correct direction (refer to the note below).
• Ensure that the motor accelerates and decelerates according to the set times, and
that the motor speed reaches the frequency reference.
Note
If the forward command (Fx) is on, the motor should rotate counterclockwise when viewed from
the load side of the motor. If the motor rotates in the reverse direction, switch the cables at the U
and V terminals.
50
Installing the Inverter
Remarque
Si la commande avant (Fx) est activée, le moteur doit tourner dans le sens anti-horaire si
on le regarde côté charge du moteur. Si le moteur tourne dans le sens inverse, inverser
les câbles aux bornes U et V.
• Check the parameter settings before running the inverter. Parameter settings may have to
be adjusted depending on the load.
• To avoid damaging the inverter, do not supply the inverter with an input voltage that
exceeds the rated voltage for the equipment.
• Before running the motor at maximum speed, confirm the motor’s rated capacity. As
inverters can be used to easily increase motor speed, use caution to ensure that motor
speeds do not accidently exceed the motor’s rated capacity.
51
Perform Basic Operations
52
Perform Basic Operations
[PROG / Ent]
Used to select, confirm, or save a parameter value.
Key
[Up] key Switch between codes or increase or decrease parameter
[Down] key values.
[Left] key Switch between groups or move the cursor during parameter
[Right] key setup or modification.
Used to perform special functions, such as user code
[MULTI] Key
registration.
Used to cancel an input during parameter setup.
Pressing the [ESC] key before pressing the [PROG / ENT]
key reverts the parameter value to the previously set value.
Pressing the [ESC] key while editing the codes in any function
[ESC] Key
group makes the keypad display the first code of the function
group.
Pressing the [ESC] key while moving through the modes
makes the keypad display Monitor mode.
[HAND] Key Used to switch to HAND (local/manual) operation mode.
53
Perform Basic Operations
Status bar
54
Perform Basic Operations
55
Perform Basic Operations
56
Perform Basic Operations
8 Setting range Displays the value range for the selected parameter.
9 Set value Displays the currently set value for the code.
57
Perform Basic Operations
58
Perform Basic Operations
Keypad
Mode Name Description
Display
Displays the inverter’s operation status information. In
this mode, information including the inverter’s
Monitor mode MON
frequency reference, operation frequency, output
current, and voltage may be monitored.
Used to configure the functions required to operate the
Parameter mode PAR inverter. These functions are divided into 14 groups
based on purpose and complexity.
Used to define User groups and Macro groups. These
user-definable groups allow specific functions of the
inverter to be grouped and managed in separate
User & Macro
U&M groups.
mode
This mode is not displayed when you navigate through
the modes if no user groups or Macro groups have
been defined.
Used to monitor the inverter’s fault trip information,
including the previous fault trip history.
When a fault trip occurs during inverter operation, the
Trip mode TRP operation frequency, output current, and output voltage
of the inverter at the time of the fault may be monitored.
This mode is not displayed if the inverter is not at fault
and fault trip history does not exist.
Used to configure the inverter features that are not
directly related to the operation of the inverter. The
settings you can configure in the Config mode include
Config mode CNF
keypad display language options, monitor mode
environment settings, communication module display
settings, and parameter duplication and initialization.
59
Perform Basic Operations
60
Perform Basic Operations
Function Group
Keypad Display Description
Name
Used to put the frequently accessed function
parameters together into a group. User parameter
User USR
groups can be configured using the multi-function
key on the keypad.
Provides different factory-preset groups of functions
based on the type of load.
Macro MCx Groups MC1, MC2, or MC3 is displayed when the
user selects the type of desired load. Macro groups
can be selected in CNF mode.
61
Perform Basic Operations
User & Macro mode and Trip mode are not displayed when all the inverter settings are set
to the factory default (User & Macro mode must be configured before it is displayed on the
keypad, and Trip mode is displayed only when the inverter is at fault, or has previous trip
fault history).
Follow the examples below to learn how to switch between operation modes.
1 Turn on the inverter. The inverter enters OFF mode and the OFF LED turns on.
2 Move to Parameter mode and set DRV-07 (frequency reference) to ‘0 (keypad)’.
3 Press the [HAND] key to enter HAND mode (local control mode). HAND mode LED
turns on (the OFF LED turns off) and the inverter begins to operate.
4 Press the [OFF] key to stop the inverter operation. The inverter stops operating and the
OFF LED turns on.
62
Perform Basic Operations
1 In OFF mode (when the OFF LED is on), move to Parameter mode and configure the
command source at DRV-07 (frequency reference source).
2 Press the [AUTO] key to enter AUTO mode. In AUTO mode, the inverter operates
based on the input from the command source set at DRV-07. For example, if DRV-07
(frequency reference source) is set to ‘0 (Keypad)’, the frequency reference is set, and
the run command is set to ‘ON’, the inverter starts operating as soon as the [AUTO]
key on the keypad is pressed.
3 Press the [Auto] key again to stop the inverter operation using the keypad. In AUTO
mode, the inverter begins or stops operating when the [AUTO] key is pressed.
Note
• You can stop the inverter operation by pressing the [OFF] key when the command source
is set to ‘Keypad.’ In this case, however, the inverter enters OFF mode from AUTO mode.
• If the network communication is set as the command source, the inverter is operable only
in AUTO mode. For example, if the run command is set to ‘ON’ via the network
communication and the inverter is in OFF mode, the [AUTO] key must be pressed to start
the inverter operation.
• The inverter is operable only in HAND and AUTO modes, but the Fire mode functions
operate even when the inverter is in OFF mode.
63
Perform Basic Operations
64
Perform Basic Operations
65
Perform Basic Operations
66
Perform Basic Operations
67
Perform Basic Operations
68
Perform Basic Operations
The following example shows how to navigate directly to code DRV- 09 from the initial code
(DRV-00 Jump Code) in the Drive group.
69
Perform Basic Operations
70
Perform Basic Operations
71
Perform Basic Operations
The following example shows how to configure the display items in HAND mode.
72
Perform Basic Operations
This item can be configured only when the inverter is operating in AUTO mode. In HAND or
OFF mode, this monitoring item displays frequency reference only.
The following example shows how to configure this monitoring item in AUTO mode.
73
Perform Basic Operations
74
Perform Basic Operations
75
Perform Basic Operations
76
Perform Basic Operations
77
Learning Basic Features
78
Learning Basic Features
79
Learning Basic Features
80
Learning Basic Features
1 On the keypad, use the [Up], [Down], [Left], or [Right] keys to set the frequency
reference.
2 Press the [HAND] key. The HAND LED turns on and the inverter starts operating in
HAND mode.
3 Press the [OFF] key. The OFF LED turns on and the inverter stops operating.
81
Learning Basic Features
Follow the instructions listed below to operate the inverter in AUTO mode.
Used to enter the OFF mode (standby mode) or to reset fault trips.
Used to enter the AUTO operation mode or to start or stop inverter operation
in AUTO mode.
Turns on red (steady) while the inverter is in OFF mode (standby), and
OFF LED flashes then a fault trip occurs. The LED turns on red (steady) again when the
fault trip condition is released.
Turns on green (steady) when the inverter operates in Auto mode, and
AUTO LED
flashes green when the inverter is in AUTO mode, but is not operating.
82
Learning Basic Features
Mode Description
In HAND mode, operation is available only by the keypad input. In Monitor
mode, the currently set frequency reference is displayed at all times.
Also, in HAND mode:
• The first monitoring item is used to adjust the frequency with the
up/down and left/right keys. The set frequency is reflected in DRV-02
(HAND Cmd Freq).
• The motor’s rotation direction can be set at DRV-02 (Keypad Run Dir).
• Terminal block functions do not operate (with the exception of BX,
External Trip, and multi-step acc/dec operation related terminal
HAND Mode functions).
(Locally • Fire mode commands take the highest priority (if any are given).
controlled
operation mode) • The following advanced features are not available:
- PID / EPID control
- Flow compensation
- Pump clean
- Load tuning
- Motor preheating
- Time scheduling
- PowerOn resume
- Multiple motor control
• Inverter monitoring and protection features are available in HAND
mode.
In OFF mode, the inverter operation stops. Pressing the OFF key during
HAND/AUTO mode operations will cause the OFF LED to turn on. Then,
the inverter stops operating or decelerates and stops, according to the
deceleration options set by the user.
OFF Mode Also, in AUTO mode:
(Standby)
• Terminal block functions do not operate (with the exception of BX,
External Trip and multi-step acc/dec operation related terminal
functions).
• Fire mode commands take the highest priority (if any are given).
AUTO Mode
In AUTO mode, the inverter operates based on the command from the
(Remotely
command source set at DRV-06 (Cmd Source), with the frequency
controlled
reference from the source set at DRV-07 (Freq Ref Src).
operation mode)
83
Learning Basic Features
Codes /
Description
Functions
DRV-01
Frequency reference in AUTO mode when DRV-07 is set to’ KeyPad’.
Cmd Frequency
DRV-02 Rotation direction of the keypad command in the HAND or AUTO mode.
KeyPad Run Dir Settings Description
0 Forward Fx operation
1 Reverse Rx operation
DRV-05 To make HAND-OFF-AUTO enabled/disabled
KPD H.O.A Lock Settings Description
0 Locked To make HAND-OFF-AUTO disabled and turn Auto mode
1 During If [DRV-06 Cmd Source] is Fx/Rx-1, Fx/Rx-2, Int485 or
Run fieldbus, HAND-OFF-AUTO is enabled only during working
3 Unlocked To make HAND-OFF-AUTO enabled
Frequency displayed at the monitor display item (Monitor Line-1) when
DRV-25
the HAND key is pressed in other modes (default frequency reference for
HAND Cmd Freq
HAND mode).
OUT-31–36
Set AUTO State (36) to ensure that the inverter is in AUTO mode.
Relay 1–5
OUT-31–36
Set HAND State (37) to ensure that the inverter is in HAND mode.
Relay 1–5
Mode Description
Press the HAND key in AUTO mode to switch to HAND mode. The inverter
operates as follows based on the setting at DRV-26 (Hand Ref Mode).
Settings Description
AUTOHAN
0 Hand The inverter operates based on the operation direction
D
Parameter set at DRV-02 (Keypad Run Dir) and the frequency
reference set at DRV-25 (HAND Cmd Freq).
1 Follow The inverter takes over the operation direction and the
Auto frequency reference from the settings for AUTO mode
84
Learning Basic Features
Mode Description
and keeps performing the same operation. If the
inverter was stopped in AUTO mode, the operation
direction is set as Fx and the frequency reference is
set as 0 (no inverter output).
Press the AUTO key in HAND mode to switch to AUTO mode. The inverter
HANDAUT operates based on the command source and frequency reference settings
O set at DRV-06 and DRV-07. If DRV-06 (Cmd Source) is set to ‘keypad’
press the AUTO key once again to start inverter operation.
Press the OFF key in AUTO mode to stop the inverter operation (the
AUTOOFF
inverter enters OFF mode).
Press the AUTO key in OFF mode to switch to AUTO mode. The inverter
operates based on the command source and frequency reference settings
OFFAUTO
set at DRV-06 and DRV-07. If DRV-06 (Cmd Source) is set to ‘keypad’
press the AUTO key once again to start inverter operation.
Press the OFF key in HAND mode to stop the inverter operation (the
HANDOFF
inverter enters OFF mode).
Press the HAND key in OFF mode to switch to HAND mode. The inverter
OFFHAND operates based on the operation direction set at DRV-02 (Keypad Run Dir)
and the frequency reference set at DRV-25 (HAND Cmd Freq).
If the inverter was operating in AUTO mode at the time of the low voltage trip following the
power interruption, the inverter turns on in AUTO mode, and the operation may vary
depending on the inverter’s ‘PowerOn Resume’ and ‘Power-on run’ settings.
Note
• To operate the inverter using the keypad in AUTO mode, set DRV-06 (CMD Source) to
‘KeyPad’ and press the AUTO key to enter AUTO mode. Then, press the AUTO key on
the keypad once again to start the inverter operation.
• If a fault trip occurs during an operation in the AUTO or HAND mode, the inverter can
be reset by pressing the OFF key. After the reset, the fault trip is released and the
inverter enters OFF mode.
• If a fault trip occurs during an operation in the AUTO or HAND mode, the inverter can
be reset using the reset signal from the multi-function input terminal as well. In this
case, the inverter turns back on in AUTO mode after the fault trip is released.
85
Learning Basic Features
Use caution when the inverter is set to operate in AUTO mode by commands over
communication, and if COM-96 (PowerOn Resume) is set to ‘yes’, as the motor will begin
rotating when the inverter starts up, without additional run commands.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
0 KeyPad-1
1 KeyPad-2
2 V1
4 V2
Frequency 5 I2
DRV 7 reference Freq Ref Src 0–11 -
source 6 Int 485
7 Field Bus
9 Pulse
10* V3
11 I3
* ‘10(V3)~11(I3)’ of DRV-07 are available when Extension IO option is equipped. Refer to
Extension IO option manual for more detailed information.
86
Learning Basic Features
Parameter
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit
Setting
0.00, Low
Frequency
01 Cmd Frequency 0.00 Freq– High Hz
reference
Freq*
DRV
Frequency
KeyPad-
07 reference Freq Ref Src 0 0–11 -
1
source
* You cannot set a frequency reference that exceeds the Max. Frequency, as configured
with DRV-20.
LCD
Group Code Name Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Display
Frequency
Freq Ref KeyPad-
07 reference 1 0–11 -
Src 2
DRV source
Frequency 0.00, Low Freq–
01 0.00 Hz
reference High Freq*
*You cannot set a frequency reference that exceeds the Max. Frequency, as configured
with DRV-20.
You can set and modify a frequency reference by setting voltage inputs when using the V1
terminal. Use voltage inputs ranging from 0–10 V (unipolar) for forward only operation. Use
voltage inputs ranging from -10 to +10 V (bipolar) for both directions, where negative
voltage inputs are used in reverse operations.
Parameter
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit
Setting
Frequency Freq Ref
DRV 07 2 V1 0–11 -
reference source Src
Frequency at 0.00–
Freq at Maximum
01 maximum analog Max. Hz
100% frequency
input Frequency
V1
05 V1 input monitor 0.00 0.00–12.00 V
Monitor[V]
06 V1 polarity options V1 Polarity 0 Unipolar 0–1 -
V1 input filter time
07 V1 Filter 10 0–10000 msec
constant
IN V1 minimum input
08 V1 volt x1 0.00 0.00–10.00 V
voltage
V1 output at
09 minimum voltage V1 Perc y1 0.00 0.00–100.00 %
(%)
V1 maximum input
10 V1 Volt x2 10.00 0 .00– 12.00 V
voltage
V1 output at
11 maximum voltage V1 Perc y2 100.00 0–100 %
(%)
88
Learning Basic Features
Parameter
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit
Setting
Rotation direction
16 V1 Inverting 0 No 0–1 -
options
V1 0.00*, 0.04–
17 V1 Quantizing level 0.04 %
Quantizing 10.00
* Quantizing is disabled if ‘0’ is selected.
Code Description
Configures the frequency reference at the maximum input voltage when a
potentiometer is connected to the control terminal block. A frequency set
with code IN-01 becomes the maximum frequency only if the value set in
code IN-11 (or IN-15) is 100 (%).
IN-01 Freq at
• Set code IN-01 to 40.00 and use default values for codes IN-02–IN-
100%
16. Motor will run at 40.00 Hz when a 10 V input is provided at V1.
• Set code IN-11 to 50.00 and use default values for codes IN-01–IN-
16. Motor will run at 30.00 Hz (50% of the default maximum
frequency–60 Hz) when a 10 V input is provided at V1.
IN-05 V1
Configures the inverter to monitor the input voltage at V1.
Monitor[V]
V1 Filter may be used when there are large variations between reference
frequencies. Variations can be mitigated by increasing the time constant,
but this requires an increased response time.
The value t (time) indicates the time required for the frequency to reach
63% of the reference, when external input voltages are provided in multiple
steps.
IN-07
V1 Filter
[V1 Filter ]
IN-08 V1 volt x1– These parameters are used to configure the gradient level and offset
89
Learning Basic Features
IN-11 V1 Perc y2 values of the Output Frequency, based on the Input Voltage.
Inverts the direction of rotation. Set this code to ‘1 (Yes)’ if you need the
IN-16 V1 Inverting
motor to run in the opposite direction from the current rotation.
Quantizing may be used when the noise level is high in the analog input
(V1 terminal) signal.
Quantizing is useful when you are operating a noise-sensitive system,
because it suppresses any signal noise. However, quantizing will diminish
system sensitivity (resultant power of the output frequency will decrease
based on the analog input).
You can also turn on the low-pass filter using code IN-07 to reduce the
noise, but increasing the value will reduce responsiveness and may cause
pulsations (ripples) in the output frequency.
When the analog input is increased, an increase to the input equal to 75%
of the set value will change the output frequency, and then the frequency
will increase according to the set value. Likewise, when the analog input
decreases, a decrease in the input equal to 75% of the set value will make
an initial change to the output frequency.
90
Learning Basic Features
[V1 Quantizing]
0–10 V Input Voltage Setting Details
91
Learning Basic Features
Parameter
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit
Setting
Frequency
DRV 07 Freq Ref Src 2 V1 0–11 -
reference source
Frequency at
Freq at 0– Max
01 maximum analog 60.00 Hz
100% Frequency
input
-12.00–12.00
05 V1 input monitor V1 Monitor 0.00 V
V
06 V1 polarity options V1 Polarity 1 Bipolar 0–1 -
IN
V1 minimum input
12 V1- volt x1 0.00 -10.00–0.00 V V
voltage
V1 output at
-100.00–
13 minimum voltage V1- Perc y1 0.00 %
0.00%
(%)
92
Learning Basic Features
Parameter
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit
Setting
voltage V
V1 output at
-100.00–
15 maximum voltage V1- Perc y2 -100.00 %
0.00%
(%)
Code Description
Sets the gradient level and off-set value of the output frequency in relation
to the input voltage. These codes are displayed only when IN-06 is set to ‘1
(bipolar)’.
As an example, if the minimum input voltage (at V1) is set to -2 (V) with
10% output ratio, and the maximum voltage is set to -8 (V) with 80% output
ratio respectively, the output frequency will vary within the range of 6–48
Hz.
IN-12 V1- volt
x1–
IN-15 V1- Perc
y2
For details about the 0–+10 V analog inputs, refer to the code descriptions
IN-08 V1 volt x1–IN-11 V1 Perc y2 on page 89.
93
Learning Basic Features
Parameter
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit
Setting
Frequency Freq Ref
DRV 07 5 I2 0–11 -
reference source Src
Frequency at
Freq at 0–Maximum
01 maximum analog 60.00 Hz
100% Frequency
input
50 I2 input monitor I2 Monitor 0.00 0.00–24.00 mA
I2 input filter time
52 I2 Filter 10 0–10000 ms
constant
I2 minimum input
53 I2 Curr x1 4.00 0.00–20.00 mA
current
I2 output at
54 minimum current I2 Perc y1 0.00 0–100 %
IN
(%)
I2 maximum input
55 I2 Curr x2 20.00 0.00–24.00 mA
current
I2 output at
56 maximum current I2 Perc y2 100.00 0.00–100.00 %
(%)
I2 rotation direction
61 I2 Inverting 0 No 0–1 -
options
I2 0.00*, 0.04–
62 I2 Quantizing level 0.04 %
Quantizing 10.00
* Quantizing is disabled if ‘0’ is selected.
94
Learning Basic Features
Code Description
Configures the frequency reference for operation at the maximum current
(when IN-55 is set to 100%).
• If IN-01 is set to 40.00, and default settings are used for IN-53–56,
IN-01 Freq at 20 mA input current (max) to I2 will produce a frequency reference of
100% 40.00 Hz.
• If IN-56 is set to 50.00, and default settings are used for IN-01 (60
Hz) and IN-53–55, 20 mA input current (max) to I2 will produce a
frequency reference of 30.00 Hz (50% of 60 Hz).
IN-50 I2 Monitor Used to monitor input current at I2.
Configures the time for the operation frequency to reach 63% of target
IN-52 I2 Filter
frequency based on the input current at I2.
Configures the gradient level and off-set value of the output frequency.
IN-53 I2 Curr
x1–
IN-56 I2 Perc y2
95
Learning Basic Features
Parameter
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit
Setting
Frequency Freq Ref
DRV 07 4 V2 0–11 -
reference source Src
35 V2 input display V2 Monitor 0.00 0.00–12.00 V
V2 input filter time
37 V2 Filter 10 0–10000 msec
constant
Minimum V2 input
38 V2 Volt x1 0.00 0.00–10.00 V
voltage
Output% at
39 minimum V2 V2 Perc y1 0.00 0.00–100.00 %
voltage
IN Maximum V2 input
40 V2 Volt x2 10.00 0.00–10.00 V
voltage
Output% at
41 maximum V2 V2 Perc y2 100.00 0.00–100.00 %
voltage
Invert V2 rotational
46 V2 Inverting 0 No 0–1 -
direction
V2 0.00*, 0.04–
47 V2 quantizing level 0.04 %
Quantizing 10.00
* Quantizing is disabled if ‘0’ is selected.
96
Learning Basic Features
IN Output% at TI
94 TI Perc y1 0.00 0.00–100.00 %
minimum pulse
TI Input maximum
95 TI Pls x2 32.00 0.00–32.00 kHz
pulse
Output% at TI
96 TI Perc y2 100.00 0.00–100.00 %
maximum pulse
Invert TI direction
97 TI Inverting 0 No 0–1 -
of rotation
TI 0.00*, 0.04–
98 TI quantizing level 0.04 %
Quantizing 10.00
*Quantizing is disabled if ‘0’ is selected.
97
Learning Basic Features
Code Description
Configures the frequency reference at the maximum pulse input. The
frequency reference is based on 100% of the value set with IN-96.
• If IN-01 is set to 40.00 and codes IN-93–96 are set at default, 32
IN-01 Freq at
kHz input to TI yields a frequency reference of 40.00 Hz.
100%
• If IN-96 is set to 50.00 and codes IN-01, IN-93–95 are set at
default, 32 kHz input to the TI terminal yields a frequency reference
of 30.00 Hz.
IN-91 TI Monitor Displays the pulse frequency supplied at TI.
Sets the time for the pulse input at TI to reach 63% of its nominal
IN-92 TI Filter
frequency (when the pulse frequency is supplied in multiple steps).
Configures the gradient level and offset values for the output frequency.
IN-97 TI Inverting–
Identical to IN-16–17 (refer to IN-16 V1 Inverting/IN-17 V1 Quantizing
IN-98 TI
on page 90)
Quantizing
98
Learning Basic Features
Parameter
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit
Setting
Frequency reference Freq Ref
DRV 07 6 Int 485 0–11 -
source Src
Integrated RS-485
1–
01 communication Int485 St ID - 1 -
MaxComID*
inverter ID
ModBus
0
RTU
Integrated
Int485 2 LS Inv 485 -
02 communication 0–6
Proto
protocol 4 BACnet
COM
5 Metasys-N2
Modbus
6**
Master
Integrated Int485
03 3 9600 bps 0–8 -
communication speed BaudR
0 D8/PN/S1
Integrated 1 D8/PN/S2
Int485
04 communication frame 0–3 -
Mode
configuration 2 D8/PE/S1
3 D8/PO/S1
*If AP1-40 is set to ‘4(Serve Drv)’, MaxComID is ‘8’, and if COM-02 is set to ‘4(BACnet),
MaxComID is ‘127’. Otherwise MaxComID is ‘250’.
99
Learning Basic Features
Parameter Setting
Group Code Name LCD Display Unit
Setting Range
0 Keypad-1
1 Keypad-2
2 V1
4 V2
Frequency reference 5 I2
DRV 07 Freq Ref Src 0–11 -
source 6 Int 485
7 Fied Bus
9 Pulse
10* V3
11 I3
65– Px terminal Px Define(Px: Analog
IN 23 0–55 -
71 configuration P1–P7) Hold
*‘10(V3)~11(I3)’ of DRV-07 are available when Extension IO option is equipped. Refer to
Extension IO option manual for more detailed information.
100
Learning Basic Features
LCD
Group Code Name Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Display
Parameter
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit
Setting
0.00, Low
50– Multi-step
BAS Step Freq - 1–7 - Freq– High Hz
56 frequency 1–7
Freq*
7 Speed-L -
65– Px terminal Px Define(Px:
8 Speed-M 0–55 -
71 configuration P1–P7)
IN 9 Speed-H -
Multi-step
89 command delay InCheck Time 1 1–5000 ms
time
101
Learning Basic Features
Code Description
BAS Group 50–
Configure multi-step frequency 1–7.
56
Choose the terminals to setup as multi-step inputs, and then set the
relevant codes (IN-65–71) to 7 (Speed-L), 8 (Speed-M), or 9 (Speed-H).
Provided that terminals P5, P6, and P7 have been set to Speed-L, Speed-
M and Speed-H respectively, the following multi-step operation will be
available.
IN-65–71 Px
Define
Speed Fx/Rx P7 P6 P5
0 - - -
1 - -
2 - -
3 -
4 - -
5 -
6 -
7
Set a time interval for the inverter to check for additional terminal block
inputs after receiving an input signal.
IN-89 InCheck
After adjusting IN-89 to 100 ms and an input signal is received at P6, the
Time
inverter will search for inputs at other terminals for 100 ms, before
proceeding to accelerate or decelerate based on the configuration at P6.
102
Learning Basic Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
0 Keypad
1 Fx/Rx-1
Since the keypad is now the command source, operation starts when the AUTO key is
pressed, and it stops when the AUTO key is pressed again.
The OFF key may be used to stop the operation as well, but the inverter operation mode
will be changed to OFF mode.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Command
DRV 06 Cmd Source 0 KeyPad 0–5 -
source
103
Learning Basic Features
Setting
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
Range
Code Description
DRV-06Cmd
Set to 1 (Fx/Rx-1).
Source
IN-65–71 Px Assign a terminal for forward (Fx) operation.
Define Assign a terminal for reverse (Rx) operation.
104
Learning Basic Features
Parameter
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit
Setting
Command Cmd
DRV 06 2 Fx/Rx-2 0–5 -
source Source
Px Define 1 Fx
65– Px terminal
IN (Px: P1 – 0–55 -
71 configuration 2 Rx
P7)
Code Description
105
Learning Basic Features
Parameter Setting
Group Code Name LCD Display Unit
Setting Range
DRV 06 Command source Cmd Source 3 Int 485 0–5 -
Integrated
1–
01 communication Int485 St ID 1 -
MaxComID*
inverter ID
Integrated
ModBus
02 communication Int485 Proto 0 0–6 -
RTU
protocol
COM
Integrated
9600
03 communication Int485 BaudR 3 0–8 -
bps
speed
Integrated
D8 / PN
04 communication Int485 Mode 0 0–3 -
/ S1
frame setup
*If AP1-40 is set to ‘4(Serve Drv)’, MaxComID is ‘8’, and if COM-02 is set to ‘4(BACnet),
MaxComID is ‘127’. Otherwise MaxComID is ‘250’
106
Learning Basic Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
0 None
Run
ADV 09 prevention Run Prevent 1 Forward Prev 0–2 -
options
2 Reverse Prev
Code Description
Choose a direction to prevent.
Setting Description
ADV-09 Run 0 None Do not set run prevention.
Prevent
1 Forward Prev Set forward run prevention.
2 Reverse Prev Set reverse run prevention.
107
Learning Basic Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Command Fx/Rx-1 or
DRV 06 Cmd Source 1, 2 0–5 -
source Fx/Rx-2
Power-on
ADV 10 Power-on run 1 Yes 0–1 -
Run
108
Learning Basic Features
Setting
Group Code Name LCD Display Settings Unit
Range
3 Int 485
DRV 06 Command source Cmd Source 0-5 -
4 Field Bus
PowerOn 0 No
COM 96 Power-on resume 0-1 -
Resume 1 Yes
Note
• To prevent a repeat fault trip from occurring, set CON-71 (speed search options) bit 4 the
same as bit 1. The inverter will perform a speed search at the beginning of the operation.
• If the speed search is not enabled, the inverter will start its operation in a normal V/F
pattern and accelerate the motor. If the inverter has been turned on without ‘reset and
restart’ enabled, the terminal block command must be first turned off, and then turned on
again to begin the inverter’s operation.
Use caution when operating the inverter with Power-on Run enabled as the motor will begin
rotating when the inverter starts up.
109
Learning Basic Features
The number of auto-restarts (PRT-09) refers to the number of times the inverter will try
restarting its operation. If fault trips occur again after restart, the retry number counts down
each time the inverter restarts until the number becomes ‘0.’ Once the inverter restarts
successfully after the initial fault trip, the inverter does not restart until the next fault trip
occurs. The number of auto-restarts set at PRT-09 that decreased after a restart reverts to
the original setting value if successful operation continues for certain period of time.
LCD Setting
Group Code Name Parameter Setting Unit
Display Range
Cmd
DRV 06 Command source 1 Fx/Rx-1 0–5 -
Source
RST
08 Reset restart setup 00 00–11 Bit
Restart
Retry
PRT 09 No. of auto restart 6 0–10 -
Number
Auto restart delay Retry
10 5.0 0.1–600.0 sec
time Delay
110
Learning Basic Features
Note
• To prevent a repeat fault trip from occurring, set CON-71 (speed search options) bit 2 the
same as bit 1. The inverter will perform a speed search at the beginning of the operation.
• If the speed search is not enabled, the inverter will start its operation in a normal V/F
pattern and accelerate the motor. If the inverter has been turned on without ‘reset and
restart’ enabled, the terminal block command must be first turned off, and then turned on
again to begin the inverter’s operation.
Use caution when operating the inverter with Power-on Run enabled as the motor will
begin rotating when the inverter starts up.
Acceleration time set at DRV-03 (Acceleration time) refers to the time required for the
inverter to reach the maximum frequency from a stopped (0 Hz) state. Likewise, the value
set at the DRV-04 (Deceleration time) refers to the time required to return to a stopped state
(0 Hz) from the maximum frequency.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
20.0 0.75~90KW
Acceleration
03 Acc Time 60.0 110~250KW 0.0–600.0 sec
time
100.0 315~500KW
30.0 0.75~90KW
DRV
Deceleration
04 Dec Time 90.0 110~250KW 0.0–600.0 Sec
time
150.0 315~500KW
Maximum
20 Max Freq 60.00 40.00–400.00 Hz
frequency
Acc/Dec Ramp T
BAS 08 0 Max Freq 0–1 -
reference Mode
111
Learning Basic Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
frequency
09 Time scale Time scale 1 0.1 sec 0–2 -
Code Description
Set the parameter value to 0 (Max Freq) to setup Acc/Dec time based on
maximum frequency.
Configuration Description
0 Max Freq Set the Acc/Dec time based on maximum frequency.
1 Delta Freq Set the Acc/Dec time based on operating frequency.
If, for example, maximum frequency is 60.00 Hz, the Acc/Dec times are
set to 5 seconds, and the frequency reference for operation is set at 30 Hz
BAS-08 Ramp T (half of 60 Hz), the time required to reach 30 Hz therefore is 2.5 seconds
Mode (half of 5 seconds).
Use the time scale for all time-related values. It is particularly useful when
a more accurate Acc/Dec times are required because of load
characteristics, or when the maximum time range needs to be extended.
BAS-09 Time Configuration Description
scale 0 0.01 sec Sets 0.01 second as the minimum unit.
1 0.1 sec Sets 0.1 second as the minimum unit.
2 1 sec Sets 1 second as the minimum unit.
Note that the range of maximum time values may change automatically when the units are
changed. If for example, the acceleration time is set at 6000 seconds, a time scale change
from 1 second to 0.01 second will result in a modified acceleration time of 60.00 seconds.
112
Learning Basic Features
Code Description
Set the parameter value to 1 (Delta Freq) to set Acc/Dec times based on
Maximum frequency.
Configuration Description
0 Max Freq Set the Acc/Dec time based on Maximum frequency.
1 Delta Freq Set the Acc/Dec time based on Operation frequency.
If Acc/Dec times are set to 5 seconds, and multiple frequency references
are used in the operation in 2 steps, at 10 Hz and 30 Hz, each acceleration
BAS-08 Ramp T stage will take 5 seconds (refer to the graph below).
Mode
113
Learning Basic Features
Acc/Dec times can be configured via a multi-function terminal by setting the ACC
(acceleration time) and DEC (deceleration time) codes in the DRV group.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
20.0 0.75~90KW
Acceleration
03 Acc Time 60.0 110~250KW 0.0–600.0 sec
time
100.0 315~500KW
DRV
30.0 0.75 ~90KW
Deceleration
04 Dec Time 90.0 110~250KW 0.0–600.0 sec
time
150.0 315~500KW
Multi-step Acc Time 1–7 x.xx 0.0–600.0 sec
70– acceleration/D
BAS
83 eceleration
time1–7 Dec Time 1–7 x.xx 0.0–600.0 sec
11 XCEL-L
65– Px terminal Px Define 12 XCEL-M 0–55 -
71 configuration (Px: P1–P7)
IN 13 XCEL-H
Multi-step
89 command In Check Time 1 1–5000 ms
delay time
114
Learning Basic Features
Code Description
BAS-70–82
Set multi-step acceleration time1–7.
Acc Time 1–7
BAS-71–83
Set multi-step deceleration time1–7.
Dec Time 1–7
Choose and configure the terminals to use for multi-step Acc/Dec
time inputs
Configuration Description
11 XCEL-L Acc/Dec command-L
12 XCEL-M Acc/Dec command-M
13 XCEL-H Acc/Dec command-H
Acc/Dec commands are recognized as binary code inputs and will
control the acceleration and deceleration based on parameter values
set with BAS-70–82 and BAS-71–83.
If, for example, the P6 and P7 terminals are set as XCEL-L and XCEL-
M respectively, the following operation will be available.
IN-65–71
Px Define (P1–P7)
Acc/Dec time P7 P6
0 - -
1 -
2 -
3
[Multi-function terminal P6, P7 configuration]
Set the time for the inverter to check for other terminal block inputs. If
IN-89 is set to 100 ms and a signal is supplied to the P6 terminal, the
IN-89 In Check
inverter searches for other inputs over the next 100 ms. When the
Time
time expires, the Acc/Dec time will be set based on the input
received at P6
You can switch between two different sets of Acc/Dec times (Acc/Dec gradients) by
configuring the switch frequency without configuring the multi-function terminals.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
20.0 0.75~90KW
03 Acceleration time Acc Time 60.0 110~250KW 0.0–600.0 sec
100.0 315~500KW
DRV
30.0 0.75~90KW
Deceleration
04 Dec Time 90.0 110~250KW 0.0–600.0 sec
time
150.0 315~500KW
Multi-step
70 acceleration Acc Time-1 20.0 0.0–600.0 sec
time1
BAS
Multi-step
71 deceleration Dec Time-1 20.0 0.0–600.0 sec
time1
Acc/Dec time Xcel 0–Maximum
ADV 60 30.00 Hz
switch frequency Change Fr frequency
Code Description
After the Acc/Dec switch frequency has been set, Acc/Dec gradients
configured at BAS-70 and 71 will be used when the inverter’s operation
frequency is at or below the switch frequency. If the operation frequency
exceeds the switch frequency, the gradient level configured for the
acceleration and deceleration times (set at DRV-03 and DRV-04) will be
ADV-60 used.
Xcel Change Fr If you configure the P1–P7 multi-function input terminals for multi-step
Acc/Dec gradients (XCEL-L, XCEL-M, XCEL-H), the inverter will operate
based on the Acc/Dec inputs at the terminals instead of the Acc/Dec switch
frequency configurations.
The ‘Xcel Change Fr’ parameter is applied only when ADV-24 (Freq Limit
Mode) is set to ‘NO’.
116
Learning Basic Features
Code Description
Parameter
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit
Setting
Ramp T
BAS 08 Acc/Dec reference 0 Max Freq 0–1 -
mode
01 Acceleration pattern Acc Pattern 0 Linear -
0–1
02 Deceleration pattern Dec Pattern 1 S-curve -
S-curve Acc start
03 Acc S Start 40 1–100 %
gradient
117
Learning Basic Features
Code Description
Sets the gradient level as acceleration starts when using an S-curve,
Acc/Dec pattern. ADV-03 defines S-curve gradient level as a percentage,
up to half of total acceleration.
ADV-03 Acc S If the frequency reference and maximum frequency are set at 60 Hz and
Start ADV-03 is set to 50%, ADV-03 configures acceleration up to 30 Hz (half
of 60 Hz). The inverter will operate S-curve acceleration in the 0-15 Hz
frequency range (50% of 30 Hz). Linear acceleration will be applied to the
remaining acceleration within the 15–30 Hz frequency range.
Sets the gradient level as acceleration ends when using an S-curve
Acc/Dec pattern. ADV-03 defines S-curve gradient level as a percentage,
above half of total acceleration.
If the frequency reference and the maximum frequency are set at 60 Hz
ADV-04 Acc S End and ADV-04 is set to 50%, setting ADV-04 configures acceleration to
increase from 30 Hz (half of 60 Hz) to 60 Hz (end of acceleration). Linear
acceleration will be applied within the 30-45 Hz frequency range. The
inverter will perform an S-curve acceleration for the remaining
acceleration in the 45–60 Hz frequency range.
ADV-05 Dec S Sets the rate of S-curve deceleration. Configuration for codes ADV-05
Start – and ADV-06 may be performed the same way as configuring codes ADV-
ADV-06 Dec S End 03 and ADV-04.
118
Learning Basic Features
Note
The Actual Acc/Dec time during an S-curve application
Actual acceleration time = user-configured acceleration time + user-configured acceleration
time x starting gradient level/2 + user-configured acceleration time x ending gradient level/2.
Actual deceleration time = user-configured deceleration time + user-configured deceleration
time x starting gradient level/2 + user-configured deceleration time x ending gradient level/2.
Note that actual Acc/Dec times become greater than user defined Acc/Dec times when S-curve
Acc/Dec patterns are in use.
Configure the multi-function input terminals to stop acceleration or deceleration and operate
the inverter at a fixed frequency.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Px terminal Px Define
IN 65–71 14 XCEL Stop 0–55 -
configuration (Px: P1– P7)
120
Learning Basic Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
09 Control mode Control Mode 0 V/F 0–1 -
IN 18 Base frequency Base Freq 60.00 30.00–400.00 Hz
19 Start frequency Start Freq 0.50 0.01–10.00 Hz
BAS 07 V/F pattern V/F Pattern 0 Linear 0–3 -
Code Description
Sets the base frequency. A base frequency is the inverter’s output
DRV-18 Base
frequency when running at its rated voltage. Refer to the motor’s rating
Freq
plate to set this parameter value.
Sets the start frequency. A start frequency is a frequency at which the
inverter starts voltage output. The inverter does not produce output voltage
while the frequency reference is lower than the set frequency. However, if a
deceleration stop is made while operating above the start frequency, output
voltage will continue until the operation frequency reaches a full-stop (0 Hz).
DRV-19 Start
Freq
121
Learning Basic Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
1 Square
BAS 07 V/F pattern V/F Pattern 0–3 -
3 Square2
Code Description
Sets the parameter value to ‘1 (Square)’ or ‘2 (Square2)’ according to the
load’s start characteristics.
Setting Function
BAS-07 V/F 1 Square The inverter produces output voltage proportional to 1.5
Pattern square of the operation frequency.
3 Square2 The inverter produces output voltage proportional to 2
square of the operation frequency. This setup is ideal for
variable torque loads such as fans or pumps.
122
Learning Basic Features
Parameter
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit
Setting
07 V/F pattern V/F Pattern 2 User V/F 0–3 -
User Frequency 0–Maximum
41 User Freq 1 15.00 Hz
1 frequency
42 User Voltage 1 User Volt 1 25 0–100% %
User Frequency 0–Maximum
43 User Freq 2 30.00 Hz
2 frequency
BAS 44 User Voltage 2 User Volt 2 50 0–100% %
User Frequency 0–Maximum
45 User Freq 3 45.00 Hz
3 frequency
46 User Voltage 3 User Volt 3 75 0–100% %
User Frequency Maximum 0–Maximum
47 User Freq 4 Hz
4 frequency frequency
48 User Voltage 4 User Volt 4 100 0–100% %
Code Description
BAS-41 User Freq Set the parameter values to assign arbitrary frequencies (User Freq x) for
1 –BAS-48 User start and maximum frequencies. Voltages can also be set to correspond
Volt 4 with each frequency, and for each user voltage (User Volt x).
The 100% output voltage in the figure below is based on the parameter settings of BAS-15
(motor rated voltage). If BAS-15 is set to ‘0’ it will be based on the input voltage.
123
Learning Basic Features
• When a normal induction motor is in use, care must be taken not to configure the output
pattern away from a linear V/F pattern. Non-linear V/F patterns may cause insufficient
motor torque or motor overheating due to over-excitation.
• When a user V/F pattern is in use, forward torque boost (DRV-16) and reverse torque
boost (DRV-17) do not operate.
124
Learning Basic Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Torque boost
15 Torque Boost 0 Manual 0–2 -
options
Code Description
DRV-16 Fwd Boost Set torque boost for forward operation.
DRV-17 Rev Boost Set torque boost for reverse operation.
125
Learning Basic Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
torque boost Torque
DRV 15 1 Auto 1 0–2 -
mode Boost
BAS 20 auto tuning Auto Tuning 3 Rs+Lsigma 0–3 -
126
Learning Basic Features
If BAS-15 (motor rated voltage) is set to ‘0’, the inverter corrects the output voltage based
on the input voltage in the stopped condition. If the frequency is higher than the base
frequency, when the input voltage is lower than the parameter setting, the input voltage will
be the inverter output voltage.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Motor rated
BAS 15 Rated Volt 0 170–480 V
voltage
127
Learning Basic Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
ADV 07 Start mode Start mode 0 Acc 0–1 -
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
07 Start mode Start Mode 1 DC-Start 0–1 -
Start DC braking DC-Start
ADV 12 0.00 0.00–60.00 sec
time Time
13 DC Injection Level DC Inj Level 50 0–200 %
128
Learning Basic Features
The amount of DC braking required is based on the motor’s rated current. Do not use DC
braking resistance values that can cause current draw to exceed the rated current of the
inverter. If the DC braking resistance is too high or brake time is too long, the motor may
overheat or be damaged
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
ADV 08 Stop mode Stop Mode 0 Dec 0–4 -
129
Learning Basic Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
08 Stop mode Stop Mode 1 DC Brake 0–4 -
Code Description
Set the time to block the inverter output before DC braking. If the inertia of
the load is great, or if DC braking frequency (ADV-17) is set too high, a fault
ADV-14 DC-
trip may occur due to overcurrent conditions when the inverter supplies DC
Block Time
voltage to the motor. Prevent overcurrent fault trips by adjusting the output
block time before DC braking.
ADV-15 DC-
Set the time duration for the DC voltage supply to the motor.
Brake Time
ADV-16 DC- Set the amount of DC braking to apply. The parameter setting is based on
Brake Level the rated current of the motor.
Set the frequency to start DC braking. When the frequency is reached, the
ADV-17 DC- inverter starts deceleration. If the dwell frequency is set lower than the DC
Brake Freq braking frequency, dwell operation will not work and DC braking will start
instead.
130
Learning Basic Features
• Note that the motor can overheat or be damaged if excessive amount of DC braking is
applied to the motor or DC braking time is set too long.
• DC braking is configured based on the motor’s rated current. To prevent overheating or
damaging motors, do not set the current value higher than the inverter’s rated current.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
ADV 08 Stop Method Stop mode 2 Free-Run 0–4 -
Note that when there is high inertia on the output side and the motor is operating at high speed,
the load’s inertia will cause the motor to continue rotating even if the inverter output is blocked
131
Learning Basic Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
ADV 08 Stop mode Stop Mode 4 Power Braking 0–4 -
• To prevent overheating or damaging the motor, do not apply power braking to the loads
that require frequent deceleration.
• Stall prevention and power braking only operate during deceleration, and power braking
takes priority over stall prevention. In other words, when both bit 3 of PRT-50 (stall
prevention and flux braking) and ADV-08 (braking options) are set, power braking will take
precedence and operate.
• Note that if deceleration time is too short or inertia of the load is too great, an overvoltage
fault trip may occur.
• Note that if a free run stop is used, the actual deceleration time can be longer than the pre-
set deceleration time.
132
Learning Basic Features
Frequency Limit Using Maximum Frequency and Start Frequency - Setting Details
Code Description
Set the lower limit value for speed unit parameters that are expressed in
DRV-19 Start Freq Hz or rpm. If an input frequency is lower than the start frequency, the
parameter value will be 0.00.
Set upper and lower frequency limits. All frequency selections are
restricted to frequencies from within the upper and lower limits.
DRV-20 Max Freq This restriction also applies when you in input a frequency reference
using the keypad.
If you use a high speed motor over 60Hz, there will be individual response
due to the difference in characteristics. Please contact LS ELECTRIC.
133
Learning Basic Features
134
Learning Basic Features
Frequency Limit Using Upper and Lower Limit Frequencies - Setting Details
Code Description
The initial setting is ‘0 (No)’. Changing the setting to ‘1 (Yes)’ allows the
ADV-24 Freq Limit setting of frequencies between the lower limit frequency (ADV-25) and
the upper limit frequency (ADV-26).
ADV-25 Freq Limit
Set an upper limit frequency to all speed unit parameters that are
Lo
expressed in Hz or rpm, except for the base frequency (DRV-18).
ADV-26 Freq Limit
Frequency cannot be set higher.
Hi
• When ADV-24 (Freq Limit) is set to ‘Yes,’ the frequency set at ADV-25 (Freq Limit Lo) is the
minimum frequency (Low Freq). If ADV-24 (Freq Limit) is set to ‘No,’ the frequency set at
DRV-19 (Start Freq) becomes the minimum frequency.
• When ADV-24 (Freq Limit) is set to ‘Yes,’ the frequency set at ADV-26 (Freq Limit Hi) is the
maximum frequency (High Freq). If ADV-24 (Freq Limit) is set to ‘No,’ the frequency set at
DRV-20 (Max Freq) becomes the maximum frequency.
135
Learning Basic Features
When a frequency setting is increased, while the frequency parameter setting value
(voltage, current, RS-485 communication, keypad setting, etc.) is within a jump frequency
band the frequency will be maintained at the lower limit value of the frequency band. Then,
the frequency will increase when the frequency parameter setting exceeds the range of
frequencies used by the frequency jump band.
Parameter
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit
Setting
27 Frequency jump Jump Freq 00–1 0–1 -
Jump frequency 0.00–Jump frequency
28 Jump Lo 1 10.00 Hz
lower limit1 upper limit 1
Jump frequency lower
Jump frequency
29 Jump Hi 1 15.00 limit 1–Maximum Hz
upper limit1
frequency
Jump frequency 0.00–Jump frequency
30 Jump Lo 2 20.00 Hz
lower limit 2 upper limit 2
ADV
Jump frequency lower
Jump frequency
31 Jump Hi 2 25.00 limit 2–Maximum Hz
upper limit 2
frequency
Jump frequency 0.00–Jump frequency
32 Jump Lo 3 30.00 Hz
lower limit 3 upper limit 3
Jump frequency lower
Jump frequency
33 Jump Hi 3 35.00 limit 3–Maximum Hz
upper limit 3
frequency
136
Learning Basic Features
Select one of the multi-function terminals from codes IN-65–71 and set the parameter value
to 15 (2nd Source).
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
06 Command source Cmd Source 1 Fx/Rx-1 0–5 -
DRV Frequency
07 Freq Ref Src 2 V1 0–11 -
reference source
2nd Command
04 Cmd 2nd Src 0 Keypad 0–5 -
source
BAS
2nd Frequency
05 Freq 2nd Src 0 KeyPad-1 0–11 -
reference source
65– Px terminal Px Define
IN 17 2nd Source 0–55 -
71 configuration (Px: P1–P7)
Code Description
If signals are provided to the multi-function terminal set as the 2nd
command source (2nd Source), the operation can be performed using
BAS-04 Cmd 2nd Src the set values from BAS-04-05 instead of the set values from the
BAS-05 Freq 2nd Src DRV-7 and DRV-01.
The 2nd command source settings cannot be changed while
operating with the 1st command source (Main Source).
137
Learning Basic Features
• When setting the multi-function terminal to the 2nd command source (2nd Source) and
input (On) the signal, operation state is changed because the frequency setting and the
Operation command will be changed to the 2nd command. Before shifting input to the
multi-function terminal, ensure that the 2nd command is correctly set. Note that if the
deceleration time is too short or inertia of the load is too high, an overvoltage fault trip may
occur.
• Depending on the parameter settings, the inverter may stop operating when you switch the
command modes.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Multi-function input mse
85 DI On Delay 10 0–10000
terminal On filter c
Multi-function input mse
86 DI Off Delay 3 0–10000
terminal Off filter c
IN
Multi-function input
87 DI NC/NO Sel 000 0000* - -
terminal selection
Multi-function input
90 DI Status 000 0000* - -
terminal status
* From the last bit to the first, the bits are for multi-purpose input 1–7 (the last bit is for input
1, and the first bit for input 7).
138
Learning Basic Features
Code Description
IN-85 DI On
If the input terminal’s state is not changed during the set time, when the
Delay, IN-86 DI
terminal receives an input, it is recognized as On or Off.
Off Delay
Select terminal contact types for each input terminal. The position of the
indicator light corresponds to the segment that is on as shown in the table
below. With the bottom segment on, it indicates that the terminal is
configured as a A terminal (Normally Open) contact. With the top segment
on, it indicates that the terminal is configured as a B terminal (Normally
IN-87 DI NC/NO
Closed) contact. Terminals are numbered P1–P7, from right to left.
Sel
Type B terminal status (Normally A terminal status (Normally
Closed) Open)
Keypad
139
Learning Basic Features
LCD Parameter
Group Code Name Setting Range Unit
Display Setting
83 Availability of applying DI On 111 1111 000 0000 ~ -
DI On Delay. DelayEn 111 1111
IN
84 Availability of applying DI Off 111 1111 000 0000 ~ -
DI Off Delay. DelayEn 111 1111
Code Description
Every Input Terminal, it is possible to set availability of using On/Off
Delay of Input Terminal.
From right, Availability of using On/Off Delay about Multi-function Input
IN-83 DI On Delay En
Terminal can be set with a sequence such as P1~P7.
IN-84 DI Off Delay En
1: Activate D1 On/Off Delay
0: Inactivate D1 On/Off Delay
140
Learning Advanced Features
141
Learning Advanced Features
142
Learning Advanced Features
Group Code LCD Display LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Frequency Freq Ref
DRV 06 0 Keypad-1 0–11 -
reference source Src
Auxiliary frequency
01 Aux Ref Src 1 V1 0–13 -
reference source
Auxiliary frequency
Aux Calc
BAS 02 reference 0 M+(G*A) 0–7 -
Type
calculation type
Auxiliary frequency Aux Ref
03 100.0 100.0 -200.0–200.0 %
reference gain Gain
65– Px terminal dis Aux
IN Px Define 36 0–55 -
71 configuration Ref
The table above lists the available calculated conditions for the main and auxiliary
frequency references. Refer to the table to see how the calculations apply to an example
where the DRV-06 Frq Src code has been set to ‘0 (Keypad-1)’, and the inverter is
operating at a main reference frequency of 30.00 Hz. Signals at -10 to +10 V are received
at terminal V1, with the reference gain set at 5%. In this example, the resulting frequency
reference is fine-tuned within the range of 27.00–33.00 Hz [Codes IN-01–16 must be set to
the default values, and IN-06 (V1 Polarity), set to ‘1 (Bipolar)’].
143
Learning Advanced Features
Code Description
Set the input type to be used for the auxiliary frequency reference.
Configuration Description
0 None Auxiliary frequency reference is disabled
1 V1 Sets the V1 (voltage) terminal at the control terminal
block as the source of auxiliary frequency reference.
3 V2 Sets the I2 (voltage) terminal at the control terminal block
BAS-01 Aux Ref
as the source of auxiliary frequency reference (SW4
Src
must be set to ‘voltage’).
4 I2 Sets the I2 (current) terminal at the control terminal block
as the source of auxiliary frequency reference (SW4
must be set to ‘current’).
5 Pulse Sets the TI (pulse) terminal at the control terminal block
as the source of auxiliary frequency reference.
Set the auxiliary reference gain with BAS-03 (Aux Ref Gain) to configure
the auxiliary reference and set the percentage to be reflected when
calculating the main reference. Note that items 4–7 below may result in
either plus (+) or minus (-) references (forward or reverse operation) even
when unipolar analog inputs are used.
Configuration Formula for frequency reference
0 M+(G*A) Main reference +(BAS-03x BAS-01xIN-01)
1 M*(G*A) Main reference x(BAS-03x BAS-01)
2 M/(G*A) Main reference /( BAS-03x BAS-01)
BAS-02 3 M+{M*(G*A)} Main reference +{ Main reference x(BAS-03x
Aux Calc Type BAS-01)}
4 M+G*2*(A-50) Main reference + BAS-03x2x(BAS-01–50)xIN-01
144
Learning Advanced Features
145
Learning Advanced Features
Example: an input current of 10.4 mA is applied to I2, with the frequency corresponding to
20 mA of 60 Hz. The table below shows auxiliary frequency as 24 Hz(=60[Hz] X {(10.4[mA]-
4[mA])/(20[mA] - 4[mA])} or 40%(=100[%] X {(10.4[mA] - 4[mA])/(20[mA] - 4[mA])}.
Setting* Calculating final command frequency**
0 M[Hz]+(G[%]*A[Hz]) 30Hz(M)+(50%(G)x24Hz(A))=42Hz
1 M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%]) 30Hz(M)x(50%(G)x40%(A))=6Hz
2 M[Hz]/(G[%]*A[%]) 30Hz(M)/(50%(G)x40%(A))=150Hz
3 M[Hz]+{M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%])} 30Hz(M)+{30[Hz]x(50%(G)x40%(A))}=36Hz
4 M[Hz]+G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])[Hz] 30Hz(M)+50%(G)x2x(40%(A)–
50%)x60Hz=24Hz
5 M[HZ]*{G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%]) 30Hz(M)x{50%(G)x2x(40%(A)–50%)} = -
3Hz( Reverse )
6 M[HZ]/{G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])} 30Hz(M)/{50%(G)x2x(60%–40%)} = -
300Hz( Reverse )
7 M[HZ]+M[HZ]*G[%]*2*(A[%]- 30Hz(M)+30Hz(M)x50%(G)x2x (40%(A)–
50[%]) 50%)=27Hz
* M: main frequency reference (Hz or rpm)/G: auxiliary reference gain (%)/A: auxiliary
frequency reference Hz or rpm) or gain (%).
**If the frequency setting is changed to rpm, it is converted to rpm instead of Hz.
146
Learning Advanced Features
Example: An input current of 10.4 mA is applied to I2, with the frequency corresponding to
20 mA of 60 Hz. The table below shows auxiliary frequency Aas 24 Hz (=60[Hz]x{(10.4[mA]-
4[mA])/(20[mA]-4[mA])} or 40% (=100[%] x {(10.4[mA] - 4[mA]) /(20 [mA] - 4[mA])}.
Setting* Calculating final command frequency**
0 M[Hz]+(G[%]*A[Hz]) 30 Hz(M)+(50%(G)x24 Hz(A))=42 Hz
1 M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%]) 30 Hz(M)x(50%(G)x40%(A))=6 Hz
2 M[Hz]/(G[%]*A[%]) 30 Hz(M)/(50%(G)x40%(A))=150 Hz
3 M[Hz]+{M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%])} 30 Hz(M)+{30[Hz]x(50%(G)x40%(A))}=36 Hz
4 M[Hz]+G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])[Hz] 30 Hz(M)+50%(G)x2x(40%(A)–50%)x60 Hz=24
Hz
5 M[HZ]*{G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])} 30 Hz(M)x{50%(G)x2x(40%(A)–50%)}=-3
Hz( Reverse )
6 M[HZ]/{G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])} 30 Hz(M)/{50%(G)x2x(60%–40%)}=-300
Hz( Reverse )
7 M[HZ]+M[HZ]*G[%]*2*(A[%]- 30 Hz(M)+30 Hz(M)x50%(G)x2x(40%(A)–
50[%]) 50%)=27 Hz
* M: main frequency reference (Hz or rpm)/G: auxiliary reference gain (%)/A: auxiliary
frequency reference (Hz or rpm) or gain (%).
**If the frequency setting is changed to rpm, it is converted to rpm instead of Hz.
Note
When the maximum frequency value is high, output frequency deviation may result due to
analog input variation and deviations in the calculations.
147
Learning Advanced Features
The jog operation is the second highest priority operation, after the dwell operation. If a jog
operation is requested while operating the multi-step, up-down, or 3-wire operation modes,
the jog operation overrides all other operation modes.
Parameter
Group Code LCD Display LCD Display Setting Range Unit
Setting
0.00, Low Freq–
11 Jog frequency JOG Frequency 10.00 Hz
High Freq
Jog operation
DRV 12 JOG Acc Time 20.00 0.00–600.00 sec
acceleration time
Jog operation
13 JOG Dec Time 30.00 0.00–600.00 sec
deceleration time
65– Px terminal Px Define
IN 6 JOG 0-55 -
71 configuration (Px: P1–P7)
Code Description
Select the jog frequency from P1- P7 and then select 6. Jog from
IN-65-71.
IN-65–71 Px Define
148
Learning Advanced Features
Code Description
DRV-12 JOG Acc Time Set the acceleration speed.
DRV-13 JOG Dec Time Set the deceleration speed.
If a signal is entered at the jog terminal while an FX operation command is on, the operation
frequency changes to the jog frequency and the jog operation begins.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter setting Setting Range Unit
JOG 0.00, Low Freq–
11 Jog frequency 10.00 Hz
Frequency High Freq
Jog operation JOG Acc
DRV 12 20.00 0.00–600.00 sec
acceleration time Time
Operation JOG Dec
13 30.00 0.00–600.00 sec
deceleration time Time
149
Learning Advanced Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Up-down
U/D Save
ADV 65 operation 1 Yes 0–1 -
Mode
frequency save
19 Up
65– Px terminal Px Define(Px: 20 Down
IN 0–55 -
71 configuration P1–P7)
U/D
22
Clear
150
Learning Advanced Features
Code Description
Select two terminals for up-down operation and set them to ‘19 (Up)’
and ‘20 (Down)’, respectively. With the operation command input,
acceleration begins when the Up terminal signal is on. Acceleration
stops and constant speed operation begins when the signal is off.
151
Learning Advanced Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
DRV 07 Command source Cmd Source* 1 Fx/Rx - 1 0-11 -
65– Px terminal Px Define(Px:
IN 16 3-Wire 0-55 -
71 configuration P1–P7)
To enable the 3-wire operation, the following circuit sequence is necessary. The minimum
input time (t) for 3-wire operation is 2 ms, and the operation stops when both forward and
reverse operation commands are entered at the same time.
P1 (1):FX
P5 (6):JOG
P7 (16):3-Wire
CM
Freq.
FX
RX
3-Wire
152
Learning Advanced Features
Setting
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
Range
Safe operation
70 Run En Mode 1 DI Dependent 0-1 -
selection
Safe operation
71 Run Dis Stop 0 Free-Run 0–2 -
ADV stop mode
Safe operation
72 deceleration Q-Stop Time 5.0 0.0–600.0 sec
time
65– Px terminal Px Define(Px:
IN 15 RUN Enable 0-55 -
71 configuration P1–P7)
Code Description
IN-65–71 Px From the multi-function terminals, select a terminal to operate in safe
Define operation mode and set it to ‘15 (RUN Enable)’.
Setting Function
ADV-70 Run En 0 Always Enable Enables safe operation mode
Mode 1 DI Dependent Recognizes the operation command from a
multi-function input terminal.
Set the operation of the inverter when the multi-function input terminal in
safe operation mode is off.
When the safety operation mode terminal signal is given, the inverter
decelerates based on the settings at the Q-Stop time. The inverter
decelerates and stops based on the deceleration time (Dec Time)
settings if the run command is off.
ADV-71 Run Dis Setting Function
Stop 1 Free-Run Blocks the inverter output when the multi-
function terminal is off.
2 Q-Stop The deceleration time (Q-Stop Time) used in
safe operation mode. It stops after deceleration
and then the operation can resume only when
the operation command is entered again. The
operation will not begin if only the multi-function
153
Learning Advanced Features
Code Description
terminal is on.
3 Q-Stop The inverter decelerates to the deceleration
Resume time (Q-Stop Time) in safe operation mode. It
stops after deceleration. Then if the multi-
function terminal is on, the operation resumes
as soon as the operation command is entered
again.
ADV-72 Q-Stop Sets the deceleration time when ADV-71 Run Dis Stop is set to ‘1 (Q-
Time Stop)’ or ‘2 (Q-Stop Resume)’.
154
Learning Advanced Features
Note
Dwell operation does not work when:
• Dwell operation time is set to 0 sec or dwell frequency is set to 0 Hz.
155
Learning Advanced Features
• Re-acceleration is attempted from stop or during deceleration, as only the first acceleration
dwell operation command is valid.
• Although deceleration dwell operation is carried out whenever stop commands are
entered and the deceleration dwell frequency is passed through, it does not work
during a deceleration by simple frequency change (which is not a deceleration due to a
stop operation), or during external brake control applications.
156
Learning Advanced Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Control Slip
09 Control Mode 1 - -
Mode Compen
DRV
Motor
14 Motor Capacity 2 5.5 kW 0–20 -
Capacity
Number of Pole
11 4 2–48 -
motor poles Number
Rated slip Rp
12 Rated Slip 40 (5.5 kW based) 0–3000
speed m
Rated motor
BAS 13 Rated Curr 3.6 (5.5 kW based) 1.0–1000.0 A
current
Motor no-load
14 Noload Curr 1.6 (5.5 kW based) 0.5–1000.0 A
current
Motor
16 Efficiency 72 (5.5 kW based) 70–100 %
efficiency
Code Description
Set DRV-09 to ‘2 (Slip Compen)’ to carry out the slip compensation
DRV-09 Control Mode
operation.
DRV-14 Motor Capacity Set the capacity of the motor connected to the inverter.
BAS-11 Pole Number Enter the number of poles from the motor rating plate.
Enter the number of rated rotations from the motor rating plate.
𝑅𝑝𝑚 × 𝑃
𝑓𝑠 = 𝑓𝑟 −
120
BAS-12 Rated Slip 𝑓𝑠 = Rated slip frequency
𝑓𝑟 = Rated frequency
𝑅𝑝𝑚= Number of the rated motor rotations
𝑃= Number of motor poles
BAS-13 Rated Curr Enter the rated current from the motor rating plate.
157
Learning Advanced Features
Code Description
Enter the measured current when the load on the motor axis is
removed and when the motor is operated at the rated frequency. If
BAS-14 Noload Curr
no-load current is difficult to measure, enter a current equivalent to
30-50% of the rated motor current.
BAS-16 Efficiency Enter the efficiency from the motor rating place.
Purpose Function
Controls speed by monitoring the current speed levels of the
Speed Control equipment or machinery being controlled. Control maintains
consistent speed or operates at the target speed.
Controls pressure by monitoring the current pressure levels of
Pressure Control the equipment or machinery being controlled. Control maintains
consistent pressure or operates at the target pressure.
Controls flow by monitoring the current amount of flow in the
Flow Control equipment or machinery being controlled. Control maintains
consistent flow or operates at a target flow.
Controls temperature by monitoring the current temperature
levels of the equipment or machinery to be controlled. Control
Temperature Control
maintains a consistent temperature or operates at a target
temperature.
158
Learning Advanced Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
01 PID Options PID Sel 0 No 0–1 -
PID output
03 PID Output - - -
monitor
PID reference
04 PID Ref Value - - -
monitor
PID feedback PID Fdb
05 - - -
monitor Value
PID Error
06 PID Err Value
Monitor
PID reference PID Ref1
10 0 Keypad 0–11 -
source Source
PID reference Unit Min–Unit
11 PID Ref Set Unit Default Unit
setting Max
PID reference 1
PID
12 auxiliary source 0 None 0–13 -
Ref1AuxSrc
selection
PID
PID reference 1
PID
13 auxiliary mode 0 M+(G*A) 0–13 -
Ref1AuxMod
selection
PID Ref 1 Aux
PID reference
14 G 0.0 -200.0–200.0 Unit
auxiliary gain
PID reference 2
15 auxiliary source PID Ref 2 Src 0 Keypad 0–11 -
selection
PID reference 2 Unit Min–Unit
16 PID Ref 2 Set Unit Default Unit
keypad setting Max
PID reference 2
PID
17 auxiliary source 0 None 0–13 -
Ref2AuxSrc
selection
PID reference 2
PID
18 auxiliary mode 0 M+(G*A) 0–12 -
Ref2AuxMod
selection
159
Learning Advanced Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
PID reference 2 PID Ref2 Aux
19 0.0 -200.0–200.0 Unit
auxiliary gain G
PID feedback
20 PID Fdb Src 0 V1 0–9
source selection
PID feedback
PID Fdb
21 auxiliary source 0 None 0–11
AuxSrc
selection
PID feedback
PID Fdb
22 auxiliary mode 0 M+(G+A) 0–13
AuxMod
selection
PID feedback PID Fdb Aux
23 0.0 -200.0–200.0 Unit
auxiliary gain G
PID feedback PID Fdb
24 0 0–Unit Band Unit
band Band
PID proportional
25 PID P-Gain 1 50.0 0.0–300.00 Unit
gain 1
PID integral time
26 PID I-Time 1 10.0 0.0–200.0 sec
1
PID differential
27 PID D-Time 1 0.00 0–1.00 sec
time 1
PID feed forward
28 PID FF-Gain 0.0 0.0–1000.0 Unit
gain
29 PID output filter PID Out LPF 0.00 0–10.00 sec
PID output upper PID Limit Lo–
30 PID Limit Hi 100.00 Unit
limit 100.00
PID output lower -100.00–PID
31 PID Limit Lo 0.00 Unit
limit Limit Hi
PID proportional
32 PID P-Gain 2 5.0 0.0–300.00 Unit
gain 2
PID integral time
33 PID I-Time 2 10.0 0.0–200.0 sec
2
PID differential
34 PID D-Time 2 0.00 0–1.00 sec
time 2
PID output mode PID Out
35 4 PID or Main 0–4
setting Mode
36 PID output PID Out Inv 0 No 0–1
160
Learning Advanced Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
reverse
PID Out
37 PID output scale 100.0 0.1–1000.0 Unit
Scale
PID multi-step
PID Step Ref Unit Min–Unit
40 reference setting Unit Default Unit
1 Max
1
PID multi-step
PID Step Ref Unit Min–Unit
41 reference setting Unit Default Unit
2 Max
2
PID multi-step
PID Step Ref Unit Min–Unit
42 reference setting Unit Default Unit
3 Max
3
PID multi-step
PID Step Ref Unit Min–Unit
43 reference setting Unit Default Unit
4 Max
4
PID multi-step
PID Step Ref Unit Min–Unit
44 reference setting Unit Default Unit
5 Max
5
PID multi-step
PID Step Ref Unit Min–Unit
45 reference setting Unit Default Unit
6 Max
6
PID multi-step
PID Step Ref Unit Min–Unit
46 reference setting Unit Default Unit
7 Max
7
PID controller
50 PID Unit Sel 0 % 0–40 -
unit selection
PID control PID Unit
51 2 X1 0–4 -
setting scale Scale
Differ
PID control 0% depending on
52 PID Unit 0% 0.00
setting figure PID-50
setting
Differ
PID control
PID Unit depending on
53 100% setting 100.00
100% PID-50
figure
setting
65– Px circuit Px Define(Px:
IN 1 none 0–55 -
71 function setting P1–P7)
161
Learning Advanced Features
Note
• Normal PID output (PID OUT) is bipolar and is limited by PID-46 (PID Limit Hi) and PID-
47 (PID Limit Lo) settings. DRV-20 (MaxFreq) value equals a 100% of PID OUT.
• The following are the variables used in PID operation, and how they are calculated:
- Unit MAX = PID Unit 100% (PID-68)
- Unit Min = (2xPID Unit 0% (PID-67)–PID Unit 100%)
- Unit Default = (PID Unit 100%-PID Unit 0%)/2
- Unit Band = Unit 100%-Unit 0%
• PID control may be utilized for the following operations:
Soft fill, auxiliary PID reference compensation, MMC, flow compensation, pipe breakage
detection
• During a PID operation, the PID output becomes the frequency reference. The inverter
accelerates or decelerates to the frequency reference based on the Acc/Dec times.
Code Description
PID-01 PID Sel Sets the code to ‘1 (Yes)’ to select functions for the process PID.
Displays the existing output value of the PID controller. The unit, gain,
PID-03 PID Output
and scale that were set in the PID group are applied on the display.
Displays the existing reference value set for the PID controller. The unit,
PID-04 PID Ref
gain, and scale that were set in the PID group are applied on the
Value
display.
PID-05 PID Fdb Displays the latest feedback value of the PID controller. The unit, gain,
Value and scale that were set in the PID group are applied on the display.
Displays the differences between the existing reference and the
PID-06 PID Err
feedback (error value). The unit, gain, and scale that were set in the PID
Value
group are applied on the display.
Selects the reference input for the PID control. If the V1 terminal is set
to a PID feedback source (PID F/B Source), the V1 terminal cannot be
set to the PID reference source (PID Ref Source). To set V1 as a
reference source, change the feedback source.
Setting Function
PID-10 PID Ref 1 0 Keypad Keypad
Src 1 V1 -10-10 V input voltage terminal
3 V2 I2 analog input terminal
4 I2 When the analog voltage/current input terminal
selection switch (SW4) at the terminal block is set
to I (current), input 0-20 mA current. If it is set to V
(voltage), input 0–10 V.
162
Learning Advanced Features
Code Description
5 Int. 485 RS-485 input terminal
7 FieldBus Communication command via a communication
option card
8 Pulse TI Pulse input terminal (0-32 kHz Pulse input)
9 E-PID External PID output
Output
10 V3 V3 analoge input terminal of Extension IO option
When the analog voltage/current input terminal
selection switch (SW2) at the terminal block is set
11 I3
to I3(current), input 0-20 mA current. If it is set to
V3 (voltage), input 0–10 V.
A reference value can be entered if the PID reference type (PID-10) is
PID-11 PID Ref Set
set to ‘0 (Keypad)’.
Selects the external input source to be used as the reference for a PID
control. If an external input source is selected, the reference is
determined using the input value at the source (set at PID-10) and the
value set at PID-13 PID Ref1AuxMod.
Setting Function
0 None Not used
1 V1 -10-10 V input voltage terminal
3 V2 I2 analog input terminal
4 I2 [If the analog voltage/current input terminal
selection switch (SW4) at the terminal block is set
to I (current), input 0-20 mA current. If it is set to V
(voltage), input 0–10 V]
PID-12 PID
6 Pulse TI Pulse input terminal (0-32 kHz Pulse input)
Ref1AuxSrc
7 Int. 485 RS-485 input terminal
8 FieldBus Communication command via a communication
option card
10 EPID1 External PID 1 Output
Output
11 EPID1 External PID 1 feedback value
Fdb Val
12 V3 V3 analog input terminal of Extension IO option
When the analog voltage/current input terminal
13 I3 selection switch (SW2) at the terminal block is set
to I3 (current), input 0-20 mA current. If it is set to
V3 (voltage), input 0–10 V.
PID-13 (PID Ref1) provides formulas to calculate the reference 1 value.
If PID-12 (PID RefAuxSrc) is set to any other value than ‘None,’ the final
PID-13 PID Ref1 reference 1 value is calculated using the input value at the source (set
AuxMod at PID-10) and the input value set at PID-12).
Setting
163
Learning Advanced Features
Code Description
0 M+(G*A)
1 M*(G*A)
2 M/(G*A)
3 M+(M*(G*A))
4 M+G*2*(A-50)
5 M*(G*2*(A-50))
6 M/(G*2*(A-50))
7 M+M*G*2*(A-50)
8 (M-A)^2
9 M^2+A^2
10 MAX(M,A)
11 MIN(M,A)
12 (M+A)/2
13 Square Root(M+A)
M= Value by the source set at PID-10
G= Gain value set at PID-14
A= Value input by the source set at PID-12
PID-14 PID Ref1
Gain value for the formulas provided by PID-13.
Aux G
Selects feedback input for PID control. If the V1 terminal is set as the
PID feedback source (PID F/B Source), the V1 terminal cannot be set
as the PID reference source (PID Ref Source). To set V1 as a feedback
source, change the reference source.
Setting Function
0 V1 -10-10 V input voltage terminal
2 V2 I2 analog input terminal
3 I2 [If the analog voltage/current input terminal
selection switch (SW4) at the terminal block is set
PID-20 PID Fdb Src to I (current), input 0-20 mA current. If it is set to V
(voltage), input 0–10 V]
4 Int. 485 RS-485 input terminal
5 FieldBus Communication command via a communication
option card
7 Pulse TI Pulse input terminal (0-32 kHz Pulse input)
8 EPID1 External PID 1 output
Output
9 EPID1 External PID 1 feedback
Fdb Val
Selects the external input source to be used as the reference for a PID
PID-21 PID Fdb control. When the external input source is selected, the reference is
AuxSrc determined using the input value at the source (set at PID-10) and the
value set at PID-13 PID Ref1AuxMod.
164
Learning Advanced Features
Code Description
Setting Function
0 None Not used
1 V1 -10-10 V input voltage terminal
3 V2 I2 analog input terminal
4 I2 [When the analog voltage/current input terminal
selection switch (SW4) at the terminal block is set
to I (current), input 0-20 mA current. If it is set to V
(voltage), input 0–10 V]
6 Pulse TI Pulse input terminal (0-32 kHz Pulse input)
7 Int. 485 RS-485 input terminal
8 FieldBus Communication command via a communication
option card
10 EPID1 External PID 1 output
Output
11 EPID1 External PID 1 feedback
Fdb Val
The PID-30 (PID FDB AuxMod) provides formulas to calculate the final
feedback value. If PID-31 (PID RefAuxSrc) is set to any other value
than ‘None,’ the final feedback is calculated using the input values at the
sources (set at PID-31 and PID-32).
Setting
0 M+(G*A)
1 M*(G*A)
2 M/(G*A)
3 M+(M*(G*A))
4 M+G*2*(A-50)
PID-22 PID FDB 5 M*(G*2*(A-50))
AuxMod 6 M/(G*2*(A-50))
7 M+M*G*2*(A-50)
8 (M-A)^2
9 M^2+A^2
10 MAX(M,A)
11 MIN(M,A)
12 (M+A)/2
13 Square Root(M+A)
M= Value by the source set at PID-30
G= Gain value set at PID-33
A= Value by the source set at PID-31
PID-23 PID Fdb
Gain value used a formula set at PID-22.
Aux G
PID-24 Sets the maximum and minimum value by adding or subtracting the
PID Fdb Band PID Fdb Band value (set at PID-24) from the reference value. When the
165
Learning Advanced Features
Code Description
feedback value is between the maximum and minimum value, this code
maintains the PID output.
PID-25
PID P-Gain1 Set the output ratio for differences (errors) between the reference and
PID-32 feedback. If the P Gain is set to 50%, then 50% of the error is output.
PID P-Gain2
Sets the time to output accumulated errors. When the error is 100%,
the time taken for 100% output is set. When the integral time (PID I-
Time) is set to 1 second, 100% output occurs after 1 second of the error
remaining at 100%. Differences in a normal state can be reduced by
PID-26 PID I Time. When the multi-function terminal block is set to ‘24 (I-Term
PID I- Time 1 Clear)’ and is turned on, all of the accumulated errors are deleted.
PID-33
PID I- Time 2 PID output (final frequency reference) is affected by the gains set at
PID-26, PID-33, and the Acc/Dec times to achieve the PID output
change based on the DRV-03 and DRV-04 settings. Therefore,
consider the relationship between these values when configuring the
gains and the Acc/Dec times.
PID-27
Sets the output volume for the rate of change in errors. If the differential
PID D-Time 1
time (PID D-Time) is set to 1 ms and the rate of change in errors per
PID-34
sec is 100%, output occurs at 1% per 10 ms.
PID D-Time 2
PID-28 PID FF- Sets the ratio that adds the target to the PID output. Adjusting this value
Gain leads to a faster response.
Used when the PID controller output changes too quickly or the entire
system is unstable, due to severe oscillation. In general, a lower value
PID-29
(default value=0) is used to speed up response time, but in some cases
PID Out LPF
a higher value increases stability. The higher the value, the more stable
the PID controller output is, but the slower the response time.
PID-30 PID Limit Hi,
Limit the output of the controller.
PID-31 PID Limit Lo
Selects one of the PID output modes to modify the PID output.
Modifications can be made by adding input values and the main
operation frequency of the PID output to the final PID output value.
The following table lists the 5 modes that are available.
PID-35
PID Out Mode Setting
0 PID Output
1 PID+Main Freq
2 PID+EPID1 Out
3 PID+EPID1+Main
166
Learning Advanced Features
Code Description
4 PID or Main
PID-36 When PID-36 (PID Out Inv) is set to ‘Yes,’ the difference (error) between
PID Out Inv the reference and the feedback is set as the feedback–reference value.
PID-37 PID Out
Adjusts the volume of the controller output.
Scale
PID-40–46 Step Ref
Sets the PID reference by multi-function input settings at IN 65–71.
1–7
Sets the unit for the control variable.
0: CUST is a custom unit defined by the user.
Setting
0 CUST 21 m 3/m(m 3/min)
1 % 22 m 3/h(m 3/h)
2 PSI 23 l/s
3 ˚F 24 l/m
4 ˚C 25 l/h
5 inWC 26 kg/s
6 inM 27 kg/m
7 Bar 28 kg/h
D-50
8 mBar 29 gl/s
PID Unit Sel
9 Pa 30 gl/m
10 kPa 31 gl/h
11 Hz 32 ft/s
12 Rpm 33 f3/s(ft3/min)
13 V 34 f3/h (ft3/h)
14 I 35 lb/s
15 kW 36 lb/m
16 HP 37 lb/m
17 mpm 38 lb/h
18 ft 39 ppm
19 m/s 40 pps
20 m3/s(m 3/S)
PID-51
Adjusts the scale to fit the unit selected at PID-50 PID Unit Sel.
PID Unit Scale
PID-52
PID Unit 0 % Sets the Unit 0% and Unit 100% values as the minimum and maximum
PID-53 values set at PID-50.
PID Unit 100%
167
Learning Advanced Features
168
Learning Advanced Features
169
Learning Advanced Features
170
Learning Advanced Features
171
Learning Advanced Features
172
Learning Advanced Features
Parameter
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit
Setting
20 Soft Fill options Soft Fill Sel 0 No 0–1 -
Pr- PID operation Low Freq–
21 Pre-PID Freq 30.00 Hz
frequency High Freq
Pre-PID
22 Pre-PID duration 60.0 600.0 sec
Delay
Soft fill escape Unit Min–Unit
23 Soft Fill Set 20.00 %
AP1 value Max
Soft fill reference
24 Fill Step Set 2.00 0–Unit Band %
increment
Soft fill reference Fill Step
25 20 0–9999 sec
increment cycle Time
Soft fill feedback
26 Fill Fdb Diff 0.00 0–Unit Band %
difference
Code Description
AP1-20
Enables or disables the soft fill PID.
Soft Fill Sel
Sets the frequency range for a general acceleration without PID control. If
AP1-21 (Pre-PID Freq) is set to 30 Hz, general operation is performed until
AP1-21
the PID feedback reaches the value set at AP1-23 (Soft Fill Set). However,
Pre-PID Freq
if the PID reference or feedback exceeds the value set at AP1-23 during
the pre-PID operation, a normal PID operation starts immediately.
AP1-22 Pre-PID In general, a PID operation starts when the feedback volume (controlled
Delay variables) of PID controller exceeds the value set at AP1-23. However, if
173
Learning Advanced Features
Code Description
AP1-23 AP1-22 (Pre-PID Delay) is set, the feedback after the set time becomes
Soft Fill Set the default value for the soft fill PID reference, and the inverter starts the
soft fill operation.
When the feedback or the Soft Fill PID Reference exceeds the Soft Fill Set
value, the soft fill operation ends and a normal process PID operation
begins.
AP1-24
The Soft Fill PID Reference increases each time the set time [at AP1-25
Fill Step Set
(Fill Step Time)] is elapsed, by the amount set at AP1-24 (Fill Step Set).
AP1-25
However, note that if the difference between the Soft Fill PID Reference
Fill Step Time
value and the feedback value is greater than the value set at AP1-26 (Fill
AP1-26
Fdb Diff value), the Soft Fill PID Reference value does not increase.
Fill Fdb Diff
When a PID process is performed after the soft fill PID operation, the PID Reference value
becomes the PID-11 PID Ref1 Set value.
174
Learning Advanced Features
Note
PID Wakeup level may be calculated using the following formula:
PID Wakeup Level = PID-04 (PID Ref Value)–AP1-10 (PID WakeUp1Dev) or, PID-04 (PID Ref
Value) - AP1-14 PID (WakeUp2Dev).
Two sets of configurations are available in PID sleep mode for sleep mode frequency, sleep
mode delay time, wakeup variation, and wakeup delay time. One of the two configurations
may be selected depending on the multi-function input terminal configuration and input
conditions.
Group Code Name LCD Displays Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Sleep boost
05 Sleep Bst Set 0.00 0–Unit Max Unit
settings
0.00, Low
Sleep Bst
06 Sleep boost speed 60.00 Freq–High Hz
Freq
Freq
0.00, Low
PID sleep mode 1 PID
08 0.00 Freq–High Hz
frequency Sleep1Freq
Freq
AP1
PID wakeup 1 PID
09 20.0 0–6000.0 sec
delay time WakeUp1 DT
175
Learning Advanced Features
Group Code Name LCD Displays Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
PID wakeup 2 PID
13 20.0 0–6000.0 sec
delay time WakeUp2 DT
PID wakeup 2 PID
14 20.00 0–Unit Band Unit
value WakeUp2Dev
Code Description
Sets the sleep boost volume. Feedback must reach the boost
AP1-05 Sleep Bst Set level (PID Reference+Sleep Bst Set) for the inverter to enter the
Sleep Mode.
AP1-06 Sleep Bst Freq Sets the inverter operation frequency to reach sleep boost level.
If the operating frequency stays below the frequencies set at
AP1-07 PID Sleep1 DT
AP1-08 and AP1-12 for the set times at AP1-07 and AP1-11, the
AP1-11 PID Sleep2 DT
inverter accelerates to the PID sleep boost frequency (PID Sleep
AP1-08 PID Sleep1Freq
Bst Freq). Then, when the feedback reaches the value set at the
AP1-12 PID Sleep2Freq
boost level, the inverter enters standby mode.
AP1-09 PID WakeUp1 DT Sets the reference for PID operation in PID sleep mode. PID
AP1-13 PID WakeUp2 DT operation resumes when PID feedback variation (from the PID
AP1-10 PID WakeUp1Dev reference) exceeds the values set at AP1-10 and AP1-14, and
AP1-14 PID WakeUp2Dev maintains the condition for times set at AP1-09 or AP1-13.
When the PID Sleep Wake 2 terminal is set and input, PID
IN-65–71
operation sleep mode is operated based on the parameter
P1–7 Define
settings at AP1-11–14.
176
Learning Advanced Features
177
Learning Advanced Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
00 Jump Code Jump Code 40 1–99
EPID 1 Mode EPID1
01 0 None 0–3
Selection Mode
EPID1output EPID1 -100.00–
02 0.00 Unit
monitor value Output 100.00%
EPID1 reference EPID1 Ref
03 - - -
monitor value Val
EPID1 feedback EPID1 Fdb
04 - - -
EPI monitor value Val
EPID1error EPID1 Err
05 - - -
monitor value Val
EPID1 command EPID1 Ref
06 0 Keypad 0–10 -
source selection Src
EPID1 keypad EPID1 Ref Unit Min–Unit
07 Unit Min %
command value Set Max
EPID1 feedback EPID1 Fdb
08 0 V1 0–9 -
source selection Src
178
Learning Advanced Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
EPID1 proportional EPID1 P-
09 50.0 0.0–300.0% Unit
gain Gain
EPID1 integral EPID1 I-
10 10.0 0.0–200.0 Sec
time Time
EPID1 EPID1 D-
11 0.00 0–0.00 Sec
differentiation time Time
EPID1 feed- EPID1 FF-
12 0.0 0.0–1000.0 Unit
forward gain Gain
EPID1 Out
13 EPID1 output filter 0 0–10.00 Sec
LPF
EPID1 output EPID1 Limit EPID1 Limit Lo–
14 100.00 -
upper limit Hi 100.00
EPID1 Limit -100.00–EPID1
15 EPID1 lower limit 0.00 -
Lo Limit Hi
EPID1 output EPID1 Out
16 0 No 0–1 -
inverse Inv
EPID1 Unit Refer to EPID
17 EPID1 unit 1: % -
Sel unit details table
0: X100
1: X10
EPID1 Unit
18 EEPID1 unit scale 2: X1 2: X1 -
Scl
3: X0.1
4: X0.01
X100: -32000–
Unit 100%
X10: -3200.0–
Unit 100%
EPID1 unit 0% EPID1 Differs depending X1: -320.00–
19 -
value Unit0% on the unit setting Unit 100%
X0.1: -32.000–
Unit 100%
X0.01: -3.2000–
Unit 100%
X100: Unit 0%–
32000
EPID1 X10: Unit
EPID1 unit 100% Differs depending
20 Unit100% 0%–3200.0 -
value on the unit setting
X1: Unit
0%–320.00
X0.1: Unit
179
Learning Advanced Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
0%–32.000
X0.01: Unit 0%–
3.2000
180
Learning Advanced Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
inverse Inv 1 Yes
EPID2 Unit Refer to EPID
47 EPID2 unit 0: CUST -
Sel unit details table
0: X100
1: X10
EPID2 Unit
48 EPID2 unit scale 2: X1 2: X1 -
Scl
3: X0.1
4: X0.01
X100: -32000–
Unit 100%
X10: -3200.0–
Unit 100%
EPID2 unit 0% EPID2 Differs depending X1: -320.00–
49 -
value Unit0% on the unit setting Unit 100%
X0.1: -32.000–
Unit -100%
X0.01: -3.2000–
Unit 100%
X100: Unit 0%–
32000
X10: Unit 0%–
3200.0
EPID2 unit 100%
EPID2 Differs depending X1: Unit 0%–
50 value -
Unit100% on the unit setting 320.00
X0.1: Unit 0%–
32.000
X0.01: Unit 0%–
3.2000
Note
• The EPID1–2 output (EPID OUT) is bipolar, and is limited by the EPI-14 (EPID 1 Limit Hi)
and EPI-15 (EPID 1 Limit Lo) settings.
• The following are the variables used in PID operation, and how they are calculated:
- Unit MAX = EPID1 (EPID2) Unit 100% (PID-68 )
- Unit Min = (2xEPID1 (EPID2) Unit0%-EPID1 (EPID2) Unit 100%)
- Unit Default = (EPID1 (EPID2) Unit 100%-EPID1 (EPID2) Unit 0%)/2
181
Learning Advanced Features
Code Description
Sets the EPID1 modes.
Setting Function
0 None EPID1 is not used.
EPI-01 EPID1 Mode
1 Always On EPID1 operates at all times.
2 During Run Operates only when the inverter is running.
3 DI Operates when terminal input (EPID1 Run)
Dependent is on.
Displays the existing output value for the EPID controller. The unit,
EPI-02 PID Output gain, and scale that were set in the EPID group are applied on the
display.
Displays the existing reference value set for the EPID controller.
EPI-03 EPID Ref Value The unit, gain, and scale that were set in the EPID group are
applied on the display.
Displays the existing feedback value set for the EPID controller.
EPI-04 EPID1 Fdb
The unit, gain, and scale that were set in the EPID group are
Value
applied on the display.
Displays the difference between the existing reference and the
EPI-05 EPID1 Err
feedback (error value). The unit, gain, and scale that were set in the
Value
PID group are applied on the display.
Selects the reference input for the EPID control. If the V1 terminal is
set to an EPID1 feedback source (EPID1 F/B Source), V1 cannot
be set as the EPID1 reference source (EPID1 Ref Source). To set
V1 as a reference source, change the feedback source.
Setting Function
0 Keypad Keypad
1 V1 -10-10 V input voltage terminal
EPI1-06 EPID1 Ref Src 3 V2 I2 analog input terminal [When analog
4 I2 voltage/current input terminal selection switch
(SW2) at the terminal block is set to I
(current), input 0-20 mA current. If it is set to V
(voltage), input 0–10 V]
5 Int. 485 RS-485 input terminal
7 FieldBus Communication command via a
communication option card
8 Pulse TI Pulse input terminal (0-32 kHz Pulse input)
Set the EPI control reference type (EPI-06) to ‘0 (Keypad)’ to enter
EPI-07 EPID1 Ref Set
the reference value.
182
Learning Advanced Features
Code Description
Sets the output ratio for differences (errors) between the reference
EPI-09 EPID1 P-Gain and feedback. If the P-Gain x 2 is set to 50%, then 50% of the error
is output. The setting range for P-Gain is 0.0-1,000%.
Selects the feedback input for the EPID control. When the V1
terminal is set to an EPID feedback source (PID F/B Source), V1
cannot be set as the PID reference source (PID Ref Source). To set
V1 as a reference source, change the feedback source.
Setting Function
0 Keypad Keypad
EPI-08 EDPID1 Fdb 1 V1 -10-10 V input voltage terminal
Src 3 V2 I2 analog input terminal [When analog
4 I2 voltage/current input terminal selection switch
(SW4) at the terminal block is set to I
(current), input 0-20 mA current. If it is set to V
(voltage), input 0–10 V voltage]
5 Int. 485 RS-485 input terminal
7 FieldBus Communication command via a
communication option card
Sets the time to output accumulated errors. When the error is
100%, the time taken for 100% output is set. When the integral time
(EPID I-Time) is set to 1 second, 100% output occurs after 1
second of the error remaining at 100%. Differences in a normal
EPI-10 EPID1 I- Time
state can be reduced by EPID I Time.
All the accumulated errors can be deleted by setting the multi-
function terminal block to ‘42 (EPID1 ITerm Clr)’ or ‘48 (EPID2
ITerm Clr)’.
Sets the output volume for the rate of change in errors. If the
EPI-11
differential time (EPID1 D-Time) is set to 1 ms and the rate of
EPI1 D-Time
change in errors per sec is 100%, output occurs at 1% per 10 ms.
Sets the ratio that adds the target to the EPID output. Adjusting this
EPI-12 EPID1 FF-Gain
value leads to a faster response.
Used when the output of the EPID controller changes too fast or
the entire system is unstable, due to severe oscillation. In general,
a lower value (default value=0) is used to speed up response time,
EPI-13EPID1 Out LPF
but in some cases a higher value increases stability. The higher the
value, the more stable the EPID controller output is, but the slower
the response time.
EPI-14 EPID1 Limit Hi,
Limits the output of the controller.
EPI-15 EPID1 Limit Lo
183
Learning Advanced Features
Code Description
If EPID Out Inv is set to ‘Yes,’ the difference (error) value between
EPI-16
the reference and the feedback is set as the feedback–reference
EPID1 Out Inv
value.
Sets the unit for the control variable.
0: CUST is a custom unit defined by the user.
Setting
0 CUST 21 m 3/m(m 3/min)
1 % 22 m 3/h(m 3/h)
2 PSI 23 l/s
3 ˚F 24 l/m
4 ˚C 25 l/h
5 inWC 26 kg/s
6 inM 27 kg/m
7 Bar 28 kg/h
EPI-17 EPID1 Unit Sel 8 mBar 29 gl/s
9 Pa 30 gl/m
10 kPa 31 gl/h
11 Hz 32 ft/s
12 Rpm 33 f3/s(ft3/min)
13 V 34 f3/h (ft3/h)
14 I 35 lb/s
15 kW 36 lb/m
16 HP 37 lb/m
17 mpm 38 lb/h
18 ft 39 ppm
19 m/s 40 pps
20 m3/s(m 3/S)
EPI-18 EPID1 Unit Scl Adjusts the scale to fit the unit selected at EPI-17 EPI1 Unit Sel.
EPI-19 EPID1 Unit 0 %
Sets the EPID1 Unit 0% value and the EPID1 Unit 100% value as
EPI-20 EPID1 Unit
the minimum and maximum values set at EPI1-17.
100%
184
Learning Advanced Features
185
Learning Advanced Features
186
Learning Advanced Features
When the time difference between the inverter run command and the damper open signal
exceeds the delay time set at AP2-45 (Damper DT), damper error (Damper Err) occurs. If
the damper open relay output and damper control input are set at the same time, and if the
damper open signal is not received until the time set at AP2-45 (Damper DT) is elapsed
(when the inverter is not operating), damper error (Damper Err) occurs.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Damper check
AP2 45 Damper DT - 0.1–600.0 sec
time
P1–7 Px
P1–P7 45
IN 65-71 terminal - -
Define (Damper open)
configuration
Multi-function 33
OUT 31-35 Relay 1–5 - -
relay 1–5 (Damper Control)
187
Learning Advanced Features
Note
Damper operation is one of the essential system features that are available in both HAND and
AUTO modes.
188
Learning Advanced Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Lubrication Lub Op
AP2 46 0.1–600.0 (sec)
operation time Time
Multi-function 33 (Damper
OUT 31-35 Relay 1–5 - -
relay 1–5 Control)
Code Description
Outputs the lubrication signal for a set time when the inverter run
AP2-46 Lub Op
command is turned on. The inverter starts operating when the set time
Time
has elapsed.
OUT-31–35 Sets one of the output relays (OUT-31–35) to ‘30 (Lubrication)’ to enable
Relay 1–5 the Lubrication function.
Note
• The lubrication function can be used to delay inverter operations, depending on the
working environment, since the inverter waits for the time set at AP2-46 (Lub Op Time)
each time a run command is received.
• Lubrication operation is one of the essential system features that are available in both
HAND and AUTO modes.
189
Learning Advanced Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Flow Comp 0 No
30 Flow Comp Sel - -
function options 1 Yes
AP1
Max Comp Max Comp
31 - 0–Unit Band -
amount Value
Code Description
AP1-30 Flow
Sets the Flow Compensation function options.
Comp Sel
AP1-31 Max Sets the maximum compensation volume. This function is based on a PID
Comp Value operation. The volume is given the same unit used for the PID reference.
Longer pipes cause the actual pressure to decrease, which in turn increases the difference
between the pressure reference and the actual pressure. When the pipe lengths are equal
in two different systems, more pressure loss is caused in the system with greater flow. This
explains the pressure difference between (A) and (B) in the figure (when the flows are
different). To compensate for the pressure loss above, the value of AP1-31 is set to the
maximum volume of compensation when the inverter has the maximum frequency, and
adds to the PID reference after calculating compensation volume based on the output
frequency.
190
Learning Advanced Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
1st
MOTOR M1 AVG
87 Inverter capacity 0.1–500.0 kW
average POWER PWR
2nd MOTOR M2 AVG
88 Inverter capacity 0.1–500.0 kW
average POWER PWR
89 Cost per kWh Cost per kWh 0 0.0–1000.0 kW
90 Saved kWh Saved kWh 0 -999.9–999.9 kWh
91 Saved MWh Saved MWh 0 -32000–32000 MWh
191
Learning Advanced Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
(1000 Ton) 2
Reset Energy 0 No
97 payback Reset Energy 0 -
parameter 1 Yes
192
Learning Advanced Features
and-stop operation of a pump. This prevents loss in pump performance and premature
pump failures.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
0 None
193
Learning Advanced Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Number of
PC Num of
28 Fx/Rx steps for 5 0–10 -
Steps
pump clean
Pump clean
Repeat
29 cycle - - -
Num Mon
monitoring
Pump clean Repeat
30 5 0–10 -
repeat number Num Set
When a pump clean start command is given, the inverter waits until the delay time set at
AP2-19 elapses, accelerates by the acceleration time set at AP2-22, and operates at the
frequency set at AP2-25. The pump runs for the time set at AP2-24, decelerates by the time
set at AP2-23, and then stops. This operation repeats in the forward and reverse directions
(one after another) for the number of times set at AP2-28 (PC Num of Step). Each time the
steps (Fx/Rx) switch, the inverter waits at a stop state for the time set at AP2-21 before
going on with the next step. One step in the forward direction and another step in the
reverse direction makes one cycle. The number of pump clean cycles is set at AP2-30. In
the figure above, AP2-28 is set to ‘1’, and AP2-30 is set to ‘1’.
194
Learning Advanced Features
Code Description
Sets the pump mode.
Setting Function
0 None Pump Clean function is not used.
1 DI Set one of the terminal inputs to ‘46 (Pump
defendant Clean Sel)’ and performs the pump clean
operation by turning on the terminal.
AP2-15 PumpClean
2 Power Performs a pump clean operation when a
Mode
pump consumes more power than it is
supposed to consume in a normal
operation.
3 Current Performs a pump clean operation when a
pump consumes more current than it is
supposed to consume in a normal
operation.
Sets the pump clean start mode.
Setting Function
0 None Pump clean is performed only by the
function set at AP2-20.
AP2-16 PumpClean Sel 1 Start Pump clean is performed each time the
inverter starts operating.
2 Stop Pump clean is performed each time the
inverter stops operating.
3 Start & Pump clean is performed each time the
Stop inverter starts or stops operating.
If AP2-15 is set to ‘Power’ or ‘Current,’ multiply the load
characteristic curve set at AP2-2–AP2-10 by the value set at
AP2-17 (100[%]+AP2-17[%]), and reset the load
characteristic curve for the pump clean operation (refer to the
AP2-17 PC Curve Rate load tune features for AP2-2–AP2-10 setting values).
AP2-18 PC Curve Band Apply (rated inverter current x AP2-18 setting value) and
AP2-19 PC Curve DT (rated motor x AP2-18 setting value) to the pump clean load
curve calculated by AP2-17 to calculate the final pump clean
load curve.
The inverter performs pump clean operation when the
inverter continues operating for the time set at AP2-19.
When AP2-15 is set to ‘Power’ or ‘Current’, a pump clean is
performed if the inverter operation power or current stays
AP2-20 Clean Start DT
above the pump clean load characteristic curve (defined by
AP2-17 and AP2-18) for the time set at AP2-19.
Sets the time for the inverter to maintain 0 speed (stop)
AP2-21 Clean Step DT
before the inverter switches from forward to reverse operation
195
Learning Advanced Features
Code Description
during a pump clean.
AP2-22 PumpClean AccT
AP2-23 PumpClean Sets the Acc/Dec times for pump clean operations.
DecT
AP2-24 Fwd Steady Time
Sets the time to maintain forward and reverse operations.
AP2-26 Rev Steady Time
AP2-25 Fwd SteadyFreq
Sets the forward and reverse operation frequencies.
AP2-27 Rev SteadyFreq
Determines the number of steps
(acceleration/deceleration/stop) in one cycle. Each operation,
AP2-28 PC Num of Steps either in the forward or reverse direction, constitutes one step.
If set to ‘2,’ one forward step and one reverse step constitute
one cycle.
Determines the inverter operation after pump clean operation.
Setting Function
0 Stop This stops the inverter after pump cleaning.
AP2-31 PC End Mode 1 Start The inverter operates based on the inverter’s
command status after the pump cleaning. (If
a terminal command is received, the inverter
performs the operation it was performing
before the pump clean operation.)
AP2-29 Repeat Num
Displays the number of the current pump cleaning cycle.
Mon
Sets the number of cycles for one pump clean operation set
AP2-30 Repeat Num Set
at AP2-21–AP2-28.
Frequent pump clean operations may indicate a serious
system problem. To warn the users of potential system
AP2-32 PC Limit Time
problems, an error (CleanRPTErr) occurs if the number of
AP2-33 PC Limit Num
pump clean operation exceeds the number set at AP2-33
within the time period set at AP2-32.
Note
• When the run prevent feature is active and an operation in the prevented direction is
required to perform a pump clean operation, the inverter operates at the 0 speed for the
time set at AP2-24 and AP2-26 (Steady Time).
• To stop the pump clean operation, press the OFF key on the keypad or turn it off at the
terminal input.
196
Learning Advanced Features
• If the pump clean operation is configured for terminal input and it is turned on, and if ADV-
10 (PowerOn Resume) is set to ‘Yes’, a pump clean operation is performed when the
inverter is turned on.
• When performing a pump clean operation via terminal input,
- if the terminal input is turned off instantly after it is turned on (the operation is
triggered), 1 pump clean cycle is operated.
- if ADV-10 (PowerOn Resume) is set to ‘Yes’, and the terminal input is turned off
instantly after it is turned on (the operation is triggered), and if the inverter is turned
off during a pump clean then is turned back on again, the pump clean operation is
not resumed (because the input terminal is not on when the inverter is turned on).
- if the terminal input is kept on after it is initially turned on, 1 pump clean cycle is
operated.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Frequency limit 0 No
24 Freq Limit 0: No -
options 1 Yes
Code Description
Sets the pump Start & End Ramp options.
AP2-40 Start&End
Setting Function
Ramp
0 No The Start & End Ramp operation is not used.
197
Learning Advanced Features
Code Description
1 Yes Use the Start & End Ramp operation.
Refers to the time it takes to reach the minimum pump operation
AP2-41 Start frequency for a Start & End Ramp operation (Freq Limit Lo) set at ADV-
Ramp Acc 25 when the inverter starts (it is different from DRV-03 acceleration
gradient).
Refers to the time it takes to reach the 0 step (stop) from the minimum
AP2-42 End
pump operation frequency for a Start & End Ramp operation (Freq Limit
Ramp Dec
Lo) set at ADV-25 (it is different from DRV-03 deceleration gradient).
In the figure above, AP2-41 defines the acceleration time to the minimum operation
frequency ADV-25 (Freq Limt Lo). AP2-42 defines the deceleration time from the minimum
operation frequency to a stopped state. Time A (normal acceleration time set at DRV-03)
and Time B (normal deceleration time set at DRV-04) in the figure will change according to
the Acc/Dec gradients defined by AP2-41 and AP2-42.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Dec valve ramping Dec Valve Low Freq–
38 40.00 Hz
start frequency Freq High Freq
AP2
Dec valve ramping DecValve
39 0.0 0–6000.0 Sec
time Time
198
Learning Advanced Features
Frequency limit 0 No
24 Limit Mode 0: No -
options 1 Yes
The time set at AP2-39 refers to the absolute time that it takes for the pump to decelerate
from the frequency set at AP2-38 to the frequency limit set at ADV-25.
199
Learning Advanced Features
well.
The minimum set point for the load tuning begins at 15% of the base frequency (DRV-18
Base Freq), and the maximum set point can be set up to the base frequency. If the
frequency limit is set to ‘1 (Yes)’ at ADV-24 (Freq Limit), the range is limited within the
frequencies set at ADV-25 (Freq Limit Lo) and ADV-26 (Freq Limit Hi).
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Load curve 0 No
01 Load Tune No -
Tuning 1 Yes
Base
Load curve Load Fit
02 30.00 Freq*15%– Hz
Low Freq LFreq
Load Fit HFreq
Current for Low Load Fit
03 40.0 0.0–200.0 %
Freq LCurr
Power for Low Load Fit
04 30.0 0.0–200.0 %
Freq LPwr
200
Learning Advanced Features
Code Description
The inverter performs an automatic tuning to generate an ideal
system load curve.
AP2-01 Load Tune Setting Function
0 None Load tuning is not used.
1 Load Tune Start load tuning.
AP2-02 Load Fit LFreq Defines the first frequency set point for load tuning (user definable).
Displays the current and power measured at the frequency set at
AP2-03 Load Fit LCurr
AP2-02 as a percentage (%) value, based on motor rated current
AP2-04 Load Fit LPwr
and rated power. Values for AP2-03 and AP2-04 are user definable.
Defines the second frequency set point for load tuning(user
AP2-08 Load fit HFreq
definable).
Displays the current and power measured at the frequency set at
AP2-09 Load Fit HCurr
AP2-08 as a percentage (%) value, based on motor rated current
AP2-10 Load Fit HPwr
and rated power. Values for AP2-09 and AP2-10 are user definable.
AP2-11 Load Curve Cur
Monitors the load curve value set at AP2-1 (Load Tune) based on
AP2-12 Load Curve
the current output frequency.
PWR
When a load tuning is performed, the inverter measures for 10 seconds the motor current
and power, at the frequencies set at AP2-02 and AP2-09. The motor current and power
values measured here are used to generate an ideal load curve.
Note
Load tuning is not available while the inverter is operating.
201
Learning Advanced Features
• If the frequencies for AP2-02 (Low Freq) and AP2-08 (High Freq) are set too close to each
other, the resulting load curve may not reflect the actual (ideal) load curve. Therefore, it is
recommended that you keep the AP2-02 and AP2-08 frequencies as close to the factory
defaults as possible.
• If a secondary motor is in use, note that the existing load curve for the main motor will be
applied to the secondary motor unless a load tuning has been performed for the secondary
motor.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Level detection
70 LDT Sel Warning None/Warning/Trip
mode
Level detection LDT Area
71 1 . Above Level 0–1 -
range Sel
Level detection
72 LDT Source 0: Output Current 0–12 -
source
Level detection LDT Dly
73 2.0 0–9999 Sec
delay time Time
Level detection Source setting is Source setting is
74 LDT Level -
reference value used used
PRT
Level detection LDT Band Source setting is Source setting is
75 -
bandwidth width used used
Level detection 0.00–Max Freq
76 LDT Freq 20.00 Hz
frequency (Hz)
Level detection LDT Restart
77 60.0 0.0–3000.0 Min
trip restart time DT
LDT Auto restart
96 LDT Rst Cnt 1 0~6000 -
count
LDT Auto restart LDT Rst Cnt
97 - 0~6000 -
cycle count M
202
Learning Advanced Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
LDT Auto restart
LDT Cnt Clr
98 cycle 60 0~6000 Sec
T
Initialization time
Code Description
Determines the inverter operation when a level detection trip occurs.
Setting Functions
PRT-70 LDT Sel 0 None No operation
1 Warning The inverter displays a warning message.
2 Free-Run The inverter free-runs, then stops.
3 Dec The inverter decelerates, then stops.
Sets the level detection range.
Setting Operation
PRT-71 Level
1 Below Triggers a level detect fault trip when the inverter
Detect
operates below the frequency set by the user.
2 Above Triggers a level detect fault trip when the inverter
operates above the frequency set by the user.
Selects a source for level detection.
Setting Function
0 Output Current Sets the output current as the source.
1 DC Link Voltage Sets the DC link voltage as the source.
2 Output Voltage Sets the output voltage as the source.
3 kW Sets the output power as the source.
4 hp Sets the output power as the source.
PRT-72 LDT 5 V1 Sets the V1 terminal input as the source.
Source 6 V2 Sets the V2 terminal input as the source.
7 I2 Sets the I2 terminal input as the source.
8 PID Ref Value Sets the PID reference as the source.
9 PID Fdb Val Sets the PID feedback as the source.
10 PID Output Sets the PID output as the source.
11 EPID1 Fdb Val Sets the external PID feedback 1 as the
source.
12 EPID2 Fdb Val Sets the external PID feedback 2 as the
source.
203
Learning Advanced Features
Code Description
PRT-73 LDT Dly
Sets the delay time for the operation set at PRT-70.
Time
Sets the level for the level detection.
The following are the setting ranges and default values by the source.
Source Default Value Setting Range
Output Rated current 0–150% of the rated current
Current
DC Link 350 0–450 V (2 Type)
Voltage 700 0–900 V (4 Type)
Output 230 0–250 (2 Type)
Voltage 460 0–500 (4 Type)
kW 90% of the Inverter 0–150% of the Inverter rated
rated power power
PRT-74 LDT
V1 9.00 V 0.00–12.00
Level
V2 9.00 -12.00–12.00
I2 18.00 0.00–25.00
PID Ref 50 PID Unit Min–PID Unit Max
Value
PID Fdb 50 PID Unit Min–PID Unit Max
Val
PID Output 50 -100.00%–100.00%
EPID1 Fdb 50 EPID1 Unit Min–EPID1 Unit
Val Max
EPID2 Fdb 50 EPID2 Unit Min–EPID2 Unit
Val Max
If the source is detected below the set level, it must be adjusted to be
above the ‘LDT Level + LDT Band Width’ value to release the level
PRT-75 LDT detection fault trip.
Band If the source is detected above the set level, it must be adjusted to be
Width below the ‘LDT Level - LDT Band Width’ value to release the level
detection fault trip.
The level detection trip bandwidth is 10% of the maximum source value.
Sets the start frequency for the level detection. When setting the level
PRT-76 LDT
detection frequency, take into consideration the source type and the LDT
Freq
level.
If PRT-08 (RST restart) is set to ‘YES,’ the inverter restarts after the time
set at PRT-76 elapses when an LDT trip is released. The LDT Restart
operates each time an LDT trip is released.
PRT-77 LDT
If PRT-77 is set to any other value than ‘0’ and the inverter is operating in
Restart DT
HAND mode, the inverter resets and the LDT trip is released. However,
the inverter stays in OFF mode and does not restart the operation
instantly.
204
Learning Advanced Features
Code Description
When the LDT trip occurs, the number of automatic restart is set by PRT-
96.
PRT-96 LDT Rst If an LDT trip occurs, the inverter automatically restarts after the time set
Cnt in PRT-77 (LDT Restart DT) has elapsed. The PRT-97 is incremented by
PRT-97 LDT Rst 1 each time it is automatically restarted.
Cnt M When the value of PRT-97 becomes equal to PRT-96, it does not try to
PRT-98 LDT Cnt restart automatically.
Clr T The LDT trip will be restarted within the time set in PRT-98 after auto
restart
If not, PRT-97 is initialized to 0.
OUT-31–35 Sets one of the output relays to ‘32 (LDT)’ to monitor the level detection
Relay 1–5 status.
As shown in the figure above, level detection can be carried out (relay output is ‘on’) as the
output frequency is above PRT-76 and the detection value is greater than the value of PRT-
74. The LDT operation is released if the value is less than the value subtracted from the value of
band of, when the value of the feedback is set from PRT-74 to PRT-75.
• The LDT operation is carried out if the inverter operation is above PRT-74.
• Modify PRT-74 and PRT-75 appropriately when modifying LDT Source of PRT-71.
• PRT-74 and PRT-75 become default value if the LDT Source is modified.
• PRT-77 (Restart DT) and PRT-08 (RST restart) features operate separately.
• The inverter waits until the delay time set at PRT-73 (LDT Dly Time) before it operates
based on the setting in LDT-70 when the level detection time condition is met.
205
Learning Advanced Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
0 None
PRT 3 Dec
Pipe Break PipeBroken
61 97.5 0–100 %
Detection variation Dev
Pipe Break PipeBroken
62 10.0 0–6000.0 Sec
Detection time DT
OUT 31–36 Relay output 1–5 Relay1–5 28 Pipe Broken -
Code Description
Select the operation while detecting Pipe Breaks
Setting Function
PRT-60 0 None No operation
PipeBroken Sel 1 Warning The inverter displays a warning message.
2 Free-Run The inverter free-runs, then stops.
3 Dec The inverter decelerates, then stops.
PRT-61 Sets the Pipe Break Detection level. Set the detect level by multiplying the
PipeBroken Dev set value for PRT-61 by PID Reference.
PRT-62 Sets the detect delay time. Pipe Break operates if the Pipe Break situation
PipeBroken DT is maintained for a set amount of time.
OUT31–36 If Pipe Break (28) is set, when a Pipe Break occurs, the inverter sends out
Define output with Relay.
206
Learning Advanced Features
207
Learning Advanced Features
In the graph above, Pipe Break occurs if the feedback is smaller than the value calculated
by multiplying the two values set at PID-04 and PRT-61(PID-04 x PRT-61) at the inverter’s
maximum output (when PID output is the maximum set value, or the inverter is running at
the frequency set at DRV-20).
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Initial heating
48 Pre Heat Level 20 1–100 %
output current
Initial heating
AP2 49 Pre Heat Duty 30 1–100 %
output duty
DC input delay
50 DC Inj Delay T 60.0 0.0–600.0 sec
time
65– Terminal block
IN P1–7 Define 44 Pre Heat -
71 input 1–7
Code Description
Sets the current to be used for initial heating. Sets the current to
AP2-48 Pre Heat Curr
motor no-load current % value.
Sets the duty (time) for the current to be used for initial heating, from
AP2-49 Pre Heat Duty
10 seconds to % value.
AP2-50 DC Inj Delay Sets a certain delay time to prevent from an over current trip that may
T occur when a DC input is performed after the inverter Free-Run stop.
IN-65–71 P1–7 Define Performs the Pre Heat function if the Pre Heat (44) terminal is set.
The initial heating function continually operates when the set multi-function input terminal is
on and until the inverter command is on. If an inverter command is input while the initial
heating function is operating, the inverter starts operation immediately.
208
Learning Advanced Features
The initial heating operation starts to run after an inverter operation stops, when the initial
heating function’s terminal input is on after the inverter operation command is off.
The diagram above shows the operation waveform related to AP2-50 DC Inj Delay T. The
Pre Heat function performs when the inverter stop mode is set to Free Run and the Pre
Heat signal is supplied. Then, if the inverter operation command is on, the inverter
maintains acceleration and a fixed frequency. If the inverter operation command is off, the
motor is in Free Run and the Pre Heat operations starts after the time amount set in AP2-
50.
• If the value for AP2-48 Pre Heat Curr is above the rated motor current value, it is limited by
the rated motor current value.
• If the value for AP2-48 Pre Heat Curr is too high or the DC current output time is too long,
the motor may overheat or be damaged and the Inver IOLT may also malfunction. Reduce
the DC output current amount and DC output time to prevent from such damages.
209
Learning Advanced Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Motor
DRV 14 Motor capacity 9 5.5 kW 7–20 -
Capacity
Motor pole
11 Pole Number 4 2–48 -
number
12 Rated slip speed Rated Slip 45 0–3000 Rpm
Rated motor
13 Rated Curr 21.0 1.0–1000.0 A
current
Motor no-load
14 Noload curr 7.1 0.5–1000.0 A
current
Motor rated
15 Rated Volt 220 170–480 V
BAS voltage
16 Motor efficiency Efficiency 85 70–100 %
20 Auto tuning Auto Tuning 0 None - -
Depends on
21 Stator resistance Rs 0.314 the motor Ω
setting
Depends on
Leakage
22 Lsigma 3.19 the motor mH
inductance
setting
210
Learning Advanced Features
211
Learning Advanced Features
Code Description
Sets the motor capacity to be used. The maximum motor capacity
DRV-14 Motor Capacity is limited by the inverter capacity and the keypad only displays the
inverter capacity.
Select an auto tuning type and run it. Select one of the options and
then press the [ENT] key to run the auto tuning.
Setting Function
0 None Auto tuning function is disabled. Also, if you
select one of the auto tuning options and run
it, the parameter value will revert back to ‘0’
when the auto tuning is complete.
1 All Measures all motor parameters while the
(rotating motor is rotating, including stator resistance
BAS-20 Auto Tuning type) (Rs), no-load current (Noload Curr), rotor
time constant (Tr), etc. Since the motor is
rotating while the parameters are being
measured, if the load is connected to the
motor spindle, the parameters may not be
measured accurately. For accurate
measurements, remove the load attached to
the motor spindle.
Note that the rotor time constant (Tr) must be
measured in a stopped position.
212
Learning Advanced Features
Code Description
2 All (static Measures all parameters while the motor is
type) in the stopped position, including stator
resistance (Rs), no-load current (Noload
Curr), rotor time constant (Tr), etc. Since the
motor is not rotating while the parameters
are measured, the measurements are not
affected when the load is connected to the
motor spindle. However, when measuring
parameters, do not rotate the motor spindle
on the load side.
• Perform auto tuning ONLY after the motor has completely stopped running.
• Auto tuning operates when the inverter’s auto mode is off.
• Before you run auto tuning, check the motor pole number, rated slip, rated current, rated
voltage, and efficiency on the motor’s rating plate and enter the data. The default
parameter setting is used for values that are not entered.
• When measuring all parameters after selecting 2 ( All-static type) at BAS-20: compared
with rotation type auto tuning where parameters are measured while the motor is rotating,
parameter values measured with static auto tuning may be less accurate. Inaccuracy of the
measured parameters may degrade the performance of operations. Therefore, run static-
type auto tuning by selecting 2 (All) only when the motor cannot be rotated (when gearing
and belts cannot be separated easily, or when the motor cannot be separated mechanically
from the load).
• If auto tuning operates without wiring the motor, ‘Rs Tune Err’ or ‘Lsig Tune Err’ warning
messages are displayed. It can be reset if you press ‘STOP/RESET’ button of the keypad.
213
Learning Advanced Features
Time Event function enables the user to operate the inverter using the RTC (Real-Time
Clock) feature at certain times that the user would like to set. An RTC battery is installed on
the I/O board of the H100 inverter, and it lasts approximately 25,800 hours with the inverter
turned off, and 53,300 hours with the inverter turned on.
To use the Time Event, set the current date and time. Three parameters need to be set to
configure the Time event feature: Time Period Module, Time Event, and Exception Date.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
01/01/2000 ~
01 Current date Now Date 01/01/2000 Hz
12/31/2099 (Date)
02 Current time Now Time 0: 00 0: 00–23: 59 Sec
Current day of Now
03 0000001 0000000–1111111 -
the week Weekday
Summer Time Summer T 01/01 ~ Summer T
04 04/01 Day
Start date Start Stop
Summer Time Summer T Summer T Start ~
05 11/31 Day
Finish date Stop 12/31(Date)
Period
Period
10 connection - - -
AP3 Status
status
Time Period 1 Period1
11 24: 00 00:00 ~ 24:00 Min
Start time StartT
Time Period 1 Period1 Period1 StartT ~
12 24: 00 Min
End time Stop T 24:00(Min)
Time Period 1
13 Day of the Period1 Day 0000000 0000000~1111111 -
week
Time Period 2 Period2
14 24: 00 00:00 ~ 24:00 Min
Start time StartT
15 Time Period 2 Period2 24: 00 Period2 StartT ~ Min
214
Learning Advanced Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
End time Stop T 24:00(Min)
Time Period 2
16 Day of the Period2 Day 00000000 0000000~1111111 -
week
Time Period 3
Period3
17 Start time 24: 00 00:00 ~ 24:00 Min
StartT
configuration
215
Learning Advanced Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
functions Event1Defin 1 Fx
e
2 Rx
3 Speed-L
4 Speed-M
5 Speed-H
7 Xcel-L
8 Xcel-M
9 Xcel-H
10 Xcel Stop
11 Run Enable
12 2nd Source
13 Exchange
14 Analog Hold
15 I-Term Clear
PID
16
Openloop
17 PID Gain 2
PID Ref
18
Change
19 2nd Motor
20 Timer In
Dias Aux
21
Ref
22 EPID1 Run
EPID1 ITerm
23
Clr
24 Pre Heat
25 EPID2 Run
EPID2 iTerm
26
Clr
Sleep Wake
27
Chg
216
Learning Advanced Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
PID Step
28
Ref L
PID Step
29
Ref M
PID Step
30
Ref H
74– Time Event 2–Time Event 8 Parameter
87 (The same setting range and initial value as Time Event 1)
Code Description
Sets the current date, time, and day of the week. The Time Event
function is based on the setting. When the user sets the summer
time start date, the current time is subtracted by one hour. ex) [AP3-
04 Summer T Start] is set to April 1, and if it is 1:59 on April 1, it will
AP3-01 Now Date not be 2:00 a minute later and it will be 1:00 on April 1. If [AP3-05
AP3-02 Now Time Summer T Stop] is set to December 25th, then it will be 1:59 on
AP3-03 Now Weekday December 25th, and it will be 3:00 on December 25 instead of 2:00
a minute later. Summer time is different for each country. The
parameter is based on 2 o'clock. If there is no charge on the RTC
battery, it is initialized to 00:00 on January 1, 2000 when the
inverter power is off / on.
AP3-04 Summer T Start
Set the Summer time start and finish date.
AP3-05 Summer T Stop
Select the desired date format.
Configuration Function
0 YYYY/MM/DD Year/Month/Day is displayed.
AP3-06 Date format
1 MM/DD/YYYY Month/Day/Year is displayed (USA).
2 DD/MM/YYYY The format of Day/Month/Year is displayed
(Europe).
Bits 0–3 are used to indicate the time module that is currently in use
among the 4 different time modules set at AP3-11–AP3-22.
AP3-10 Period Status
Bits 4–11 are used to indicate the exception day that is set at AP3-
30–AP3-53.
AP3-11–AP3-20 Period
The start time for the 4 time periods can be set up to 4.
1–4 Start T
AP3-12–AP3-21 Period
The end time for the 4 time periods can be set up to 4.
1–4 Stop T
217
Learning Advanced Features
Code Description
The Time period date for the operation can be set up to 4. It can be
set on a weekly basis. If the bit is ‘1 (on)’, it indicates the relevant
day is selected. If the Bit is ‘0 (off)’, it indicates the relevant day is
AP3-13–AP3-22 not selected.
Period 1~4 Day
Bit
6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday
AP3-30–AP3-51
The operation start time for the 8 Exception days can be set.
Exception1–8 Start T
AP3-31–AP3-52
The operation end time for the 8 Exception days can be set.
Exception1–8 Stop T
AP3-32–AP3-53
The date for the 8 Exception days can be set.
Exception1–8 Date
Enables or disables the Time Event
Setting Function
AP3-70 Time Event En
0 No Time Event is not used.
1 Yes Time Event is used.
It shows which T-Event from 1–8 is being performed.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
AP3-71 T-Event Status T- T- T- T- T- T- T- T-
Event Event Event Event Event Event Event Event
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Select the desired module of the Time Module and Exception Day
set in AP3-11–AP3-53 for the relevant events.
If the bit is 1, it indicates the relevant Time Module or Exception Day
is selected. If the Bit is 0, it indicates the Time Module or Exception
Day is not selected.
AP3-72–86 T-Event1–8
Period bit
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Exception
Exception
Exception
Exception
Exception
Exception
Exception
Exception
Period 4
Period 3
Period 2
Period 1
Date 8
Date 7
Date 6
Date 5
Date 4
Date 3
Date 2
Date 1
218
Learning Advanced Features
Code Description
2 Rx 18 PID Ref Change
3 Speed-L 19 2nd Motor
4 Speed-M 20 Timer In
5 Speed-H 21 Dias Aux Ref
6 Xcel-L 22 EPID1 Run
7 Xcel-M 23 EPID1 Openloop
8 Xcel-H 24 Pre Heat
9 Xcel Stop 25 EPID2 Run
10 Run Enable 26 EPID2 Openloop
11 2nd Source 27 Sleep Wake Chg
12 Exchange 28 PID Step Ref L
13 Analog Hold 29 PID Step Ref M
14 I-Term Clear 30 PID Step Ref H
15 None
There are 4 Time Period Sets in the Time Event. Each Time Period Set has: period 1–4
Start (Start time), Period 1–4 Stop T (End time), and Period 1–4 Day (Operation day) for
which they can be set.
Time Schedule
Time Period 2
Code Function Setting
AP3-14 Period2 StartT 00: 00
AP3-15 Period2 StopT 24: 00
219
Learning Advanced Features
Time Schedule
Time Period 3 Code Function Setting
AP3-17 Period3 StartT 10: 00
AP3-18 Period3 StopT 14: 00
AP3-19 Period3 Day 1000111
The tables below show the parameter values for Time Period 1, Time Period 2, and Time
Period 3. When the parameters are set for the Time Periods 1-3 as shown in the tables
below, this indicates the Time Event function turns on and off on the following days and
time.
There are 8 Exception date modules in the Time Event function. They are used to specify
the operation on particular days (public holidays, etc.). The settings for the start time and the
end time are the same as the settings for the modules and can be set for particular days.
The Exception dates can be set redundantly with the Time periods. If the Time Periods and
the Exception Dates are set redundantly, the inverter operates on the Exception Dates set.
220
Learning Advanced Features
Time Schedule
Exception
Code Function Setting
Date 2
AP3-33 Except2 StartT 00: 00
AP3-34 Except2 StopT 24: 00
AP3-35 Except2 Day 01/01
Every Sunday, Thursday, Friday, and Saturday at 10: 00 (On) and 14: 00 (Off)
Time Schedule
Exception
Code Function Setting
Date 3
AP3-36 Except3 StartT 10: 00
AP3-37 Except3 StopT 14: 00
AP3-38 Except3 Day 01/01
221
Learning Advanced Features
222
Learning Advanced Features
There are 8 Time event modules in the Time Event function. The parameters for T-Events
1–8 are used to set the connections to each module for the Time Period and the Exception
Date. The parameters for T-Event 1–8 are used to specify the operation on particular days.
Each Time event module can be set for the connections to 4 Time period modules and 8
Exception days. Time event modules are set as a bit unit in the parameters for Events 1–8.
The diagram below shows the connections between the Time event modules and the time
period modules. The Time Event 1 is connected to Time Period 4. The Time Event 8 is
connected to Time Periods 1–4 and the Exception Dates 2.
The functions to be performed in the Time Event for T-Events 1–8 can be set. 30 functions
can be set (refer to page 218). There are 8 Time event modules in the Time Event. The
parameters for T-Events 1–8 are used to set the connections to each module for the Time
Period and the Exception Date. The parameters for T-Events 1–8 are used to specify the
operation on particular days.
223
Learning Advanced Features
If the Time events are set as the parameters below, the inverter operates as illustrated.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Command
06 Cmd Ref Src 5: Time Event 0–9 -
Source
DRV Frequency
07 command Freq Ref Src 0: KeyPad 0–11 -
source
Time Period
11 Period1 StartT 10: 00 00: 00–24: 00 Min
1 Start time
Time Period
12 Period1 Stop T 20: 00 00: 00–24: 00 Min
1 End time
Time Period
0000000–
1 Day of the Period1 Day 0110000
13 1111111
week
Time Period
14 Period2 StartT 12: 00 00: 00–24: 00 Min
2 Start time
Time Period
15 Period2 Stop T 17: 00 00: 00–24: 00 Min
2 End time
Time Period
0000000–
16 2 Day of the Period2 Day 00100000 -
1111111
week
Time Event 0 No
AP3 70 Time Event En 1: YES -
configuration 1 Yes
Time Event 1
000000000001–
72 connection T-Event1Period 00000000001
111111111111
configuration
0 None
1 Fx
2 Rx
3 Speed-L
Time Event 1
73 T-Event1Define 1: Fx 4 Speed-M
functions
5 Speed-H
7 Xcel-L
8 Xcel-M
9 Xcel-H
224
Learning Advanced Features
10 Xcel Stop
11 Run Enable
12 2nd Source
13 Exchange
14 Analog Hold
15 I-Term Clear
PID
16
Openloop
17 PID Gain 2
PID Ref
18
Change
19 2nd Motor
20 Timer In
Dias Aux
21
Ref
22 EPID1 Run
EPID1
23
ITerm Clr
24 Pre Heat
25 EPID2 Run
EPID2
26
ITerm Clr
Sleep Wake
27
Chg
PID Step
28
Ref L
PID Step
29
Ref M
PID Step
30
Ref H
Time Event 2 000000000001–
74 T-Event1Period 00000000010
connection 111111111111
Time Event 2
75 T-Event2Define 3: Speed-L Refer to AP3-73
functions
225
Learning Advanced Features
The parameters in the table above shows the frequency command sources for the keypad
and the operation command sources for the Time Event.
The following is an example of an inverter operation utilizing the Time Period modules 1 and
2 with Time Events 1 and 2:
Time Period 1 is used to operate the inverter on Mondays and Tuesdays from 10AM to
8PM. Time Period 2 is used to operate the inverter on Tuesday from 12PM to 5PM.
Time Event 1 triggers forward operations based on the frequency input on the keypad and
continues the operation for the time set at Time Period module 1. Time Event 2 operates
the inverter at Speed-L for the time set at Time Period module 2.
On Mondays, the inverter operates in the forward direction based on the frequency input on
the keypad from 10AM to 8PM (Time Event 1). On Tuesdays, it operates again in the
forward direction based on the keypad frequency input from 10AM to 12PM (Time Event 1),
and then operates at Speed-L from 12PM to 5PM (Time Event 2). When the operation
assigned by Time Event 2 is complete, the inverter resumes its Time Event 1 operation (the
inverter operates based on the keypad frequency input from 5PM to 8PM).
Note
When repetitive frequency commands related to the frequency input command occur while the
Time Event function is performing, Time Event performs its function in the order of the
frequency command sources set in Freq Ref Src for DRV-07 (followed by Jog operation and
multi-step acc/dec).
226
Learning Advanced Features
If a fault trip occurs during a time event operation, the inverter stops the operation and
stays in a trip state. When this happens, there are two options to resume the stopped
operation:
• Set PRT-08 (RST Restart) to ‘YES’ to allow the inverter to automatically restart after
the trip condition is released.
• Refresh the setting at AP3-70 (Time Event En). Set AP3-70 to ‘Yes’ from ‘No’. If one of
the input terminals (IN-65–71 Px Define) is assigned to it, turn the switch off then turn it
back on to resume the time event operation.
227
Learning Advanced Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Kinetic energy
77 KEB Select 1 Yes 0–1 -
buffering selection
Kinetic energy KEB Start
78 130 110–140 %
buffering start level Lev
Kinetic energy KEB Stop
79 135 115–145 %
buffering stop level Lev
Kinetic energy KEB Slip
80 300 0–20000 -
CON buffering slip gain Gain
Kinetic energy
81 KEB P Gain 1000 0–20000 -
buffering P-Gain
Kinetic energy
82 KEB I Gain 500 1–20000 -
buffering I gain
Kinetic energy 10.0 0.75~90kW
KEB Acc
83 buffering 0.0–600.0 Sec
Time 30.0 110~500kW
acceleration time
Code Description
Select the kinetic energy buffering operation when the input power is
disconnected.
Setting Function
CON-77 0 No General deceleration is carried out until a
KEB Select low voltage trip occurs.
1 Yes The inverter power frequency is controlled
and the regeneration energy from the motor
is charged by the inverter.
CON-78
Sets the start and stop points of the kinetic energy buffering operation.
KEB Start Lev,
The set values must be based on the low voltage trip level at 100%, and
CON-79
the stop level (CON-79) must be set higher than the start level (CON-78).
KEB Stop Lev
CON-80 Used to prevent malfunctions caused by low voltage from initial kinetic
KEB Slip Gain energy buffering occurring due to power interruptions.
Used to maintain the voltage during the kinetic energy buffering operation.
CON-81
It operates the inverter by modifying the set value to prevent malfunctions
KEB P Gain
caused by low voltage after power interruptions.
CON-82 Used to maintain the voltage during the kinetic energy buffering operation.
228
Learning Advanced Features
Code Description
KEB I Gain Sets the gain value to maintain the operation until the frequency stops
during the kinetic energy buffering operation.
CON-83 Sets the acceleration time for the frequency reference when the inverter’s
KEB Acc Time operation becomes normal after the kinetic energy buffering operation.
Note
• The KEB functions may perform differently depending on the size of the loads. The KEB
Gains can be set for a better performance.
• If a low voltage trip occurs after a power interruption, it indicates the load inertia and level
are high. In such cases, the KEB functions can be performed better by increasing the KEB
I Gain and the KEB Slip Gain.
• If motor vibration or torque variation occurs during the KEB function operation after power
interruptions, the KEB functions can be performed better by increasing the KEB P Gain or
decreasing the KEB I Gain.
Depending on the duration of instantaneous power interruptions and the amount of load inertia,
a low voltage trip may occur even during a kinetic energy buffering operation. Motors may
vibrate during kinetic energy buffering operation for some loads, except for variable torque loads
(for example, fan or pump loads).
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Enable or
disable anti- 0 No
hunting
CON 13 AHR Sel 1 Yes -
regulation
(resonance 1 Yes
prevention)
229
Learning Advanced Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Anti-hunting
14 regulation P- AHR P-Gain 1000 0–32767 -
Gain
Anti-hunting
AHR Low 0–AHR High
15 regulation start 0 Hz
Freq Freq
frequency
Anti-hunting
AHR High AHR Low
16 regulation end 400.00 Hz
Freq Freq–400.00
frequency
Anti-hunting
regulation
17 AHR Limit 2 0–20 %
compensation
voltage limit
Code Description
Selects the Anti-hunting regulator operation.
Setting Function
CON-13 AHR Sel
0 No Disable anti-hunting regulation.
1 Yes Enable anti-hunting regulation.
Increasing AHR proportional gain improves responsiveness of
CON-14 AHR P-Gain the anti-hunting regulation. However, current oscillation may
result if AHR proportional gain is set too high.
CON-15 AHR Low Freq Sets the lower limit frequency (CON-15) and the maxim limit
CON-16 AHR High Freq frequency (CON-16) for anti-hunting regulation.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Fire mode Fire Mode
PRT 44 3473 - -
password PW
230
Learning Advanced Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
0 None -
Fire mode Fire Mode
45 0: None 1 Fire Mode
setting Sel
2 Test Mode
Code Description
Fire mode password is 3473.
PRT-44 Fire Mode PW A password must be created to enable Fire mode. PRT-45 (Fire
Mode Sel) can be modified only after the password is entered.
231
Learning Advanced Features
Code Description
Sets the Fire Mode.
Setting Function
0 None Fire mode is not used.
PRT-45 Fire Mode Sel 1 Fire Mode Normal Fire mode
2 Test Mode Fire mode test mode
In Fire test mode, faults are normally processed.
Using Fire test mode does not increase the count
value at PRT-48 (Fire Mode Cnt).
PRT-46 Fire Mode Dir Sets the run direction for Fire mode operation.
PRT-47 Fire Mode Freq Sets the operation frequency for Fire mode.
Counts the number of the Fire mode operations. The number
PRT-48 Fire Mode Cnt increases only when PRT-45 (Fire Mode Sel) is set to ‘Fire Mode’.
The count increases up to 99, then it does not increase any more.
• If damper or lubrication operations are set for the inverter, Fire mode operation is
performed after the delay times set in the relevant operations.
• Note that Fire mode operation voids the product warranty.
• In Fire mode test mode, the inverter does not ignore the fault trips or perform a reset
restart. All the fault trips will be processed normally. Fire mode test mode does not increase
the Fire mode count (PRT-48).
• When the Fire mode operation is complete, the inverter stops operating and is turned off.
232
Learning Advanced Features
If the inverter output current is lower than the current set at BAS-14 (Noload Curr), the
output voltage must be reduced as low as the level set at ADV-51 (Energy Save). The
voltage before the energy saving operation starts will become the base value of the
percentage. Manual energy saving operation will not be carried out during acceleration and
deceleration.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
0 None
Energy saving E-Save
50 1 Manual 1 Manual -
operation Mode
ADV 2 Auto
Energy saving Energy
51 30 0–30 %
amount Save
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Energy saving
50 E-Save Mode 2 Auto 0–2 -
operation
ADV
Energy saving
52 E-Save Det T 20.0 0.0–100.0 Sec
point search time
233
Learning Advanced Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Speed search
70 SS Mode 0 Flying Start-1 - -
mode selection
Speed search Speed
71 0000 - bit
operation selection Search
234
Learning Advanced Features
Code Description
Select a speed search type.
Setting Function
0 Flying Start-1 The speed search is carried out as it controls the
inverter output current during idling below the
CON-72 (SS Sup-Current) parameter setting. If
the direction of the idling motor and the direction
of operation command at restart are the same, a
stable speed search function can be performed at
about 10 Hz or lower. However, if the direction of
the idling motor and the direction of operation
command at restart are different, the speed
search does not produce a satisfactory result
because the direction of idling cannot be
established.
1 Flying Start-2 The speed search is carried out as it PI controls
CON-70 SS Mode
the ripple current which is generated by the
counter electromotive force during no-load
rotation. Because this mode establishes the
direction of the idling motor (forward/reverse), the
speed search function is stable regardless of the
direction of the idling motor and direction of
operation command. However because the ripple
current is used which is generated by the counter
electromotive force at idle (the counter
electromotive force is proportional to the idle
speed), the idle frequency is not determined
accurately and re-acceleration may start from
zero speed when the speed search is performed
for the idling motor at low speed (about 10 - 15
Hz, though it depends on motor characteristics).
Speed search can be selected from the following 4 options. If the top
display segment is on, it is enabled (On). If the bottom segment is on, it
is disabled (Off).
Item Bit Setting On Status Bit setting Off Status
Keypad
CON-71 Speed
Search Type and Functions of Speed Search Setting
Setting Function
bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1
Speed search for general
acceleration
Initialization after a fault trip
235
Learning Advanced Features
Speed search for general acceleration: If bit 1 is set to ‘1’ and the
inverter operation command runs, acceleration starts with the speed
search operation. When the motor is rotating under load, a fault trip
may occur if the operation command is run for the inverter to provide
voltage output. The speed search function prevents such fault trips
from occurring.
Initialization after a fault trip other than an LV trip: If bit 2 is set to ‘1’
and PRT-08 (RST Restart) is set to ‘1 (Yes)’, the speed search
operation automatically accelerates the motor to the operation
frequency used before the fault trip when the [Reset] key is pressed (or
the terminal block is initialized) after a fault trip.
236
Learning Advanced Features
Starting with power-on: Set bit 4 to ‘1’ and ADV-10 (Power-on Run)
to ‘1 (Yes)’. If inverter input power is supplied while the inverter
operation command is on, the speed search operation will accelerate
the motor up to the frequency reference.
The amount of current flow is controlled during speed search operation
CON-72 SS Sup-
based on the motor’s rated current. If CON-70 (SS mode) is set to ‘1
Current
(Flying Start-2)’, this code is not visible.
CON-73 SS P- The P/I gain of the speed search controller can be adjusted. If CON-70
Gain, (SS Mode) is set to ‘1(Flying Start-2)’, different factory defaults, based
CON-74 SS I-Gain on motor capacity, are used and defined in DRV-14 (Motor Capacity).
CON-75 SS Block The block time parameter prevents overvoltage trips due to counter
Time electromotive force.
Note
If operated within the rated output, the H100 series inverter is designed to withstand
instantaneous power interruptions within 8 ms and maintain normal operation. The DC
voltage inside the inverter may vary depending on the output load. If the power interruption
time is longer than 8 ms, a low voltage trip may occur.
Select the Speed search function (normal acceleration) for a proper re-operation during a
free-run.
If the speed search function (normal acceleration) is not selected during the acceleration, an
over current trip or an overload trip may occur.
237
Learning Advanced Features
Parameter
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit
Setting
08 Select start at trip reset RST Restart 11 - -
PRT 09 Auto restart count Retry Number 6 0–10 -
10 Auto restart delay time Retry Delay 1.0 0.1–60.0 sec
Select speed search
71 Speed Search - 0000–1111 bit
operation
Speed search startup SS Sup-
72 90 70–120 %
current Current
Speed search
CON 73 SS P-Gain 100 0–9999
proportional gain
Speed search integral
74 SS I-Gain 200 0–9999
gain
Output block time
75 SS Block Time 1.0 0.0–60.0 sec
before speed search
Code Description
The Reset restart function can be performed by one of the two different
PRT-08
types. If the top segment is turned on, it indicates the function is on. If
RST Restart
the bottom segment is turned on, it indicates the function is off.
Type Bit On Bit Off
238
Learning Advanced Features
Code Description
LCD Display
• If the auto restart number is set, be careful when the inverter resets from a fault trip. The
motor may automatically start to rotate.
• In HAND mode, auto restart resets the trip condition but it does not restart the inverter
operation.
239
Learning Advanced Features
• In AUTO mode,
- if the auto restart is configured, the inverter restarts after a trip condition is released
(command via digital input is used to restart the operation).
- if the auto restart is not configured and the trip condition is released using the OFF
key, or the switches at the terminal input, the inverter stays in the OFF state.
Because the command information is reset along with the trip condition, a new
command is required to operate the inverter.
Code Description
Adjusts motor operational noise by changing carrier frequency settings.
Power transistors (IGBT) in the inverter generate and supply high
CON-04 frequency switching voltage to the motor. The switching speed in this
Carrier Freq process refers to the carrier frequency. If the carrier frequency is set high, it
reduces operational noise from the motor. If the carrier frequency is set
low, it increases operational noise from the motor.
The heat loss and leakage current from the inverter can be reduced by
changing the load rate option at CON-05 (PWM Mode). Selecting ‘1
(LowLeakage PWM)’ reduces heat loss and leakage current, compared to
when ‘0 (Normal PWM)’ is selected. However, it increases the motor noise.
CON-05 PWM Low leakage PWM uses a 2 phase PWM modulation mode, which helps
Mode minimize degradation and reduces switching loss by approximately 30%.
240
Learning Advanced Features
Code Description
LowLeakage PWM Normal PWM
Motor noise ↑ ↓
Heat generation ↓ ↑
Leakage current ↓ ↑
Leakage current ↓ ↑
Note
241
Learning Advanced Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
65– Px terminal Px Define
IN 28 2nd Motor 0-55 -
71 configuration (Px: P1–P7)
Code Description
Set one of the multi-function input terminals (P1–P5) to 26 (2nd Motor) to
display the M2 (2nd motor group) group. An input signal to a multi-function
terminal set to 2nd motor will operate the motor according to the code
IN-65–71 Px settings listed below. However, if the inverter is in operation, input signals
Define to the multi-function terminals will not read as a 2nd motor parameter.
PRT-50 (Stall Prevent) must be set first, before M2-28 (M2-Stall Lev)
settings can be used. Also, PRT-40 (ETH Trip Sel) must be set first, before
M2-29 (M2-ETH 1 min) and M2-30 (M2-ETH Cont) settings.
Parameter Setting at Multi-function Terminal Input on a 2nd Motor
242
Learning Advanced Features
Parameter Setting
Group Code Name LCD Display Unit
Setting Range
IN 67 Terminal P3 configuration P3 Define 26 2nd Motor - -
06 Motor capacity M2-Capacity - 3.7 kW - -
M2
08 Control mode M2-Ctrl Mode 0 V/F - -
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
65– Px terminal Px Define
IN 18 Exchange 0-55 -
71 configuration (Px: P1–P7)
Multi-function
31 Relay1 17 Inverter Line 0-41 -
relay 1 items
OUT
Multi-function
33 Q1 Define 18 Comm Line 0-41 -
output 1 items
Code Description
When the motor power source changes from inverter output to main
IN-65–71
supply power, select a terminal to use and set the code value to ‘18
Px Define
(Exchange)’. Power will be switched when the selected terminal is on. To
243
Learning Advanced Features
OUT-31 Relay 1–
OUT-36 Q1 Define
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
ADV 64 Cooling fan control Fan Control 0 During Run 0–2 -
Code Description
Settings Description
ADV-64 Fan 0 During Run The cooling fan runs when the power is supplied to
Control the inverter and the operation command is on. The
cooling fan stops when the power is supplied to the
inverter and the operation command is off. When the
244
Learning Advanced Features
Code Description
inverter heat sink temperature is higher than its set
value, the cooling fan operates automatically
regardless of its operation status.
1 Always On Cooling fan runs constantly if the power is supplied to
the inverter.
2 Temp With power connected and the run operation
Control command on: if the setting is in Temp Control, the
cooling fan will not operate unless the temperature in
the heat sink reaches the set temperature.
Note
Despite setting ADV-64 to ‘0 (During Run)’, if the heat sink temperature reaches a set level by
current input harmonic wave or noise, the cooling fan may run as a protective function.
A capacity of 110 kW or more has a small built-in fan installed to cool the internal temperature.
The internal fan controls on / off in conjunction with the operation command of the inverter main
control fan
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
BAS 10 Input power frequency 60/50 Hz Sel 0 60 Hz 0–1 -
Set Inverter input power voltage. Low voltage fault trip level changes automatically to the
set voltage standard.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
200 Type 220 170–240
Input
AC Input
BAS 19 power 320–480 0.75~90kW V
Volt 400 Type 380
voltage
320-550 110~500kW
245
Learning Advanced Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
46 Parameter read Parameter Read 1 Yes - -
CNF 47 Parameter write Parameter Write 1 Yes - -
48 Parameter save Parameter Save 1 Yes - -
Code Description
Copies saved parameters from the inverter to the keypad. Saved
CNF-46 Parameter
parameters on the keypad will be deleted and replaced with the copied
Read
parameters.
Copies saved parameters from the keypad to the inverter. Saved
parameters on the inverter will be deleted and replaced with the copied
CNF-47 Parameter
parameters. If an error occurs during parameter writing, the previously
Write
saved data will be used. If there is no saved data on the Keypad, ‘EEP
Rom Empty’ will be displayed.
As parameters set during communication transmission are saved to
RAM, the setting values will be lost if the power goes off and on. When
setting parameters during communication transmission, select ‘1 (Yes)’
CNF-48 Parameter
at CNF-48 to save the set parameter.
Save
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
CNF 40 Parameter initialization Parameter Init 0 No 0–15
246
Learning Advanced Features
Code Description
Setting LCD Display Function
0 No No -
Initialize all data. Select ‘1 (All
Grp)’ and press the
1 Initialize all groups All Grp [PROG/ENT] key to start
initialization. On completion,
‘0 (No)’ will be displayed.
2 Initialize DRV group DRV Grp Initialize data by groups.
3 Initialize BAS group BAS Grp Select initialize group and
4 Initialize ADV group ADV Grp press the [PROG/ENT] key
5 Initialize CON group CON Grp to start initialization. On
6 Initialize IN group IN Grp completion, ‘0 (No)’ will be
7 Initialize OUT group OUT Grp displayed.
CNF-40
Parameter Init 8 Initialize COM group COM Grp
9 Initialize PID group PID Grp
10 Initialize EPI group EPI Grp
11 Initialize AP1 group AP1 Grp
12 Initialize AP2 group AP2 Grp
13 Initialize AP3 group AP3 Grp
14 Initialize PRT group PRT Grp
247
Learning Advanced Features
Code Description
Register a password to allow access to parameter view lock. Follow
the steps below to register a password.
No Procedure
1 [PROG/ENT] key on CNF-51 code will show the previous
password input window. If registration is made for the first
time, enter ‘0.’ It is the factory default.
CNF-51 View Lock Pw 2 If a password had been set, enter the saved password.
3 If the entered password matches the saved password, a
new window prompting the user to enter a new password
will be displayed (the process will not progress to the next
stage until the user enters a valid password).
4 Register a new password.
5 After registration, code CNF-51 will be displayed.
To enable parameter view lock, enter a registered password. The
[Locked] sign will be displayed on the screen to indicate that
CNF-50 View Lock Set
parameter view lock is enabled. To disable parameter view lock, re-
enter the password. The [locked] sign will disappear.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
52 Parameter lock Key Lock Set Un-locked 0–9999 -
CNF Parameter lock
53 Key Lock Pw Password 0–9999 -
password
248
Learning Advanced Features
Code Description
Register a password to prohibit parameter modifications. Follow the
procedures below to register a password.
No Procedures
1 Press the [PROG/ENT] key on CNF-53 code and the saved
password input window will be displayed. If password registration
is being made for the first time, enter ‘0’. It is the factory default.
CNF-53 Key Lock
2 If a saved password has been set, enter the saved password.
PW
3 If the entered password matches the saved password, then a
new window to enter a new password will be displayed. (The
process will not move to next stage until the user enters a valid
password).
4 Register a new password.
5 After registration, Code CNF-53 will be displayed.
To enable parameter lock, enter the registered password. The [Locked]
sign will be displayed on the screen to indicate that prohibition is enabled.
CNF-52 Key Lock
Once enabled, pressing the [PROG/ENT] key at once function code will
Set
not allow the display edit mode to run. To disable parameter modification
prohibition, re-enter the password. The [Locked] sign will disappear.
If parameter view lock and parameter lock functions are enabled, no inverter operation related
function changes can be made. It is very important that you memorize the password.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Changed parameter
CNF 41 Changed Para 0 View All - -
display
Code Description
CNF-41 Setting Function
Changed Para 0 View All Display all parameters
249
Learning Advanced Features
Code Description
1 View Changed Display changed parameters only
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Multi-function key Multi Key
42 3 UserGrp SelKey - -
settings Sel
CNF
Delete all user UserGrp
45 0 No - -
registered codes AllDel
Code Description
Select 3 (UserGrp SelKey) from the multi-function key setting options.
If user group parameters are not registered, setting the multi-function
key to the user group select key (UserGrp SelKey) will not display
user group (USR Grp) items on the Keypad.
Follow the procedures below to register parameters to a user group.
No Procedure
1 Set CNF- 42 to ‘3 (UserGrp SelKey)’. A icon will be
displayed at the top of the LCD display.
2 In the parameter mode (PAR Mode), move to the parameter
you need to register and press the [MULTI] key. For example,
if the [MULTI] key is pressed in the frequency reference in
CNF-42 Multi Key Sel DRV-01 (Cmd Frequency), the screen below will be displayed.
250
Learning Advanced Features
Code Description
❹ Existing parameter registered as the user group code 40
❺ Setting range of the user group code. Entering ‘0’ cancels
the settings.
3 ❸ Set a code number to use to register the parameter in the
user group. Select the code number and press the
[PROG/ENT] key.
4 Changing the value in ❸ will also change the value in ❹. If
no code is registered, ‘Empty Code’ will be displayed. Entering
‘0’ cancels the settings.
5 The registered parameters are listed in the user group in U&M
mode. You can register one parameter multiple times if
necessary. For example, a parameter can be registered as
code 2, code 11, and more in the user group.
Follow the procedures below to delete parameters in the user group.
No. Settings
1 Set CNF- 42 to ‘3 (UserGrp SelKey)’. A icon will be
displayed at the top of the LCD display.
2 In the USR group in U&M mode, move the cursor to the code
that is to be deleted.
3 Press the [MULTI] key.
4 Move to ‘YES’ on the deletion confirmation screen, and press
the [PROG/ENT] key.
5 Deletion completed.
CNF-25 UserGrp AllDel Set to ‘1 (Yes)’ to delete all registered parameters in the user group.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Parameter easy start Easy Start
CNF 61 1 Yes - -
settings On
251
Learning Advanced Features
Use caution when turning on the inverter after Easy Start On configuration. If codes such as PRT-08
(Reset Restart), COM-96 (PowerOn Resume), or CON-71 (SpeedSearch) are configured in Easy
Start On, the inverter may start operating as soon as it is powered on.
The config mode parameters are used to configure keypad related features.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
LCD
LCD
2 brightness/contrast - -
Contrast
adjustment
Inverter S/W
10 Inv S/W Ver x.xx -
version
Keypad S/W Keypad
11 x.xx - -
version S/W Ver
KPD Title
12 Keypad title version x.xx - -
CNF* Ver
Option-x
30–32 Power slot type None - -
Type
Erase All
44 Erase trip history No - -
Trip
60 Add title update Add Title Up No - -
Initialize
WH Count
62 accumulated No - -
Reset
electric energy
253
Learning Advanced Features
Code Description
CNF-2 LCD Contrast Adjusts LCD brightness/contrast on the keypad.
CNF-10 Inv S/W Ver,
Checks the OS version in the inverter and on the keypad.
CNF-11 Keypad S/W Ver
CNF-12 KPD Title Ver Checks the title version on the keypad.
254
Learning Advanced Features
Code Description
A list of Macro settings is displayed for user selection. When a Macro
function is selected, all the related parameters are automatically changed
based on the inverter’s Macro settings.
CNF-43 Macro
If ‘0 (Basic)’ is selected, all the inverter parameters, including the
Select
parameters controlled by the Macro function, are initialized.
For other macro application settings (settings 1–7), refer to 5.42 Macro
Selection on page 254.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Px terminal Px Define
IN 65–71 35 Timer In 0-55 -
configuration (Px: P1–P7)
Multi-function
31 Relay 1
relay 1
22 Timer Out 0-41 -
Multi-function
OUT 33 Q1 Define
output 1
55 Timer on delay TimerOn Delay 3.00 0.00–100.00 sec
56 Timer off delay TimerOff Delay 1.00 0.00–100.00 sec
Code Description
Choose one of the multi-function input terminals and change it to a
IN-65–71 Px Define
timer terminal by setting it to ‘35(Timer In)’.
OUT-31 Relay 1, Set the multi-function output terminal or relay to be used as a timer
OUT-36 Q1 Define to ’22 (Timer out)’.
OUT-55 Input a signal (On) to the timer terminal to operate a timer output
TimerOn Delay, (Timer out) after the time set at OUT-55 has passed. When the multi-
OUT-56 function input terminal is off, the multi-function output or relay turns off
TimerOff Delay after the time set at OUT-56.
255
Learning Advanced Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
0 None
1 Single Ctrl
41 Serve Drv
AP1
Bypass Regul 0 No
41 0: No -
selection Bypass 1 Yes
Number of 1–
42 Num of Aux 5 -
auxiliary motors AuxMaxMotor2
1
AP1-47~87 and AP1-91~98 are not displayed when AP1-40 is set to ’4(Serve Drv)’.
2
If Extension IO option is equipped or AP1-40 is set to ‘2 or 3’, AuxMaxMotor is set to ‘8’.
Otherwise AuxMaxMotor is set to ‘5’.
3
If AP1-49 is set to ‘2(Op Time Order)’, the parameter cannot be set by a user and it is
256
Learning Advanced Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
starting motor
selection
Number of
Aux Motor
44 operating - - -
Run
auxiliary motors
Auxiliary motor Aux Priority
45 - - -
(#1– 4) priority 1
Auxiliary motor Aux Priority
46 - - -
(#5– 8) priority 2
Auxiliary motor 0 No
48 operation at Aux All Stop 0: No -
stop 1 Yes
0 FILO
Stop order for 1 FIFO
49 FIFO/FILO 0: FILO -
auxiliary motors
Op Time
2
Order
Auxiliary motor
Actual Start
50 pressure 2 0–100 Unit
Diff
difference
Main motor
acceleration
Aux Acc
51 time when 2 0–600.0 Sec
Time
auxiliary motor
# is reduced
Main motor
deceleration
Aux Dec
52 time when 2 0–600.0 Sec
Time
auxiliary motor
is added
Auxiliary motor Aux Start
53 5 0.0–999.9 Sec
start delay time DT
Auxiliary motor Aux Stop
54 5 0.0–999.9 Sec
stop delay time DT
55 Auto change Auto Ch 0: None 0 None -
257
Learning Advanced Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
mode selection Mode AUX
1
Exchange
MAIN
2
Exchange
Auto change Auto Ch
56 72: 00 00: 00–99: 00 Min
time Time
Auto change Auto Ch Low Freq–High
57 20.00 Hz
frequency Level Freq
Auto change Auto Op
58 - - -
operation time Time
Auxiliary motor
Aux Stop
59 pressure 2 0~100 Unit
Diff
difference
Target
frequency of
Follower Low Freq~ High
60 Aux Motor while 60.00 Hz
Freq Freq
Multi Master is
operating
#1 auxiliary
Low Freq–High
61 motor start Start Freq 1 45 Hz
Freq
frequency
#2 auxiliary
Low Freq–High
62 motor start Start Freq 2 45 Hz
Freq
frequency
#3 auxiliary
Low Freq–High
63 motor start Start Freq 3 45 Hz
Freq
frequency
#4 auxiliary
Low Freq–High
64 motor start Start Freq 4 45 Hz
Freq
frequency
#5 auxiliary
Low Freq–High
65 motor start Start Freq 5 45 Hz
Freq
frequency
4
AP1-66~68 , AP1-75~77 and AP1-85~87 are displayed when Extension IO option is
equipped or AP1-40 is set to ‘2 or 3’.
258
Learning Advanced Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
motor start Freq
frequency
#7 auxiliary
Low Freq–High
67 motor start Start Freq 7 45 Hz
Freq
frequency
#8 auxiliary
Low Freq–High
68 motor start Start Freq 8 45 Hz
Freq
frequency
#1 auxiliary
Low Freq–High
70 motor stop Stop Freq 1 20 Hz
Freq
frequency
#2 auxiliary
Low Freq–High
71 motor stop Stop Freq 2 20 Hz
Freq
frequency
#3 auxiliary
Low Freq–High
72 motor stop Stop Freq 3 20 Hz
Freq
frequency
#4 auxiliary
Low Freq–High
73 motor stop Stop Freq 4 20 Hz
Freq
frequency
#5 auxiliary
Low Freq–High
74 motor stop Stop Freq 5 20 Hz
Freq
frequency
#6 auxiliary
Low Freq–High
75 motor stop Stop Freq 6 20 Hz
Freq
frequency
#7 auxiliary
Low Freq–High
76 motor stop Stop Freq 7 20 Hz
Freq
frequency
#8 auxiliary
Low Freq–High
77 motor stop Stop Freq 8 20 Hz
Freq
frequency
#1 auxiliary
Aux1 Ref
80 motor reference 0 0–Unit Band Unit
Comp
compensation
#2 auxiliary
Aux2 Ref
81 motor reference 0 0–Unit Band Unit
Comp
compensation
259
Learning Advanced Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
#3 auxiliary
Aux3 Ref
82 motor reference 0 0–Unit Band Unit
Comp
compensation
#4 auxiliary
Aux4 Ref
83 motor reference 0 0–Unit Band Unit
Comp
compensation
#5 auxiliary
Aux5 Ref
84 motor reference 0 0–Unit Band Unit
Comp
compensation
#6 auxiliary
Aux6 Ref
85 motor reference 0 0–Unit Band Unit
Comp
compensation
#7 auxiliary
Aux7 Ref
86 motor reference 0 0–Unit Band Unit
Comp
compensation
#8 auxiliary
Aux8 Ref
87 motor reference 0 0–Unit Band Unit
Comp
compensation
Interlock 0 No
90 Interlock 0: No -
selection 1 Yes
Delay time
before an
operation for the
next motor
91 when an Interlock DT 5.0 0–360.0 Sec
interlock or an
auto change on
the main motor
occur.
0 Aux 1
Selecting
auxiliary motor 1 Aux 2
5 AuxRunTim
95 to indicate in 2 Aux 3
e Sel
[AP1-96] [AP1-
97]. 3 Aux 4
4 Aux 5
5
AP1-95~98 are available when MMC and Master Follower functions are performed.
260
Learning Advanced Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
56 Aux 6
6 Aux 7
7 Aux 8
Operating
time(Day) of
AuxRunTim
96 auxiliary motor 0 0~65535
e Day
chosen in [AP1-
95].
Operating time
of auxiliary AuxRunTim
97 00:00 00:00 ~ 23:59
motor chosen in e Min
[AP1-95].
0 None
1 All
2 Aux 1
3 Aux 2
Deleting
operating time AuxRunTim 4 Aux 3
98
of auxiliary e Clr
motor. 5 Aux 4
6 Aux 5
7 Aux 6
8 Aux 7
9 Aux 8
6
‘5(Aux6)~7(Aux8)’ of AP1-95 and ‘7(Aux6)~9(Aux8)’ of AP1-98 and displayed when
Extension IO option is equipped or AP1-40 is set to ‘2 or 3’.
261
Learning Advanced Features
Code Description
Selects the MMC operation settings.
-None : Deactivates MMC function
-Single Ctrl : Activates general MMC function
AP1-40 MMC Sel -Multi Follower : Activates Master Follower as Multi Follower
mode
-Multi Master: Activates Master Follower as Multi Master mode
-Serve Drv: Sets Serve Drv used at Master Follower.
AP1-42 Num of Aux Decides the number of auxiliary motors to use.
AP1-43 Starting Aux Sets the start auxiliary motor.
AP1-44 Aux Motor Run Indicates the number of the operating auxiliary motors.
Indicates the operating priority of auxiliary motors.
According to setting by users, it can be influenced by Interlock,
AutoChange and operating time
Each four-digit numbers for the parameter mean the auxiliary
motor numbers and indicate the priority of auxiliary motors. In
other words, the most right number of [AP1-45 Aux Priority1]
indicates the priority of Auxiliary motor 1 and the second
AP1-45–46 Aux Priority1–2 number from the right of [AP1-45 Aux Priority1] indicates the
priority of Auxiliary motor 2.
[AP1-45 Aux Priority1] [AP1-46 Aux Priority2]
x x x x x x x x
When [AP1-48 Aux All Stop] is set to “No” during input to stop
operating, auxiliary motors are turned off at the same time.
AP1-48 Aux All Stop
When [AP1-48 Aux All Stop] is set to “YES”, auxiliary motors are
turned off gradually based on time of [AP1-54 Aux Stop DT].
Sets the operating priority of MMC.
FIFO : Same as On/Off order of auxiliary motors.
AP1-49 FIFO/FILO FILO: Opposite to On/Off order auxiliary motors.
Op Time Order : setting automatically according to operating
time of auxiliary motors.
One of the conditions to turn on and off the next auxiliary motors.
AP1-50 Aux Start Diff
Parameters to set the difference when the difference between
AP1-59 Aux Stop Diff
the reference and feedback is more than regular value
262
Learning Advanced Features
During a PID operation, the auxiliary motors are turned on when the inverter frequency
reaches the start frequencies set at AP1-61–65 (Start freq), and the difference between the
PID reference and feedback is bigger than the value set at AP1-50. Then, the auxiliary
motors stop operating when the operation frequency reach the stop frequency set at AP1-
70–74 (Stop Freq 1–5) and the difference between the PID feedback and reference
becomes greater than the value set at AP1-50.
263
Learning Advanced Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
#1–5 auxiliary
61– Start Freq 1– Frequency value Low Freq–
motor start Hz
65 5 within the range High Freq
frequency
Auxiliary
motors Percentage value
AP1 50 Actual Pr Diff 0–100 (%) %
pressure within the range
difference
#1–5 auxiliary
70– Stop Freq 1– Frequency value Low Freq–
motor stop Hz
74 5 within the range High Freq
frequency
264
Learning Advanced Features
The following diagram describes the MMC basic sequence based on FILO and FIFO
settings.
Frequency
AP1-64
AP1-71 AP1-71
AP1-70 AP1-70
Time
On
Aux Motor 1
Off
Aux Motor 2
Aux Motor 3
Aux Motor 4
Aux Motor 5
AP1-50
PID Feedback
265
Learning Advanced Features
Frequency
Output
AP1-65 frequency AP1-65
AP1-64 AP1-64
AP1-63
AP1-63 AP1-74 AP1-74
AP1-62
AP1-62 AP1-73 AP1-73
AP1-71 AP1-71
AP1-70 AP1-70
On
Aux Motor 1
Off
Aux Motor 2
Aux Motor 3
Aux Motor 4
Aux Motor 5
AP1-59
PID Reference
AP1-50
PID Feedback
266
Learning Advanced Features
AP1-65
AP1-64
AP1-63
AP1-63
AP1-62
AP1-62
AP1-61 AP1-72
AP1-61 AP1-72
AP1-71
AP1-71
AP1-71
AP1-70
5min
10min Supposing its operating in
less than 1 minute
30min Operation time
M1(30min) / M2(25min) /
M3(20min)
Aux Motor 1
Aux Motor 2
Aux Motor 3
Aux Motor 4
Aux Motor 5
100%
Feedback
0%
The following diagram is an operation graph based on the start and stop delay times set at AP1-
53 (Aux start DT) and AP1-54 (Aux stop DT). When the start or stop frequencies are reached,
the auxiliary motor waits for the time set at AP1-53 (Aux start DT) or AP1-54 (Aux stop DT)
before it starts or stops.
267
Learning Advanced Features
Standby auxiliary motor becomes operable when there is Interlock or Auto change in Operable
auxiliary motor.
268
Learning Advanced Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
0 None 0 None
AUX
Auto change 1 Aux motor 1
55 Auto Ch Mode Exchange -
mode selection
Main
2 Main motor 2
Exchange
AP1 Time value within
56 Auto change time Auto Ch Mode 00: 00–99: 00 Sec.
the range
Auto change Frequency value Low Freq–
57 Auto Ch Level Hz
frequency within the range High Freq
Auto change Time value within
58 Auto Op Time - Sec.
operation time the range
Code Description
Select the motors to apply the auto change function.
Setting Description
0 None
AP1-55 Auto Ch Mode
1 Aux Exchange
2 Main Exchange
269
Learning Advanced Features
Code Description
Indicates time to activate Auto Change. In case that other conditions
for Auto Change are not met in spite of meeting the condition of
AP1-58 Auto Op Time AP1-56, the value of time in AP1-58 might be bigger than the value
set at Auto Ch Time of AP1-56 because of the failure of Auto
Change.
When AP1-55 (Auto Ch Mode) is set to ‘0 (None),’ the auxiliary motors operates based on
the order (sequence) set at AP1-43 (Starting Aux). Auto Change functionality is disabled.
When AP1-55 (Auto Ch Mode) is set to ‘1 (Aux Exchange)’, the auxiliary motors operate
based on the order (sequence) set at AP1-43 (Starting Aux). Auto Change is activated
when auxiliary motors are in the operating state over time of AP1-56 and then every
auxiliary motor is stopped.
NOTE
Auto change does not work while the auxiliary motors are operating. Auto change is operated
only when all the auxiliary motors are stopped and if all the conditions set for the auto change
are met. When the inverter stops, all motors stop operating, and the auxiliary motor with the
highest priority becomes the starting auxiliary motor. If the inverter power is turned off then
turned back on, the auxiliary motor set at AP1-43 (Starting Aux) becomes the starting auxiliary
motor.
Start order and stop order of the auxiliary motors are based on the order set at AP1-49
(FIFO/FILO).
The following diagrams depict the auxiliary motor start and stop sequence, based on a FIFO
configuration, when the inverter operation time exceeds the auto change interval set at AP1-58.
If all the auxiliary motors are turned off and the inverter operation frequency is below the
frequency set at AP1-58 (Auto Op Time), auto change is operated. Then, when the inverter
frequency increases due to decrease in the feedback, auxiliary motor #2 starts instead of
auxiliary motor #1 due to this auto change (auxiliary motor #1 starts last, for it has the lowest
priority).
270
Learning Advanced Features
Later on during the operation, when the feedback increases and the auxiliary motors begin to
stop, the FILO setting is applied to control the order for the auxiliary motors to stop.
Once the auto change is operated, the auxiliary motor that started first is given the lowest
priority and all the other auxiliary motors’ priority level increases by 1. Then, general MMC
operation continues.
On
Fx
Off Option 2: All auxiliary motors are off.
Aux Motor 1
Aux Motor 2
Aux Motor 3
Aux Motor 4
Aux Motor 5
100%
Feedback
0%
AP1-64
AP1-63 AP1-74
AP1-62
AP1-61
AP1-57
On
Fx
Off
Aux Motor 1
Aux Motor 2
Aux Motor 3
Aux Motor 4
Aux Motor 5
100%
Feedback
0%
271
Learning Advanced Features
AP1-71 AP1-71
AP1-70
AP1-70
5min
10min Supposing its operation in
less than 1 minute
30min Operation time
M1(30min) / M2(25min) /
On M3(20min)
Fx Off
Aux Motor 1
Aux Motor 2
Aux Motor 3
Aux Motor 4
Aux Motor 5
100%
Feedback
0%
Motor to operate MMC : M1, M2, M3 Motor to operate MMC : M3, M4, M5
Standby motor : M4, M5 Standby motor : M1, M2
Aux Auto Change operation (Op Time Order) when operable motor and standby motor are set to 3 and 2 each
When AP1-55 (Auto Ch Mode) is set to ‘2 (Main Exchange),’ the system uses all the motors
(main and auxiliary motors) regardless of the types. The auxiliary motor with the highest
priority is operated first and used as the main motor. Then, when the auto change
conditions are met, this motor is stopped and the motor priorities are re-arranged. This way,
the system always operates the motor with the highest priority and uses it as the main
motor of the MMC operation. In this case, before auto change is operated for the main
motor, the interlock delay time set at AP1-91 (Interlock DT) is applied.
272
Learning Advanced Features
NOTE
Auto change does not work while the auxiliary motors are operating. Auto change is operated
only when all the auxiliary motors are stopped and if all the conditions set for the auto change are
met. When the inverter stops, all motors stop operating, and the auxiliary motor with the highest
priority becomes the starting auxiliary motor. If the inverter power is turned off then turned back
on, the auxiliary motor set at AP1-43 (Starting Aux) becomes the starting auxiliary motor.
The following diagrams depict the auto change operation when AP1-55 (Auto Ch Mode) is set to
‘2 (Main),’ when the inverter operation time exceeds the auto change interval set at AP1-58. If the
inverter operation frequency is below the frequency set at AP1-57, all the auxiliary motors
including the start auxiliary motor are turned off. After the delay time set at AP1-91 (Interlock DT)
elapses, the ‘Main’ auto change is operated. After the ‘Main’ auto change, the auxiliary motor that
was turned on after the starting auxiliary motor becomes the main motor.
In the following diagrams, because auxiliary motor #1 is the starting auxiliary motor. Auxiliary
motor #2 becomes the main motor after the auto change. The auxiliary motor on/off operation is
identical to that of Aux Exchange, and the ‘off’ conditions differ based on the FIFO/FILO
configuration.
273
Learning Advanced Features
Freqency
Max Freq Output
frequency
Main_Exch occurs
AP1-70 AP1-70
On
Fx Off
Run Option 3: AP1-91: [Interlock DT]
Inv State Stop
Main Motor
AP1-70
AP1-70
On
Fx Off
Run
Option 3: AP1-91: [Interlock DT]
Inv State
Stop
Main Motor
274
Learning Advanced Features
Max Freq
AP1-65
AP1-65 Perform Main_Exch
Reset the [Auto Op Time]
AP1-64
AP1-63
AP1-63 AP1-
74
AP1-62
AP1-62
AP1-72
AP1-72
AP1-61 AP1-72
AP1-71 AP1-71
5min
Supposing its operation in
10min less than 1minute
30min
Operation time
M1(30min) / M2(25min) /
M3(20min)
On
Fx Off
Run
Aux Motor 2
Aux Motor 3
Aux Motor 5
100%
Feedback
0%
Motor to operate MMC : M1, M2, M3 Motor to operate MMC : M3, M4, M5
Standby motor : M4, M5 Standby motor : M1, M2
Main Auto Change operation (Op Time Order) when Operable Motor and Standby Motor are set to 3 and 2 each
5.44.4 Interlock
When there is motor trouble, the interlock feature is used to stop the affected motor and
replace it with another that is not currently operating (off state). To activate the interlock
feature, connect the cables for abnormal motor signal to the inverter input terminal and
configure the terminals as interlock 1–5 inputs. Then, the inverter decides the motor’s
availability based on the signal inputs. The order in which the alternative motor is selected is
decided based on the auto change mode selection options set at AP1-55.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
0 NO
AP1 90 Interlock selection Interlock 1 -
1 YES
After configuring the IN-65–71 multi-purpose input terminals as Interlock input 1–5, if an
interlock signal is received from an auxiliary motor, the output contacts are turned off for the
motor and the motor is excluded from the MMC operation. This causes the priority level of
the auxiliary motors with lower priority level than the interlocked motor to be increased by 1.
275
Learning Advanced Features
The interlock is released when the input terminals (IN-65–71) are turned off, and the
relevant auxiliary motor is included in the MMC operation again, with lowest priority.
When the inverter stops, all motors stop operating, and the auxiliary motor with the highest
priority becomes the starting auxiliary motor.
When the multi-purpose input terminals (IN-65–71, P1–7 Define) are set for the interlock
feature, an interlock is ‘Off’ when the contacts are valid, and ‘On’ when they are invalid.
Code Description
AP1-90 InterLock Enables or disables the Interlock.
AP1-91 Interlock DT Sets the delay time before the Interlock occurs.
Note
IN-65–71 PxDefine: Select the terminal from the input terminal function group (IN-65–71) and
set Interlock 1-5 respectively with the correct motor order. When auto change mode selection
(AP1–55) is set to ‘0 (None)’ or ‘1 (Aux)’, and if 5 motors are operated, including the main motor,
the interlock numbers 1,2,3,4,5 refer to the motors connected to Relay 1,2,3,4,5 (If interlock
numbers 1,2,3,4,5 are connected to Relay 1,2,3,4,5 at the inverter output terminal).
However, if auto change mode selection (AP1-55) is set to ‘2 (Main)’, and the main and auxiliary
motors are connected to the inverter output terminal Relay 1,2,3,4, Interlock 1,2,3,4 are the
monitors connected to Relay 1,2,3,4.
276
Learning Advanced Features
The figure below shows the motor operating as a sequence by FILO. The motor turns on
from the starting auxiliary motor (Starting Aux) by order, and turns off depending on the rise
of PID feedback. At this point, the interlock occurs at auxiliary motor #2 by multi-function
input, the auxiliary motor turns off. The output frequency falls to the frequency set at AP1-
71, and rises again. Then, the interlock occurs at auxiliary motor #1. The auxiliary motor
stops and falls to the frequency set at AP1-71, and then rises again. Interlock #2 should be
released first, then release interlock #1 to let the auxiliary motor operate (When interlocks
are released, they will have the lowest priority of the operating motors). If the auxiliary motor
turns off by a rise of Feedback, the auxiliary motors turns off in order from 1 to 5, because
auxiliary motor #1 turned on last. The interlocked auxiliary motor will have the lowest priority.
277
Learning Advanced Features
Frequency
Max Freq
AP1-65
AP1-65
AP1-64
AP1-64
AP1-63
AP1-74
AP1-62
AP1-62 AP1-73
AP1-61 AP1-72
AP1-71 AP1-71
AP1-70
On
Fx Off
Aux Motor 1
Aux Motor 2
Aux Motor 3
Aux Motor 4
Aux Motor 5
Interlock 1
Interlock 3
100%
Feedback
0%
Interlock operation(Op time Order) when Operable Motor and Standby Motor are set to 3 and 2 each
When interlock is released, the auxiliary motor’s priority becomes different. When Interlock
occurs at auxiliary motor #3, the priority is number 1>3>4>5>2. When it occurs at auxiliary
motor #1, the priority is number 3>4>5>2>1. The figure below shows the order of the
auxiliary motors activating depending on the priority (of Interlock occurring and releasing). In
the figure, the order is the same for FILO/FIFO, because the auxiliary motor turns on.
M a x
F re q
AP1-74
AP1-62 AP1-73
AP1-61 AP1-72
AP1-71
AP1-70
On
O f f
Aux Motor 1
Aux Motor 2
Aux Motor 3
Aux Motor 4
Aux Motor 5
F eedba ck
In terlock 1
In terlock 2
In case that Operable Motor and Standby Motor are set to 3 and 2 each, it operates in the
order of “Aux Motor 2 Aux Motor 4 Aux Motor 5”.
278
Learning Advanced Features
Aux Priority 1 Aux Priority 2 Aux Priority 3 Aux Priority 4 Aux Priority 5
Sequences (Operating (Operating (Operating (Operating (Operating
time: min) time: min) time: min) time: min) time: min)
Aux Motor3 Aux Motor2 Aux Motor1 Aux Motor4 Aux Motor 5
1 (00:30) (00:40) (00:50) (01:30) (01:50)
<Operating> <Operating> <Operating> <Stopping> <Stopping>
Set <6: Aux5> of [AP1-98 AuxRunTime Clr]
Aux Motor3 Aux Motor2 Aux Motor1 Aux Motor 5 Aux Motor 4
2 (00:30) (00:40) (00:50) (0) (01:30)
<Operating> <Operating> <Operating> <Stopping> <Stopping>
Set time of Aux5 to 2:00 through [AP1-97 AuxRunTime Min]
Aux Motor3 Aux Motor2 Aux Motor1 Aux Motor4 Aux Motor 5
3 (00:30) (00:40) (00:50) (01:30) (02:00)
<Operating> <Operating> <Operating> <Stopping> <Stopping>
279
Learning Advanced Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
0 No
41 Bypass selection Regul Bypass 1 -
1 Yes
#1–5 auxiliary Freq Low
61– Start Freq Frequency value
AP1 motor start Limit–Freq Hz
65 1–5 within the range
frequency High limit
#1–5 auxiliary
70– Stop Freq Frequency value Low Freq–
motor stop Hz
74 1–5 within the range High Freq
frequency
31– Multi-function Multiple motor
Relay 1–5 21 - -
35 relay1–5 control(MMC)
OUT
Multi-function 1 KEB
36 Q1 Define 40 - -
item Operation
Code Description
Sets the regular bypass mode.
Mode Setting
AP1-41 Regular Bypass
0 No
1 Yes
AP1-61–65 Start Freq 1–5 Sets the auxiliary motor start frequency.
AP1-70–74 Stop Freq 1–5 Sets the auxiliary motor stop frequency.
Set OUT31–35 to ’21 (MMC)’ to use the out terminal for auxiliary
OUT-31–35 Relay 1–5
motor operation. The number of configured output terminals
OUT-36 Q1 Define
determines the total number of auxiliary motors to be used.
When an input set by the PID feedback of the analog input terminal (I or V1 or Pulse) is
100%, divide the area by the number of motors being used (including the main motor).
Each auxiliary motor turns on when feedback reaches the relevant level and turns off when
feedback goes below the relevant level. The primary motor increases its speed based on
the feedback and when it reaches the start frequency of the relevant auxiliary motor and
decelerates to the stop frequency.
The primary motor reaccelerates when the frequency increases, depending on the
280
Learning Advanced Features
feedback increase. If the relevant auxiliary motor is turned off because of the feedback
decrease, the primary motor accelerates from the stop frequency to the start frequency.
To use the regular bypass function, ‘1 (Yes)’ has to be selected in the MMC and PID
functions. Only FILO operates between the AP1-49 (FIFO/FILO) in a regular bypass
function.
Out Freq
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
On
Aux Motor 1 Off
Aux Motor 2
Aux Motor 3
Aux Motor 4
Aux Motor 5
Regular ByPass
281
Learning Advanced Features
increases and the pressure of the pipe line decreases. Aux motor PID compensation
compensates for this pressure when the number of the auxiliary motor increases. By adding
the additional PID reference value (relevant to the auxiliary motor) to the current reference,
the loss of pressure can be compensated for.
Code Description
Set the relevant PID reference compensation rate whenever the auxiliary
AP1-80–84
motor is turned on. The PID reference can be set over 100%, but when it
Aux 1–5 Ref
exceeds 100%, the maximum value of the PID reference is limited to 100%.
Comp
Unit band value is the value between unit 100%–0%.
NOTE
When the aux reference value is set to 100%, the final PID reference becomes 100%. In this
case, output frequency of the inverter does not decelerate because the PID output does not
decelerate even if the input feedback value is 100%.
282
Learning Advanced Features
It is used to control multiple inverters with an inverter. When [AP1-40 MMC Sel] is set to <2 :
Multi Follower> or <3 : Multi Master>, it is called as {Leader Drive}. The rest inverters set to
<4 : Serve Drv> are called as {Serve Drive}.
Leader Drive
It is an inverter to execute PID control with PID Feedback from sensor, control Multi Motor
and function as Master of communication.
In addition, if it is set to Leader Drive, Drive turned on at first performs functions of Soft
Fill(Pre-PID), Sleep/WakeUp and Aux Motor PID Compensation).
Serve Drive
※In case that every motor is stopped, the motor with the highest priority is called as Main
Motor. This is, Main Motor and Aux Motor are changed according to the situation and
Leader Drive and Serve Drive are fixed.
The picture below represents foundational composition.
Leader Drive Serve Drive Serve Drive Serve Drive Serve Drive Inverter
ID 1 ID 2 ID 3 ID 4 ID 8 Setting
Communication
Line
Sensor
M1 M2 M3 M4 M8
283
Learning Advanced Features
Only Main Motor can be controlled by PID and Aux Motor performs the operating mode with
Follower Freq.
The picture below shows that the priority is “Motor1 (M1)Motor2 (M2)Motor3 (M3)”.
(The priority can be changed automatically according to operating time)
Out Freq
St art Freq 3
St op Freq 3
St art Freq 2
PI D Output
St op Freq 2
St art Freq 1
Run Cmd
FeedBack PI D Reference
Follower Freq
M1 Cmd Freq Main Motor Aux Motor Main Motor
PID Ctrl PID Ctrl
Follower Freq
M2 Cmd Freq Aux Motor Main Motor Aux Motor Main Motor Aux Motor
PID Ctrl PID Ctrl
.
PID Ctrl
It is a mode to control motors turned on with the same PID output frequency.
The picture below shows that the priority is “Motor1 (M1)Motor2 (M2)Motor3 (M3)”.
(The priority can be changed automatically according to operating time).
Out Freq
Start Freq 2
M3 Stop Freq 2
PID Output
Start Freq 1
M2 M1
M1 OutFreq
M2 OutFreq M3 OutFreq
t
Run Cmd
Main
M2 Cmd Freq Aux Motor Main Motor Aux Motor Motor Aux Motor
PID Ctrl
Start Freq 3
St op Freq 3
St art Freq 2
Stop Freq 1
M1 OutFreq M2 OutFreq M3 OutFreq
Init ial Priority
M1 M2 M3 More t han 1min Less than 1min
t
Run Cmd
FeedBack PI D Reference
Follower Freq
M2 Cmd Freq Aux Motor Main Motor
PID Ctrl
Follower Freq
M3 Cmd Freq Main Motor Aux Motor
Aux Motor PID Ctrl
The picture below shows the operating time of M1 is the longest during Multi Follower
Mode.
Pr iority at the moment
M2 M3 M1
Out Freq
Pr iority at the moment
M2 M1 M3
PI D Limit High
High Freq
M2, M3, M1 M2, M3, M1
PI D Output
St art Freq 3 St op Freq 3
M2, M1
St art Freq 2
M2, M3, M1
St art Freq 1
St op Freq 1 M2, M3
Init ial Priority M1 OutFreq M2
M2 OutFreq M3 OutFreq M1 M3
M1 M2 M3
More t han 1min Less than 1min [Aux Stop DT] t
Run Cmd
FeedBack PI D Reference
Main Motor
M3 Cmd Freq Aux Motor Aux Motor
PID Ctrl
The conditions that Aux Motor is turned on and off are same as the description of Multi
Master Mode and Multi Follower Mode.
286
Learning Advanced Features
If Leader Drive is HAND State or OFF state, Master Follower system is not activated.
In case that Pipe Broken and Interlock Trip are caused in Leader Drive, every drive
operating is stopped and Master Follower keeps performing the function except Leader
Drive if there is another Trip.
(Leader Drive executes PID control and overall system control consistently.)
Leader Drive Serve Drive Serve Drive Serve Drive Serve Drive Inverter
ID 1 ID 2 ID 3 ID 4 ID 8 Setting
Interlock1 Communication
Interlock2 Interlock3 Interlock4 Interlock8
Line
Sensor
M1 M2 M3 M4 M8
The picture below shows the function in case that M3 becomes HAND/OFF State or
interlock and Trip are caused.(supposing that the priority is not changed),(interlock is the
function corresponding to B terminal(Normal close)).
287
Learning Advanced Features
PID Limit High M1, M2 M1, M2, M3 M1, M2 M1, M2, M3 M1, M2
Follower Freq
M3 M2 M1
Start Freq 3
M3 Stop Freq 3
M3
Start Freq 2
PID Output
Stop Freq 2
Start Freq 1
Run Cmd
Follower Freq
M1 Cmd Freq Main Motor Aux Motor Main Motor
PID Ctrl PID Ctrl
Follower Freq
M2 Cmd Freq Aux Motor Main Motor Aux Motor Main Motor Aux Motor Main Motor Aux Motor
PID Ctrl PID Ctrl PID Ctrl
M3 Cmd Freq Main Motor Aux Motor Main Motor Aux Motor
Aux Motor
PID Ctrl PID Ctrl
M3
State
ChangeInterlock
or Trip
Parameter
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit
Setting
Output terminal on/off On/Off Ctrl
66 1 V1 0–8 -
control mode Src
Output terminal on Output terminal off
ADV 67 On-C Level 90.00 %
level level–100.00%
Output terminal off 0.00–Output terminal
68 Off-C Level 10.00 %
level on level
Multi-function relay 1
31 Relay 1
item
OUT 26 On/Off - -
Multi-function output 1
33 Q1 Define
item
288
Learning Advanced Features
Code Description
ADV-66 OnOff Ctrl Src Select analog input On/Off control.
ADV-67 On Ctrl Level ,
Set On/Off level at the output terminal.
ADV-68 Off Ctrl Level
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Select press
RegenAvd
74 regeneration 0 No 0–1 -
Sel
prevention for press
200 V class:
Press regeneration 350 V
RegenAvd 300–400 V
75 prevention operation V
Level 400 V class:
voltage level 700 V
600–800 V
ADV Press regeneration
prevention CompFreq 0.00–10.00
76 1.00 (Hz) Hz
compensation Limit Hz
frequency limit
Press regeneration RegenAvd
77 50.0 (%) 0 .0–100.0% %
prevention P-Gain Pgain
Press regeneration RegenAvd
78 500 (ms) 20–30000 ms ms
prevention I gain Igain
289
Learning Advanced Features
Code Description
Frequent regeneration voltage from a press load during a constant speed
ADV-74 motor operation may force excessive stress on the brake unit, which may
RegenAvd Sel damage or shorten brake life. To prevent this, select ADV-74 (RegenAvd
Sel) to control DC link voltage and disable the brake unit operation.
ADV-75 Set brake operation prevention level voltage when the DC link voltage
RegenAvd Level goes up due to regeneration.
ADV-76 Set an alternative frequency width that can replace actual operation
CompFreq Limit frequency during regeneration prevention.
ADV-77
RegenAvd Pgain To prevent regeneration zone, set P-Gain/I gain in the DC link voltage
ADV-78 suppress PI controller.
RegenAvd Igain
Note
Press regeneration prevention does not operate during accelerations or decelerations; it only
operates during constant speed motor operation. When regeneration prevention is activated,
output frequency may change within the range set at ADV-76 (CompFreq Limit).
An analog output terminal provides an output of 0–10 V voltage, 4–20 mA current, or 0–32
kHz pulse.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
01 Analog output1 AO1 Mode 0 Frequency 0–15 -
-1000.0–
02 Analog output1 gain AO1 Gain 100.0 %
1000.0
03 Analog output1 bias AO1 Bias 0.0 -100.0–100.0 %
OUT 04 Analog output1 filter AO1 Filter 5 0–10000 ms
Analog constant AO1
05 0.0 0.0–100.0 %
output1 Const %
Analog output1 AO1
06 0.0 0.0–1000.0 %
monitor Monitor
Code Description
OUT-01 AO1 Select a constant value for output. The following example for output voltage
291
Learning Advanced Features
Mode setting.
Setting Function
0 Frequency Outputs operation frequency as a standard. 10 V output is
made from the frequency set at DRV-20 (Max Freq).
1 Output 10 V output is made from 150% of inverter rated current.
Current
2 Output Sets the outputs based on the inverter output voltage. 10
Voltage V output is made from a set voltage in BAS-15 (Rated V).
If 0 V is set in BAS-15, 200 V/400 V models output
10 V based on the actual input voltages (240 V and 480 V
respectively).
3 DC Link Outputs inverter DC link voltage as a standard.
Volt Outputs 10 V when the DC link voltage is 410 V DC for
200 V models, and 820 V DC for 400 V models.
4 Output Monitors output wattage. 150% of rated output is the
Power maximum display voltage (10 V).
7 Target Outputs set frequency as a standard. Outputs 10 V at the
Freq maximum frequency (DRV-20).
8 Ramp Outputs frequency calculated with Acc/Dec function as a
Freq standard. May vary with actual output frequency. Outputs
10 V.
9 PID Ref Outputs command value of a PID controller as a standard.
Value Outputs approximately 6.6 V at 100%.
10 PID Fdk Outputs feedback volume of a PID controller as a
Value standard. Outputs approximately 6.6 V at 100%.
11 PID Outputs output value of a PID controller as a standard.
Output Outputs approximately 10 V at 100%.
12 Constant Outputs OUT-05 (AO1 Const %) value as a standard.
13 EPID1 Output is based on the output value of the external PID1
Output controller. Outputs 10 V in 100%.
14 EPID Ref Output is based on the reference value of the external
Val PID1 controller. Outputs 6.6 V in 100%.
15 EPID Fdb Output is based on the feedback amount of the external
Val PID1 controller. Outputs 6.6 V in 100%.
Adjusts output value and offset. If frequency is selected as an output item, it
will operate as shown below.
292
Learning Advanced Features
OUT-04 AO1
Set filter time constant on analog output.
Filter
OUT-05 A01 If the analog output at OUT-01 (AO1 Mode) is set to ’12 (Constant)’, the
Const % analog voltage output is dependent on the set parameter values (0–100%).
OUT-06 AO1 Monitors the analog output value. Displays the maximum output voltage as a
Monitor percentage (%) with 10 V as the standard.
293
Learning Advanced Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
61 Pulse output setting TO Mode 0 Frequency 0–15 -
-1000.0–
62 Pulse output gain TO Gain 100.0 -
1000.0
63 Pulse output bias TO Bias 1000.0 -100.0–100.0 -
OUT 64 Pulse output filter TO Filter 5 0–10000 -
Pulse output
65 TO Const % 0.0 0.0–100.0 %
constant output2
Pulse output
66 TO Monitor 0.0 0–1000.0 %
monitor
Code Description
Adjusts output value and offset. If frequency is selected as an output, it
will operate as shown below.
𝐹𝑟𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑦
𝑇𝑂 = × 𝑇𝑂 𝐺𝑎𝑖𝑛 + 𝑇𝑂 𝐵𝑖𝑎𝑠
𝑀𝑎𝑥𝐹𝑟𝑒𝑞
OUT-62 TO Gain, The following graph illustrates that the pulse output (TO) changes
OUT-63 TO Bias depend on OUT-62 (TO Gain) and OUT-63 (TO Bias) values. The Y-
axis is an analog output current (0–32 kHz), and X-axis is a % value of
the output item.
294
Learning Advanced Features
Code Description
NOTE
OUT-08 AO2 Gain and OUT-09 AO2 Bias Tuning Mode on 0–20 mA output
1 Set OUT-07 (AO2 Mode) to ‘constant’ and set OUT-11 (AO2 Const %) to 0.0 %.
2 Set OUT-09 (AO2 Bias) to 20.0% and then check the current output. 4 mA output
should be displayed.
• If the value is less than 4 mA, gradually increase OUT-09 (AO2 Bias) until 4 mA is
measured.
• If the value is more than 4 mA, gradually decrease OUT-09 (AO2 Bias) until 4 mA is
measured.
3 Set OUT-11 (AO2 Const %) to 100.0%.
4 Set OUT-08 (AO2 Gain) to 80.0% and measure the current output at 20 mA.
• If the value is less than 20 mA, gradually increase OUT-08 (AO2 Gain) until 20 mA
is measured.
• If the value is more than 20 mA, gradually decrease OUT-08 (AO2 Gain) until 20 mA
is measured.
The functions for each code are identical to the descriptions for the 0–10 V voltage outputs with
an output range 4–20 mA.
295
Learning Advanced Features
Code Description
Set relay (Relay 1–5) output options.
296
Learning Advanced Features
297
Learning Advanced Features
298
Learning Advanced Features
299
Learning Advanced Features
• FDT-1 and FDT-2 functions are related to the frequency setting of the inverter. If the
inverter enters standby mode by pressing the off key during auto mode operation, FDT-1
and FDT-2 function operation may be different because the set frequency of the inverter is
different compared to the set frequency of the auto mode.
• If monitoring signals such as ‘Under load’ or’ LDT’ are configured at multi-function output
terminals, signal outputs are maintained unless certain conditions defined for signal cutoff
are met.
5.48.2 Fault Trip Output using Multi-function Output Terminal and Relay
300
Learning Advanced Features
The inverter can output a fault trip state using the multi-function output terminal (Q1) and
relay (Relay 1).
Parameter
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit
Setting
30 Fault trip output mode Trip Out Mode 010 - bit
31 Multi-function relay 1 Relay 1 23 Trip - -
32 Multi-function relay 2 Relay 2 14 Run - -
33 Multi-function relay 3 Relay 3 0 none -
OUT 34 Multi-function relay 4 Relay 4 0 none -
35 Multi-function relay 5 Relay 5 0 none -
36 Multi-function output1 Q1 Define 0 none - -
53 Fault trip output on delay TripOut OnDly 0.00 0.00–100.00 sec
54 Fault trip output off delay TripOut OffDly 0.00 0.00–100.00 sec
Fault Trip Output by Multi-function Output Terminal and Relay - Setting Details
Code Description
Fault trip relay operates based on the fault trip output settings.
Item bit on bit off
Keypad
display
Select a fault trip output terminal/relay and select ‘29’ (Trip Mode) at codes
OUT-30 OUT- 31–33. When a fault trip occurs in the inverter, the relevant terminal and
Trip Out Mode relay will operate. Depending on the fault trip type, terminal and relay operation
can be configured as shown in the table below.
Setting Function
bit3 bit2 bit1
Operates when low voltage fault trips occur
Operates when fault trips other than low voltage occur
Operates when auto restart fails (PRT-08–09)
OUT-31–35
Set relay output (Relay 1–5).
Relay1–5
OUT-36 Select output for multi-function output terminal (Q1). Q1 is open collector TR
Q1 Define output.
301
Learning Advanced Features
Set on-delay and off-delay times separately to control the output terminal and relay
operation times. The delay time set at codes OUT-50–51 applies to multi-function output
terminal (Q1) and relay, except when the multi-function output function is in fault trip mode.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Multi-function output DO On
50 0.00 0.00–100.00 sec
On delay Delay
Multi-function output DO Off
OUT 51 0.00 0.00–100.00 sec
Off delay Delay
Select multi-function DO NC/NO
52 000000* 00–11 bit
output terminal Sel
*Multi-function output terminals are numbered. Starting from the right (number 1), the
number increases to the left.
The inverter’s operation condition can be monitored using the keypad. If the monitoring
option is selected in config (CNF) mode, a maximum of four items can be monitored
simultaneously. Monitoring mode displays three different items on the keypad, but only one
item can be displayed in the status window at a time.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Display item condition AnyTime
20 0 Frequency - -
display window Para
Monitor mode Monitor
21 0 Frequency - Hz
display 1 Line-1
Monitor mode Monitor Output
CNF 22 2 - A
display 2 Line-2 Current
Monitor mode Monitor Output
23 3 - V
display 3 Line-3 Voltage
Monitor mode Mon Mode
24 0 No - -
initialize Init
Code Description
Select items to display on the top-right side of the keypad screen. Choose
the parameter settings based on the information to be displayed. Codes
CNF-20–23 share the same setting options as listed below.
Setting Function
0 Frequency On stop, displays the set frequency. During
operation, displays the actual output frequency (Hz).
1 Speed On stop, displays the set speed (rpm). During
operation, displays the actual operating speed (rpm).
2 Output Displays output current.
Current
3 Output Displays output voltage.
CNF-20
Voltage
AnyTime Para
4 Output Power Displays output power.
5 WHour Displays inverter power consumption.
Counter
6 DCLink Displays DC link voltage within the inverter.
Voltage
7 DI Status Displays input terminal status of the terminal block.
Starting from the right, displays P1–P8.
8 DO Status Displays output terminal status of the terminal block.
Starting from the right: Relay1, Relay2, and Q1.
9 V1 Monitor[V] Displays the input voltage value at terminal V1 (V).
10 V1 Displays input voltage terminal V1 value as a
303
Learning Advanced Features
Code Description
Monitor[%] percentage. If -10 V, 0 V, +10 V is measured,
-100%, 0%, 100% will be displayed.
13 V2 Monitor[V] Displays input voltage terminal V2 value (V).
14 V2 Displays input voltage terminal V2 value as a
Monitor[%] percentage.
15 I2 Displays input current terminal I2 value (A).
Monitor[mA]
16 I2 Monitor[%] Displays input current terminal I2 value as a
percentage.
17 PID Output Displays the PID controller output.
18 PID Ref Value Displays the scale of the reference value and sets
the value of PID reference.
19 PID Fdb Displays the PID controller feedback volume.
Value
20 EPID1 Mode Displays the External PID1 mode.
21 EPID1 Output Displays the External PID1output value.
23 EPID1 Ref Displays the External PID1 reference value.
Val
Select the items to be displayed in monitor mode. Monitor mode is the first
CNF-21–23
mode displayed when the inverter is powered on. A total of three items, from
Monitor Line-x
monitor line-1 to monitor line- 3, can be displayed simultaneously.
CNF-24 Mon
Selecting ‘1 (Yes)’ initializes CNF-20–23.
Mode Init
Note
Inverter power consumption
Values are calculated using voltage and current. Electric power is calculated every second and the
results are accumulated. Setting CNF-62 (WH Count Reset) value to ‘1 (Yes)’ will reset cumulated
electric energy consumption. Power consumption is displayed as shown below:
• Less than 1,000 kW: Units are in kW, displayed in 999.9 kW format.
• 1–99 MW: Units are in MW, displayed in 99.99 MWh format.
• 100–999 MW: Units are in MW, displayed in 999.9 MWh format.
• More than 1,000 MW: Units are in MW, displayed in 9,999 MWh format and can be displayed
up to 65,535 MW. (Values exceeding 65,535 MW will reset the value to 0, and units will return
to kW. It will be displayed in 999.9 kW format).
304
Learning Advanced Features
Setting
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
Range
Cumulated inverter Day
70 On-time 00000DAY 00:00 -
power-on time hh:mm
Cumulated inverter Day
71 Run-time 00000DAY 00:00 -
operation time hh:mm
Inverter operation
72 accumulated time Time Reset 0 No 0–1 -
CNF
initialization
Cooling fan operation Day
74 Fan time 00000DAY 00:00 -
accumulated time hh:mm
Cooling fan operation
Fan Time
75 accumulated time 0 No 0–1 -
Reset
initialization
Code Description
Displays accumulated power supply time. Information is displayed in
CNF-70 On-time
[Day Hr: Min (00000DAY 00:00)] format.
Displays accumulated time of voltage output by operation command
CNF-71 Run-time input. Information is displayed in [Day Hr: Min (00000DAY 00:00 )]
format.
Setting ‘1 (Yes)’ will delete the power supply accumulated time (On-time)
CNF-72 Time Reset
and operation accumulated time (Run-time)
Displays accumulated time of the inverter cooling fan operation.
CNF-74 Fan time
Information will be displayed in [Day Hr: Min (00000DAY 00:00 )] format.
CNF-75 Setting ‘1 (Yes)’ will delete the cooling fan operation accumulated time
Fan Time Reset (Fan-time)
305
Learning Advanced Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Automatic restart of the PowerOn
COM 96 0 No 0–1 -
communication restart Resume
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Now
CNF 42 Multi key item Multi key sel 2 0–2 -
Time
The current date is [AP3-01 Now Date], the current time is [AP3-02 Now Time], and the
current day is the parameter value set in [AP3-03 Now Weekday].
When [CNF-42 Multi-Key Sel] is selected as {2: Now Time}, ( ) image is displayed on the
top of the keypad.
When you press the <MULTI> key on the keypad, the image ( ) is displayed on the top of
the keypad, and the monitor display mode is changed to the monitor value automatically as
follows:? (Keypad parameters of Monitor Line 1/2/3 of CNF group Is changed and only the
display on the monitoring screen is changed)
306
Learning Protection Features
When you press <MULTI> key on the keypad again, ( ) image is displayed on the top of
the keypad, and the monitoring display value is changed to the state that the user has
already set.
You can individually set {26: Now Date}, {27: Now Time} and {28: Now Weekday} in [CNF-
21/22/23 Monitor Line-1/2/3]
[CNF-20 Anytime Money] can not be set to {26: Now Date} or {28: Now Weekday}.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Electronic thermal
40 prevention fault trip ETH Trip Sel 0 None 0–2 -
selection
PRT
41 Motor cooling fan type Motor Cooling 0 Self-cool - -
Electronic thermal one
42 ETH 1 min 120 100–150 %
minute rating
307
Learning Protection Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Electronic thermal
43 prevention continuous ETH Cont 100 50–150 %
rating
Code Description
ETH can be selected to provide motor thermal protection. The LCD
screen displays”E-Thermal.”
Setting Function
PRT-40 ETH Trip
0 None The ETH function is not activated.
Sel
1 Free-Run The inverter output is blocked. The motor coasts to a
halt (free-run).
2 Dec The inverter decelerates the motor to a stop.
Select the drive mode of the cooling fan, attached to the motor.
Setting Function
0 Self-cool As the cooling fan is connected to the motor axis, the
cooling effect varies based on motor speed. Most
universal induction motors have this design.
1 Forced- Additional power is supplied to operate the cooling
cool fan. This provides extended operation at low speeds.
Motors designed for inverters typically have this
design.
PRT-41 Motor
Cooling
308
Learning Protection Features
Sets the amount of current with the ETH function activated. The range
below details the set values that can be used during continuous operation
without the protection function.
Parameter Setting
Group Code Name LCD Display Unit
Setting Range
Selecting the operation
after the detection of the Thermal-T
34 0 None 0–1 -
motor overheat detection Sel
sensor
Selecting the input of the
Thermal In
PRT 35 motor overheat detection 0 Thermal In 0–1
Src
sensor
Fault level of the motor Thermal-T
36 50.0 0.0–100.0 %
overheat detection sensor Lev
Fault area of the motor Thermal-T
37 0 Low 0–1
overheat detection sensor Area
07 Analog output 2 item AO2 Mode 14 Constant 0–18
OUT
08 Analog output 2 gain AO2 Gain 100 0–100 %
309
Learning Protection Features
Code Description
Sets the inverter operation state when motor is overheated.
Setting Function
0 None Do not operate when motor overheating is detected.
PRT-34
When the motor is overheated, the inverter output is
Thermal-T Sel 1 Free-Run
blocked and the motor will free-run by inertia.
When the motor is over heated, the motor
3 Dec
decelerates and stops.
Selects the type of the terminal when the motor overheat protect sensor
is connected to the volt (V1) or current (I2) input terminal of the terminal
block in the inverter.
PRT-35 Setting Function
Thermal In Src Configure the motor overheat protect sensor
0 Thermal In
connection to terminal block V1.
Configure the motor overheat protect sensor
1 V2
connection to terminal block I2.
PRT-36
Configure the fault level of the motor overheat detect sensor.
Thermal-T Lev
Setting Function
Operates when the motor overheat sensor input is
PRT-37 0 Low
smaller than PRT-36.
Thermal-T Area
Operates when the motor overheat sensor input is
1 High
bigger that PRT-36.
Used when supplying the constant current to the temperature sensor
OUT-07 AO2 Mode,
and receives input through the I2 or V1 terminal block by using the
OUT-08 AO2 Gain
analog output terminal.
Using the temperature sensor (PTC) by connecting it to the analog input terminal
When the AO2(analog current output) terminal is connected to the temperature sensor
installed on a motor, the inverter supplies constant current to the temperature sensor. Then,
310
Learning Protection Features
connecting the motor signal wire to one of the inverter’s analog input terminals allows the
inverter to detect the changes in the PTC resistance and translates it into voltage. If the I2
terminal is used to receive the signal, set the selection switch on the I/O board to V2. If the
V1 terminal is used, set the switch to T1. The sensor does not operate if SW3 is set to’ V1’.
To receive PTC signal at V1 input terminal, set PRT-35 (Thermal InSrc) to ‘0 (Thermal In)’
and set the Analog1 input selection switch (SW3) to T1.
To receive PTC signal at I2 input terminal, set PRT-35 (Thermal InSrc) to ‘1 (V2)’ and set
SW 4 (Analog2 input selection switch) to V2. The sensor does not operate if SW4 is set to
‘I2’.When the inverter detects a motor overheat, motor overheat trip occurs with internal
delay time. The trip delay time is not reset instantly when the trip condition is released, but it
only decreases as time passes.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Overload warning OL Warn
17 1 Yes 0–1 -
selection Select
Overload warning
18 OL Warn Level 110 30–120 %
level
Overload warning
PRT 19 OL Warn Time 10.0 0–30 sec
time
Motion at overload
20 OL Trip Select 1 Free-Run - -
trip
21 Overload trip level OL Trip Level 120 30–150 %
22 Overload trip time OL Trip Time 60.0 0–60.0 sec
311
Learning Protection Features
312
Learning Protection Features
Note
Overload warnings warn of an overload before an overload fault trip occurs. The overload
warning signal may not work in an overload fault trip situation, if the overload warning level (OL
Warn Level) and the overload warning time (OL Warn Time) are set higher than the overload
trip level (OL Trip Level) and the overload trip time (OL Trip Time).
313
Learning Protection Features
In this case, the motor decelerates with optimum deceleration without a braking resistor by
using flux braking. If the deceleration time is too short, an over voltage fault trip may occur
because of regenerative energy from the motor. The flux braking makes the motor use
regenerate energy, therefore optimum deceleration is available without over voltage fault
trip.
To protect the motor from overload faults, the inverter output frequency is adjusted
automatically, based on the size of load.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Stall prevention
50 Stall Prevent 0100 - bit
and flux braking
Start Freq–
51 Stall frequency 1 Stall Freq 1 60.00 Hz
Stall Freq 1
52 Stall level 1 Stall Level 1 130 30–150 %
Stall Freq 1–
53 Stall frequency 2 Stall Freq 2 60.00 Hz
Stall Freq 3
54 Stall level 2 Stall Level 2 130 30–150 %
Stall Freq 2–
PRT 55 Stall frequency 3 Stall Freq 3 60.00 Hz
Stall Freq 4
56 Stall level 3 Stall Level 3 130 30–150 %
Stall Freq 3–
57 Stall frequency 4 Stall Freq 4 60.00 Hz
Max Freq
58 Stall level 4 Stall Level 4 130 30–150 %
0.75-
0–150
90kW
59 Flux Braking Gain Flux Brake kp 0 -
110-
0–10
500kW
31 Multi-function relay
Relay 1–5
–35 1–5 item
OUT 9 Stall - -
Multi-function
36 Q1 Define
output 1 item
314
Learning Protection Features
Code Description
Stall prevention can be configured for acceleration, deceleration, or while
operating a motor at constant speed.When the LCD segment is on, the
corresponding bit is off.
Item Bit Status (On) Bit Status (Off)
Keypad
display
Setting Function
Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1
Stall protection during acceleration
Stall protection while operating at a
constant speed
Stall protection during deceleration
Flux braking during deceleration
Setting Function
PRT-50 Stall 0001 Stall protection If inverter output current exceeds the preset
Prevent during stall level (PRT- 52, 54, 56, 58) during
acceleration acceleration, the motor stops accelerating and
starts decelerating. If current level stays above
the stall level, the motor decelerates to the
start frequency (DRV-19). If the current level
causes deceleration below the preset level
while operating the stall protection function, the
motor resumes acceleration.
0010 Stall protection Similar to stall protection function during
while operating acceleration, the output frequency
at constant automatically decelerates when the current
speed level exceeds the preset stall level while
operating at constant speed. When the load
current decelerates below the preset level, it
resumes acceleration.
0100 Stall protection The inverter decelerates and keeps the DC link
during voltage below a certain level to prevent an over
deceleration voltage fault trip during deceleration. As a
result, deceleration times can be longer than
the set time depending on the load.
1000 Flux braking When using flux braking, deceleration time
315
Learning Protection Features
PRT-51 Stall
Freq 1– PRT-58
Stall Leve l4
PRT-59 Flux A gain used to decelerate without over voltage fault trip. It compensates
Brake Kp for the inverter output voltage.
Stall Prevention Function and Flux Braking Setting Details
316
Learning Protection Features
Note
Stall protection and flux braking operate together only during deceleration. Turn on the third and
fourth bits of PRT-50 (Stall Prevention) to achieve the shortest and most stable deceleration
performance without triggering an over voltage fault trip for loads with high inertia and short
deceleration times. Do not use this function when frequent deceleration of the load is required,
as the motor can overheat and be easily damaged.
• Use caution when decelerating while using stall protection since the deceleration time can
take longer than the time set, depending on the load. Acceleration stops when stall
protection operates during acceleration. This may make the actual acceleration time longer
than the preset acceleration time.
• When the motor is operating, Stall Level 1 applies and determines the operation of stall
protection.
• If the input voltage exceeds the nominal voltage, there is a possibility that the deceleration
stall does not work properly.
317
Learning Protection Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Input/output open- Phase Loss
05 00 - bit
phase protection Chk
PRT
Open-phase input
06 IPO V Band 40 1–100 V V
voltage band
Code Description
When open-phase protection is operating, input and output configurations
are displayed differently. When the LCD segment is On, the corresponding
bit is set to ‘Off’.
318
Learning Protection Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
65– Px terminal setting Px Define External
4 0-55 -
71 options (Px: P1–P7) Trip
IN
Multi-function input DI NC/NO
87 - bit
contact selection Sel
Code Description
Selects the type of input contact. If the mark of the switch is at the bottom
(0), it operates as an A contact (Normally Open). If the mark is at the top
(1), it operates as a B contact (Normally Closed).
IN-87 DI NC/NO
The corresponding terminals for each bit are as follows:
Sel
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Terminal P7 P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1
319
Learning Protection Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
31– Multi-function relay
Relay 1–5
35 1–5
OUT 6 IOL - -
Multi-function
36 Q1 Define
output 1
Note
A warning signal output can be provided in advance by the multi-function output terminal before
the inverter overload protection function (IOLT) operates. When the overcurrent time reaches
60% of the allowed overcurrent (120%, 1 min; 140%, 5 sec), a warning signal output is provided
(signal output at 120%, 36 sec).
320
Learning Protection Features
When setting operation speed using an analog input at the terminal block, communication
options, or the keypad, speed command loss setting can be used to select the inverter
operation for situations when the speed command is lost due to the disconnection of signal
cables.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
0 None
Keypad command 1 Warning
Lost KPD
11 loss operation 0 None -
Mode 2 Free-Run
mode
3 Dec
Speed command
Lost Cmd
12 loss operation 1 Free-Run - -
Mode
mode
PRT Time to determine
Lost Cmd
13 speed command 1.0 0.1–120.0 sec
Time
loss
Operation Start
frequency at frequency–
14 Lost Preset F 0.00 Hz
speed command Max.
loss frequency
Analog input loss
15 AI Lost Level 0 Half of x1 -
decision level
31 Multi-function
Relay 1–5
–35 Relay 1–5 Lost
OUT 13 - -
Multi-function Command
36 Q1 Define
output 1
321
Learning Protection Features
Code Description
Set the operation command source to keypad. If there is a communication
error with the keypad or connection problem between the keypad and the
inverter, select the inverter’s operation.
Setting Function
The speed command immediately becomes the
0 None
operation frequency without any protection function.
PRT-11 Lost KPD Select 24: Lost keypad from OUT-31–36, one of the
Mode multi function terminal blocks, outputs a relevant
1 Warning
warning signal when abnormal operating conditions
arise.
The inverter blocks output. The motor performs in
2 Free-Run
free-run condition.
The motor decelerates and then stops at the time
3 Dec
set at PRT-07 (Trip Dec Time).
In situations when speed commands are lost, the inverter can be
configured to operate in a specific mode:
Setting Function
0 None The speed command immediately becomes the
operation frequency without any protection function.
1 Free-Run The inverter blocks output. The motor performs in
free-run condition.
2 Dec The motor decelerates and then stops at the time
PRT-12 Lost Cmd
set at PRT-07 (Trip Dec Time).
Mode
The inverter calculates the average input value for
3 Hold Input 10 seconds before the loss of the speed command
and uses it as the speed reference.
The inverter calculates the average output value for
Hold
4 10 seconds before the loss of the speed command
Output
and uses it as the speed reference.
Lost The inverter operates at the frequency set at PRT-
5
Preset 14 (Lost Preset F).
Configure the voltage and decision time for speed command loss when
using analog input.
Setting Function
PRT-15 AI Lost Based on the values set at IN-08 and IN-12, a
Level, protective operation starts when the input signal is
PRT-13 Lst Cmd reduced to half of the initial value of the analog input
Time 0 Half of x1 set using the speed command (DRV-01) and it
continues for the time (speed loss decision time) set
at PRT-13 (Lost Cmd Time). For example, set the
speed command to ‘2 (V1)’ at DRV-07, and set IN-
322
Learning Protection Features
Code Description
06 (V1 Polarity) to ‘0 (Unipolar)’. When the voltage
input drops to less than half of the value set at IN-08
(V1 Volt x 1), the protective function is activated.
The protective operation starts when the signal
becomes smaller than the initial value of the analog
input set by the speed command and it continues
1 Below of x1
for the speed loss decision time set at PRT-13 (Lost
Cmd Time). Codes IN-08 and IN-12 are used to set
the standard values.
If the set value of the IN-08 and IN-12 is ‘0,’ the LostCmd function does
not operate.
In situations where speed commands are lost, set the operation mode
PRT-14 Lost
(PRT-12 Lost Cmd Mode) to ‘5 (Lost Preset)’. This operates the protection
Preset F
function and sets the frequency so that the operation can continue.
Set IN-06 (V1 Polarity) to ‘Unipolar’ and IN-08 to ‘5 (V)’. Set PRT-15 (AI Lost Level) to ‘1
(Below x1)’ and PRT-12 (Lost Cmd Mode) to ‘2 (Dec)’ and then set PRT-13 (Lost Cmd
Time) to 5 seconds. Then the inverter operates as follows:
Note
If speed command is lost while using communication options or the integrated RS-485
communication, the protection function operates after the command loss decision time set at
PRT-13 (Lost Cmd Time) is elapsed.
323
Learning Protection Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Braking resistor
PRT 66 DB Warn %ED 0 0–30 %
configuration
31– Multi-function
Relay 1–5
35 relay 1–5 item DB
OUT 25 - -
Multi-function Warn %ED
36 Q1 Define
output 1 item
Code Description
Set the braking resistor configuration (%ED: Enable Duty). The braking
resistor configuration sets the rate at which the braking resistor operates
for one operation cycle. The maximum time for continuous braking is 15
sec and the braking resistor signal is not output from the inverter after the
15 sec period elapses. An example of braking resistor set up is as follows:
[Example 1]
𝑇_𝑑𝑒𝑐
%𝐸𝐷 = × 100%
𝑇_𝑎𝑐𝑐 + 𝑇_𝑠𝑡𝑒𝑎𝑑𝑦 + 𝑇_𝑑𝑒𝑐 + 𝑇_𝑠𝑡𝑜𝑝
PRT-66 DB
Warn %ED
[Example 2]
𝑇_𝑑𝑒𝑐
%𝐸𝐷 = × 100%
𝑇_𝑑𝑒𝑐 + 𝑇_𝑠𝑡𝑒𝑎𝑑𝑦1 + 𝑇_𝑎𝑐𝑐 + 𝑇_𝑠𝑡𝑒𝑎𝑑𝑦2
324
Learning Protection Features
Code Description
Do not set the braking resistor to exceed the resistor’s power rating. If overloaded; it can
overheat and cause a fire. When using a resistor with a heat sensor, the sensor output can be
used as an external trip signal for the inverter’s multi-function input.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Code Description
The low battery voltage warning for RTC function installed in the
PRT-90 Low Battery inverter can be enabled or disabled. The low battery voltage warning
occurs when the battery voltage is lower than 2 V.
• Be careful when replacing the battery. Remaining voltage in the battery may cause electric
shock.
• Make sure that the battery doesn’t fall inside of the inverter.
325
Learning Protection Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Under load Output
23 UL Source 0 0–1 -
detection Source Current
Under load
24 UL Band 10.0 0.0–100.0 %
detection Band
Under load
25 UL Warn Sel 1 Yes 0–1 -
warning selection
PRT
Under load
26 UL Warn Time 10.0 0–600.0 sec
warning time
Under load trip
27 UL Trip Sel 1 Free-Run 0-2 -
selection
Under load trip
28 UL Trip Time 30.0 0–600.0 sec
timer
Code Description
PRT-23 Select a source to detect the under load trip. An under load trip can be
UL Source detected using output current or output power.
Make a standard value for the under load fault occurrence using system
PRT-24
load%-UL Band value set in each frequency of the load characteristics
UL Band
curve made by the AP2-01 Load Tune.
Select the under load warning options. Set the multi-function output
PRT-25
terminals (at OUT-31–35 and 36) to ‘7’ (Under load). The warning signals
UL Warn Sel
are output when under load conditions occur.
PRT-26 A protect function operates when under load level condition explained
UL Warn Time above maintains for the warning time set.
Sets the inverter operation mode for situations when an under load trip
PRT-27 occurs. If set to ‘1 (Free-Run)’, the output is blocked in an under load fault
UL Trip Sel trip event. If set to ‘2 (Dec)’, the motor decelerates and stops when an under
load trip occurs.
PRT-28 A protect function operates when under load level conditions explained
UL Trip Time above maintain for the trip time set.
326
Learning Protection Features
To operate under load trip properly, a load tuning (AP2-01 Load Tune) must be performed in
advance. If you cannot perform a load tuning, manually set the load fit frequencies (AP2-02
Load Fit Lfreq–AP2-10 Load Fit Hfreq). The Under Load protection does not operate while the
Energy Save function is in operation.
Code Description
Set the cooling fan fault mode.
Setting Function
0 Trip The inverter output is blocked and the fan trip is
PRT-79 Fan Trip
displayed when a cooling fan error is detected.
Mode
1 Warning When OUT-36 (Q1 Define) and OUT-31–35
(Relay1–5) are set to ‘8 (FAN Warning)’, the fan
error signal is output and the operation continues.
When the code value is set to ‘8 (FAN Warning)’, the fan error signal is
OUT-36 Q1 Define,
output and operation continues. However, when the inverter’s inside
OUT-31–35
temperature rises above a certain level, output is blocked due to
Relay1–5
activation of overheat protection.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Low voltage trip
PRT 81 LVT Delay 0.0 0–60.0 sec
decision delay time
31– Multi-function relay
Relay 1–5
35 1–5 Low
OUT 11 -
Multi-function Voltage
36 Q1 Define
output 1
Code Description
If the code value is set to ‘11 (Low Voltage)’, the inverter stops the output first
when a low voltage trip condition occurs, then a fault trip occurs after the low
PRT-81
voltage trip decision time elapses. The warning signal for a low voltage fault trip
LVT Delay
can be provided using the multi-function output or a relay. However, the low
voltage trip delay time (LVT Delay time) does not apply to warning signals.
If input power is disconnected during inverter operation and internal DC voltage decreases
lower than a certain voltage, the inverter disconnects the output and displays low voltage ‘2
(Low Voltage 2)'.
Even if the voltage increases and goes back to the normal state, unlike a low voltage fault, it
remains in a fault state until the user unlocks the fault state.
328
Learning Protection Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
65– Px terminal Px Define
IN 5 BX 0-55 -
71 setting options (Px: P1–P7)
Code Description
When the operation of the multi-function input terminal is set to ‘5 (BX)’ and is
turned on during operation, the inverter blocks the output and ‘BX’ is displayed on
IN-65–71 the keypad display. While ‘BX’ is displayed on the keypad screen, the inverter’s
Px Define operation information including the operation frequency and current at the time of
the BX signal can be monitored. The inverter resumes operation when the BX
terminal turns off and operation command is input.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Px terminal Px Define
IN 65–71 3 RST 0-55 -
setting options (Px: P1–P7)
Code Description
Press the [Stop/Reset] key on the keypad or use the multi-function input terminal
IN-65–71
to restart the inverter. Set the multi-function input terminal to ‘3’ (RST) and turn on
Px Define
the terminal to reset the trip status.
329
Learning Protection Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Operation mode
PRT 80 Opt Trip Mode 1 Free-Run 0–2 -
for option card trip
Code Description
Setting Function
0 None No operation
PRT-80 The inverter output is blocked and fault trip information is
1 Free-Run
Opt Trip Mode shown on the keypad.
The motor decelerates to the value set at PRT-07 (Trip
2 Dec
Dec Time).
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Operation for no
31 No Motor Trip 0 None 0-1 -
motor trip
No motor trip
PRT 32 No Motor Level 5 1–100 %
current level
No motor
33 No Motor Time 3.0 0.1–10 sec
detection time
Code Description
If the output current value [based on the rated current (BAS-13)] is
PRT-32 No Motor
lower than the value set at PRT-32 (No Motor Level), and if this
Level,
continues for the time set at PRT-33 (No Motor Time), a ‘no motor
PRT-33 No Motor Time
trip’ occurs.
330
Learning Protection Features
If BAS-07 (V/F Pattern) is set to ‘1 (Square)’, set PRT-32 (No Motor Level) to a value lower than
the factory default. Otherwise, a ‘no motor trip,’ due to a lack of output current, will occur when
the ‘no motor trip’ operation is set.
331
Learning Protection Features
Parameter
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting range Unit
Setting
0 None
Set broken belt
91 BrokenBelt Sel 0 None 1 Warning -
function
2 Free-Run
Function frequency
92 BrokenBelt Freq 15.00 15.00~MaxFreq Hz
of broken belt
PRT 93* Motor torque current Current Trq - 0~100.0 %
Function torque
94** current of broken BrokenBelt Trq 10.0 0~100.0 %
belt
Function Delay time
95 BrokenBelt Dly 10.0 0.0~600.0 sec
of broken belt
* Current output torque value compared to motor rated torque(%)
** Broken belt operation torque compared to motor rated torque(%)
After inverter is operating in the frequency over PRT-92 and current torque reaches the limit
set at PRT-94 and then it meets the conditions at the time above set PRT-95, Broken Belt is
activated.
Torque Current
[A]
[Current Trq %]
at [BrokenBelt Freq]
[BrokenBelt Trq %]
Time count
[BrokenBelt Dly]
Broken Belt
Warning or Trip
No action
t
332
Learning Protection Features
Parameter
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit
Setting
Estimated current
CAP.Diag
83 level of the 0.0 10.0–100.0 %
Perc
capacitance
0 None
333
Learning Protection Features
Code Description
Configure the current level of the inverter’s output when capacitance life
PRT-83 CAP.
examination is in operation. For life examination, the value must be set higher
Diag Perc
than 0%.
Configure the capacitance life examination mode. This mode is separated into
installing the inverter mode and maintenance mode. To use the capacitance
life examination function, proper setting is required.
Setting Function
0 None Do not use capacitance life examination function.
PRT-84 CAP.
1 CAP. Diag 1 When installing the inverter for the first time,
Diag
estimate initial capacitance.
2 CAP. Diag 2 Estimate the capacitance while maintaining the
inverter.
3 CAP. Init Initialize the estimated value of the capacitance to
0.
PRT-85 CAP.
Set the standard level for the capacitance replacement.
Level 1
Display estimated capacitance value according to the mode in PRT-84. If this
PRT-86 CAP.
value is lower than the value set in PRT-85, the warning message”CAP
Level 2
Warning” appears on the display.
• Be careful when replacing the battery. Remaining voltage in the battery may cause electric
shock.
• Make sure that the battery doesn’t fall inside of the inverter.
• The main capacitor life examination is only for reference and cannot be used as an
absolute value.
• The main capacitor life examination only operates in AUTO mode and when inverter is
stopped.
334
Learning Protection Features
Setting
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
Range
Fan accumulated Fan Time
87 0.0 - %
time percentage Perc
PRT
Fan replacement Fan
88 0.0 0.0–100.0 %
alarm level Exchange
Initializing the 0 No
accumulation time Fan Time
CNF 75 0 No
of the fan Rst
1 Yes
operation
Fan
OUT 31–35 Relay 1–5 output Relay 1–5 35 0-41 -
Exchange
When PRT-88 value is 0%, Fan Exchange alarm does not occur and user can use the
function when it is set to a value other than 0%.
Code Description
Displays the time the fan is used in percentage based on 50,000 hours.
PRT-87
If this value is bigger than the value in PRT-88, the warning message”Fan
Fan Time Perc
Exchange” appears on the display.
PRT-88
Displays the life replacement standard of the fan in percentage.
Fan Exchange
Initializes the accumulation time of the fan operation.
• Be careful when replacing the battery. Remaining voltage in the battery may cause electric
shock.
• Make sure that the battery doesn’t fall inside of the inverter.
• Fan life examination is only for the reference and cannot be used as an absolute value.
335
Learning Protection Features
336
Learning Protection Features
337
Learning Protection Features
Note
• In a latch type trip, the inverter cannot unlock the fault if the user does not reset the inverter,
even if the trip state is released after the trip occurs.
• In level type trip, the inverter can unlock the fault by itself if the trip state is unlocked after
the trip occurs.
• In a fetal type trip, there is no way to unlock the fault other than turning the inverter off then
back on after the trip occurs.
338
RS-485 Communication Features
Item Standard
Communication method/
RS-485/Bus type, Multi-drop Link System
Transmission type
Inverter type name H100
Number of connected
Maximum of 16 inverters / Maximum1,200 m (recommended
inverters/ Transmission
distance: within 700 m)
distance
Recommended cable size 0.75 mm², (18 AWG), Shielded Type Twisted-Pair (STP) Wire
Installation type Dedicated terminals (S+/S-/SG) on the control terminal block
Supplied by the inverter - insulated power source from the
Power supply
inverter’s internal circuit
1,200/2,400/4800/9,600/19,200/38,400/57,600/115,200 bps
Communication speed
BACNET: 9600/19200/38400/76800 bps
Control procedure Asynchronous communications system
Communication system Half duplex system
Character system Modbus-RTU: Binary / LS Bus: ASCII
Stop bit length 1-bit/2-bit
Frame error check 2 bytes
Parity check None/Even/Odd
339
RS-485 Communication Features
Connect the wires and configure the communication parameters on the inverter by referring
to the following illustration of the communication system configuration.
The maximum length of the communication line is 1,200 meters, but it is recommended to
use no more than 700 meters of communication line to ensure stable communication.
Please use a repeater to enhance the communication speed when using a communication
line longer than 1,200 meters or when using a large number of devices. A repeater is
effective when smooth communication is not available due to noise interference.
When wiring the communication line, make sure that the SG terminals on the PLC and
inverter are connected. SG terminals prevent communication errors due to electronic noise
interference.
340
RS-485 Communication Features
Parameter
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting range Unit
Setting
7
If AP1-40 is set to ‘4(Serve Drv)’, MaxComID is ‘8’, and if COM-02 is set to ‘4(BACnet),
MaxComID is ‘127’. Otherwise MaxComID is ‘250’.
341
RS-485 Communication Features
Code Description
1 2400 bps
2 4800 bps
3 9600 bps
4 19200 bps
5 38400 bps
6 56 Kbps (57,600 bps)
7 76.8 Kbps (76,800 bps)
8 115.2 Kbps (115,200 bps)
If the COM-02 Int485 Proto setting is BACnet, the available
communication speed settings are 9600 bps, 19200 bps, 76.8 kbps.
If the COM-02 Int485 Proto setting is Metasys-N2, the
communication speed is fixed to 9600 bps and COM-03 Int485
BaudR is not shown.
Set a communication configuration. Set the data length, parity check
method, and the number of stop bits.
Setting Function
0 D8/PN/S1 8-bit data / no parity check / 1 stop bit
1 D8/PN/S2 8-bit data / no parity check / 2 stop bits
COM-04 Int485 Mode
2 D8/PE/S1 8-bit data / even parity / 1 stop bit
3 D8/PO/S1 8-bit data / odd parity / 1 stop bit
If the COM-02 Int485 Proto setting is Metasys-N2, the
communication frame composition is fixed to D8/PN/S1 and COM-
04 Int485 Mode is not visible.
Set the response time for the slave (inverter) to react to the request
from the master. Response time is used in a system where the slave
device response is too fast for the master device to process. Set this
code to an appropriate value for smooth master-slave
communication.
342
RS-485 Communication Features
After setting the DRV-06 Cmd Source code to ‘3 (Int 485)’ and DRV-07 Freq Ref Src code
to ‘6 (Int 485)’, you can set common area parameters for the operation command and
frequency via communication. For details about the operation command, refer to 4.6.4 RS-
485 Communication as a Command Input Device on page 106 and about the frequency
command, refer to 4.2.6 Setting a Frequency Reference via RS-485 Communication on
page 99.
To select the built-in RS485 communication as the source of command, set DRV-07 to ‘6
(Int485)’ on the keypad. Then, set common area parameters for the operation command
and frequency via communication.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Command
06 Cmd Source 3 Int 485 0–5 -
source
DRV
Frequency
07 Freq Ref Src 6 Int 485 0–11 -
setting method
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Speed command Lost Cmd
12 0 None 0–5 -
loss operation mode Mode
PRT Time to determine
Lost Cmd
13 speed command 6 1.0 0.1–120.0 sec
Time
loss
343
RS-485 Communication Features
Setting Function
0 None The speed command immediately becomes the
operation frequency without any protection function.
1 Free-Run The inverter blocks output. The motor performs in
free-run condition.
2 Dec The motor decelerates and then stops.
PRT-12 Lost 3 Hold Input Operates continuously with the speed of the inputted
Cmd Mode, speed command until the loss of the speed
PRT-13 Lost command.
Cmd Time The inverter calculates the average input value for 10
seconds before the loss of the speed command and
uses it as the speed reference.
4 Hold Output Operates continuously with the operate frequency
before the speed loss. The inverter calculates the
average output value for 10 seconds before the loss
of the speed command and uses it as the speed
reference.
5 Lost Preset The inverter operates at the frequency set at PRT-14
(Lost Preset F).
344
RS-485 Communication Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
70– Communication Virtual DI x
0 None 0–55 -
77 multi-function input x (x: 1–8)
COM Communication
Virt DI 0000 0000 –
86 multi-function input 0000 0000 bit
Status 1111 1111
monitoring
Set CNF-48 to ‘1 (Yes)’ to allow all the changes over communication to be saved, so that
the inverter retains all the existing values even after the power has been turned off.
Setting address 0h03E0 to ‘0’ and then setting it again to ‘1’ via communication allows the
existing parameter settings to be saved. However, setting address 0h03E0 to ‘1’ and then
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Parameter 0 No
CNF 48 Save parameters 0 No -
Save 1 Yes
setting it to ‘0’ does not carry out the same function.
345
RS-485 Communication Features
346
RS-485 Communication Features
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Output
Para Status-x
31–38 communication - 0000–FFFF Hex
(x: 1–8)
address x
COM
Input
Para Control-x
51–58 communication - 0000–FFFF Hex
(x: 1–8)
address x
Note
When registering control parameters, register the operation speed (0h0005, 0h0380, 0h0381)
and operation command (0h0006, 0h0382) parameters at the end of a parameter control
frame. For example, when the parameter control frame has 5 parameter control items (Para
Control - x), register the operation speed at Para Control-4 and the operation command to
Para Control-5.
347
RS-485 Communication Features
348
RS-485 Communication Features
Request
Normal Response
Error Response
349
RS-485 Communication Features
• Data: ASCII-HEX (for example, when the data value is 3000: 3000 → ‘0’’B’’B’’8’h →
30h 42h 42h 38h)
• Error code: ASCII-HEX (refer to 7.3.6.4 Error Code on page 353)
• Transmission/reception buffer size: Transmission=39 bytes, Reception=44 bytes
• Monitor registration buffer: 8 Words
• SUM: Checks communication errors via sum.
• SUM=a total of the lower 8 bits values for station ID, command and data (Station
ID+CMD+Data) in ASCII-HEX.
• For example, a command to read 1 address from address 3000:
SUM=‘0’+‘1’+’R’+‘3’+‘0’+‘0’+‘0’+’1’ = 30h+31h+52h+33h+30h+30h+30h+31h = 1A7h
(the control value is not included: ENQ, ACK, NAK, etc
Note
Broadcasting
Broadcasting sends commands to all inverters connected to the network simultaneously.
When commands are sent from station ID 255, each inverter acts on the command regardless
of the station ID. However no response is issued for commands transmitted by broadcasting
350
RS-485 Communication Features
Monitor registration request is made to designate the type of data that requires continuous
monitoring and periodic updating.
Monitor Registration Perform Request: A data read request for a registered address,
received from a monitor registration request
ENQ Station ID CMD SUM EOT
05h ‘01’–‘FA’ ‘Y’ ‘XX’ 04h
1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte
Total bytes=7
352
RS-485 Communication Features
353
RS-485 Communication Features
354
RS-485 Communication Features
Read Holding Registers (Func. Code: 0x03) and Read Input Registers (Func. Code: 0x04)
are processed identically by the inverter.
Codes Description
Starting address 1 of the inverter parameters (common area or keypad) to
Start Addr.
be read from.
No. of Reg. Number of the inverter parameters (common area or keypad) to be read.
Byte number of normal response values based on the number of registers
Byte Count
(No. of Reg).
Except. Code Error codes
Request
Normal Response
Error Response
355
RS-485 Communication Features
Codes Description
Address 1 of the inverter parameter (common area or keypad) to be written
Addr.
to.
Reg. Value The inverter parameter (common area or keypad) value to write with.
Except. Code Error codes
Request
Slave
Func.Code Addr (Hi) Addr(Lo) Value(Hi) Value(Lo) CRC(Lo) CRC(Hi)
Station ID
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte
Normal Response
Slave
Func.Code Addr (Hi) Addr(Lo) Value(Hi) Value(Lo) CRC(Lo) CRC(Hi)
Station ID
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte
Error Response
Codes Description
Starting address 1 of the inverter parameters (common area or keypad) to
Start Addr.
be written to.
No. of Reg. Number of the inverter parameters (common area or keypad) to be written.
356
RS-485 Communication Features
Codes Description
Reg. Value The inverter parameter (common area or keypad) values to write with.
Except. Code Error codes
Request
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte
Normal Response
Error Response
357
RS-485 Communication Features
Exception Code
Code
01: ILLEGAL FUNCTION
02: ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS
03: ILLEGAL DATA VALUE
06: SLAVE DEVICE BUSY
14: Write-Protection
358
RS-485 Communication Features
The following are common area parameters partly compatible with the iS5, iP5A, iV5, iG5A,
S100 series inverters. .( Addresses 0h0000-0h0011 are for compatible common area
parameters. Addresses 0h0012-0h001B are for H100 series inverter parameters.)
Comm.
Parameter Scale Unit R/W Assigned Content by Bit
Address
Address
0h0000 Inverter model - - R F: H100
0: 0.75kW, 1: 1.5kW, 2: 2.2kW
3: 3.7kW 4: 5.5kW, 5: 7.5kW
6: 11kW, 7: 15kW, 8: 18.5kW
9: 22kW, 10: 30kW, 11: 37kW
0h0001 Inverter capacity - - R 12: 45kW ,13: 55kW, 14: 75kW,
15: 90kW, 16: 110kW, 17: 132kW
18: 160kW, 19: 185kW, 20: 220kW
21: 250kW, 22: 315kW, 23: 355kW
24: 400kW, 25: 500kW
Inverter input 0: 220 V product
0h0002 - - R
voltage 1: 440 V product
(Example) 0h0064: Version 1.00
0h0003 Version - - R
(Example) 0h0065: Version 1.01
0h0004 Reserved - - R -
Command
0h0005 0.01 Hz R/W -
frequency
B15 Reserved
B14 0: Keypad Freq,
2-8: Terminal block multi-
B13
step speed
B12 17: Up, 18: Down
19: STEADY
B11
22: V1, 24: V2, 25: I2,
B10 26: PULSE
Operation R 27: Built-in 485
0h0006 - - 28: Communication option
command (option) B9
30: JOG, 31: PID
B8 0: Keypad
1: Fx/Rx-1
B7
2: Fx/Rx-2
3: Built-in 485
B6 4: Communication option
5: Time Event
R/W B5 Reserved
359
RS-485 Communication Features
B4 Emergency stop
W: Trip initialization (01),
B3
R: Trip status
B2 Reverse operation (R)
B1 Forward operation (F)
B0 Stop (S)
0h0007 Acceleration time 0.1 sec R/W -
0h0008 Deceleration time 0.1 sec R/W -
0h0009 Output current 0.1 A R -
0h000A Output frequency 0.01 Hz R -
0h000B Output voltage 1 V R -
0h000C DC link voltage 1 V R -
0h000D Output power 0.1 kW R -
B15 0: HAND, 1: AUTO
1: Frequency command
B14 source by communication
(built-in, option)
1: Operation command
B13 source by communication
(built-in, option)
B12 Reverse operation command
B11 Forward operation command
B10 Reserved
0h000E Operation status - - R B9 Jog mode
B8 Drive stopping
B7 DC Braking
B6 Speed reached
B5 Decelerating
B4 Accelerating
Fault Trip - operates
B3
according to OUT-30 setting
B2 Operating in reverse direction
B1 Operating in forward direction
360
RS-485 Communication Features
B0 Stopped
B15 Reserved
B14 Reserved
B13 Reserved
B12 Reserved
B11 Reserved
B10 H/W-Diag
B9 Reserved
361
RS-485 Communication Features
B10 Q1
B9 Reserved
B8 Reserved
B7 Reserved
B6 Reserved
B5 Reserved
B4 Relay 5
B3 Relay 4
B2 Relay 3
B1 Relay 2
B0 Relay 1
0h0012 V1 0.1 % R V1 input voltage
0h0013 Thermal 0.1 % R Input Thermal
0h0014 V2 0.1 % R V2 input voltage
0h0015 I2 0.1 % R I2 input Current
Motor rotation Displays existing motor rotation
0h0016 1 Rpm R
speed speed
0h0017
Reserved - - - -
–0h0019
0h001A Select Hz/rpm - - R 0: Hz unit, 1: rpm unit
Display the number
Display the number of poles for the
0h001B of poles for the - - R
selected motor
selected motor
362
RS-485 Communication Features
Comm.
Parameter Scale Unit Assigned content by bit
Address
0h0300 Inverter model - - H100: 000Fh
0.75 kW: 4008h, 1.5 kW: 4015h
2.2 kW: 4022h, 3.7 kW: 4037h
5.5 kW: 4055h, 7.5 kW: 4075h
11 kW: 40B0h, 15 kW: 40F0h
18.5 kW: 4125h, 22 kW: 4160h
30 kW: 41E0h, 37 kW: 4250h,
0h0301 Inverter capacity - - 45 kW: 42D0h,55 kW: 4370h,
75 kW: 44B0h,90 kW: 45A0h,
110 kW: 46E0h, 132 kW: 4840h
160 kW: 4A00h, 185kW: 4B90h,
220 kW: 4DC0h, 250 kW: 4FA0h,
315 kW: 53B0h, 355 kW: 5630h,
400 kW: 5900h, 500 kW: 5F40h
Inverter input
200 V 3-phase forced cooling: 0231h
voltage/power (Single
0h0302 - -
phase, 3-
phase)/cooling method 400 V 3-phase forced cooling: 0431h
0h0304 Reserved - - -
B15
B12
B7 1: Speed searching
2: Accelerating
B6 3: Operating at constant rate
4: Decelerating
B5 5: Decelerating to stop
363
RS-485 Communication Features
6: H/W OCS
B4 7: S/W OCS
8: Dwell operating
B3
0: Stopped
B2
1: Operating in forward direction
2: Operating in reverse direction
B1
3: DC operating
B0
B15
B14
B13 Operation command source
B12 0: Keypad
1: Communication option
B11 3: Built-in RS 485
B10 4: Terminal block
B9
Inverter operation B8
0h0306 frequency command - -
B7 Frequency command source
source
0: Keypad speed
B6
1: Keypad torque
B5 2-4: Up/Down operation speed
5: V1, 7: V2, 8: I2
B4
9: Pulse
B3 10: Built-in RS 485
11: Communication option
B2 13: Jog
B1 14: PID
25-31: Multi-step speed
B0 frequency
0h0307 Keypad S/W version - - (Ex.) 0h0064: Version 1.00
0h0308 Keypad title version - - (Ex.) 0h0065: Version 1.01
(Ex.) 0h0064: Version 1.00
0h0309 IO Board Version - -
(Ex.) 0h0065: Version 1.01
0h030A–
Reserved - - -
0h30F
0h0310 Output current 0.1 A -
0h0311 Output frequency 0.01 Hz -
364
RS-485 Communication Features
365
RS-485 Communication Features
B2 Relay 3
B1 Relay 2
B0 Relay 1
B15–
Reserved
B8
B7 Virtual DI 8 (COM-77)
B6 Virtual DI 7 (COM-76)
B5 Virtual DI 6 (COM-75)
Virtual digital input
0h0322 - -
information B4 Virtual DI 5 (COM-74)
B3 Virtual DI 4 (COM-73)
B2 Virtual DI 3 (COM-72)
B1 Virtual DI 2 (COM-71)
B0 Virtual DI 1 (COM-70)
Display the selected
0h0323 - - 0: 1st motor/1: 2nd motor
motor
0h0324 AI1 0.01 % Analog input V1 or Thermal (I/O board)
0h0325 AI2 0.01 % Analog input V2 or I2 (I/O board)
0h0326 Reserved - - Reserved
0h0327 Reserved - - Reserved
0h0328 AO1 0.01 % Analog output 1 (I/O board)
0h0329 AO2 0.01 % Analog output 2 (I/O board)
0h032A Reserved 0.01 % Reserved
0h032B Reserved 0.01 % Reserved
0h032C Reserved - - Reserved
0h032D Reserved - - Reserved
Consumption energy
0h032E 0.1 kWh Consumption energy (kWh)
(kWh)
Consumption energy MW
0h032F 1 Consumption energy (MWh)
(MWh) h
B15 PC Repeat Err
Latch type trip
0h0330 - - B14 Over Heat Trip
information - 1
B13 Reserved
366
RS-485 Communication Features
367
RS-485 Communication Features
B3 Lost Keypad
B2 Lost Command
B1 Low Voltage
B0 BX
B15–
Reserved
B3
H/W Diagnosis Trip B2 Watchdog-1 error
0h0333 - -
information
B1 EEP Err
B0 ADC Offset
B15 Broken Belt
B14 Low Battery
B13 Load Tune
B8 Lost Keypad
0h0334 Warning information-1 - -
B7 Pipe Break
B6 Fire Mode
B5 DB Warn %ED
B4 Fan Warning
B3 Lost Command
B2 Inv Over Load
B1 Under Load
B0 Over Load
B15 Reserved
368
RS-485 Communication Features
B2 Overvoltage Trip
B1 Overcurrent1 Trip
B0 Ground Fault Trip
B15 Reserved
~ Reserved
B1 Rs Tune Err
B0 ParaWrite Fail
0h0337–
Reserved - - Reserved
0h0339
Proc Proc
0h033B Proc PID UnitScale Ref Unit Scaled Process PID reference value
Unit Unit
369
RS-485 Communication Features
0h0349 Reserved - - -
0h034A Option 1 - - 0: None, 5: LonWorks
0h034B Reserved - - Reserved
0h034C Reserved Reserved
0h034D–
Reserved - - Reserved
0h034F
Proc Proc
0h0353 E-PID 1 Unit Scale Ref Unit Scale External PID 1 Reference
Unit Unit
Proc Proc
0h0354 E-PID 1 Unit Scale Fdb Unit Scale External PID 1 feedback
Unit Unit
Proc Proc
0h035A E-PID 2 Unit Scale Ref Unit Scale External PID 2 Reference
Unit Unit
Proc Proc
0h035B E-PID 2 Unit Scale Fdb Unit Scale External PID 2 feedback
Unit Unit
B15
Reserved
–B2
0h035C Application Status - - B1 Fire Mode
B0 Pump Clean
370
RS-485 Communication Features
B15 Reserved
– Reserved
B5 Reserved
371
RS-485 Communication Features
Comm.
Parameter Scale Unit Assigned Content by Bit
Address
0h0380 Frequency command 0.01 Hz Command frequency setting
0h0381 RPM command 1 Rpm Command rpm setting
B15–B4 Reserved
B3 0 1: Free-run stop
B2 0 1: Trip initialization
0: Reverse command, 1:
B1
0h0382 Operation command - - Forward command
0: Stop command, 1: Run
B0
command
Example: Forward operation command
0003h,
Reverse operation command 0001h
0h0383 Acceleration time 0.1 sec Acceleration time setting
0h0384 Deceleration time 0.1 sec Deceleration time setting
B15–B8 Reserved
B7 Virtual DI 8 (COM-77)
B6 Virtual DI 7 (COM-76)
B5 Virtual DI 6 (COM-75)
Virtual digital input
0h0385 - - B4 Virtual DI 5 (COM-74)
control (0: Off, 1: On)
B3 Virtual DI 4 (COM-73)
B2 Virtual DI 3 (COM-72)
B1 Virtual DI 2 (COM-71)
B0 Virtual DI 1 (COM-70)
B15–B11 Reserved
B10 Q1
B9–
Digital output control Reserved
0h0386 - - B5
(0: Off, 1: On)
B4 Relay 5
B3 Relay 4
B2 Relay 3
372
RS-485 Communication Features
B1 Relay 2
B0 Relay 1
0h0387 KPD H.O.A Lock 1 - 0 : Locked, 1 : During Run, 2 : Unlocked
0h0388 PID reference 0.1 % Process PID reference
0h0389 PID feedback value 0.1 % Process PID feedback
0h038A Motor rated current 0.1 A -
0h038B Motor rated voltage 1 V -
0h038C–
Reserved - - Reserved
0h038D
Proc PID Unit Proc Proc
0h038E Unit Scale Process PID reference
Reference Unit Unit
Proc PID Unit Proc Proc
0h038F Unit Scale Process PID feedback
Feedback Unit Unit
0h0390–
Reserved - - Reserved
0h0399
Set the CNF-20 value (refer to
0h039A Anytime Para - - 5.49Operation State Monitor on page
302)
Set the CNF-21 value (refer to
0h039B Monitor Line-1 - - 5.49Operation State Monitor on page
302)
Set the CNF-22 value (refer to
0h039C Monitor Line-2 - - 5.49Operation State Monitor on page
302)
Set the CNF-23 value (refer to
0h039D Monitor Line-3 - - 5.49Operation State Monitor on page
302)
0h039E–
Reserved Reserved
0h039F
0h03A0 PID Ref 1 Aux Value 0.1 % PID Aux 1 reference
0h03A1 PID Ref 2 Aux Value 0.1 % PID Aux 2 reference
PID Feedback Aux
0h03A2 0.1 % PID Aux feedback
Value
Proc PID Aux 1 Unit Proc Proc
0h03A3 Unit Scale PID Aux 1 reference
Scale Unit Unit
Proc PID Aux 2 Unit Proc Proc
0h03A4 Unit Scale PID Aux 2 reference
Scale Unit Unit
373
RS-485 Communication Features
Note
A frequency set via communication using the common area frequency address (0h0380,
0h0005) is not saved even when used with the parameter save function. To save a changed
frequency to use after a power cycle, follow these steps:
1 Set DRV-07 to ‘Keypad-1’ and select a target frequency.
2 Set the frequency via communication into the parameter area frequency address
(0h1101).
3 Perform the parameter save (0h03E0: '1') before turning off the power. After the
power cycle, the frequency set before turning off the power is displayed.
374
RS-485 Communication Features
Changeable
Comm.
Parameter Scale Unit During Function
Address
Running
0h03E0 Save parameters - - X 0: No, 1: Yes
0h03E1 Monitor mode initialization - - O 0: No, 1: Yes
0: No, 10: EPID Grp
1: All Grp 11: AP1 Grp
2: DRV Grp 12: AP2 Grp
3: BAS Grp 13: AP3 Grp
4: ADV Grp 14: PRT Grp
0h03E2 Parameter initialization - - X
5: CON Grp 15: M2 Grp
6: IN Grp Setting is
7: OUT Grp prohibited
8: COM Grp during fault trip
9: PID Grp interruptions.
0h03E3 Display changed - - O 0: No, 1: Yes
0: Basic
1: Compressor
2: Supply Fan
3: Exhaust Fan
0h03E4 Macro Function Setting - - X
4: Cooling Tower
5: Circul. Pump
6: Vacuum Pump
7: Constant Torq
0h03E5 Delete all fault history - - O 0: No, 1: Yes
Delete user-registrated
0h03E6 - - O 0: No, 1: Yes
codes
Write: 0–9999
0h03E7 Hide parameter mode 0 Hex O
Read: 0: Unlock, 1: Lock
Write: 0–9999
0h03E8 Lock parameter mode 0 Hex O
Read: 0: Unlock, 1: Lock
Easy start on (easy
0h03E9 - - O 0: No, 1: Yes
parameter setup mode)
Initializing power
0h03EA - - O 0: No, 1: Yes
consumption
Initialize inverter operation
0h03EB - - O 0: No, 1: Yes
accumulative time
375
RS-485 Communication Features
Note
• When setting parameters in the inverter memory control area, the values are reflected to
the inverter operation and saved. Parameters set in other areas via communication are
reflected to the inverter operation, but are not saved. All set values are cleared following
an inverter power cycle and revert back to its previous values. When setting parameters
via communication, ensure that a parameter save is completed prior to shutting the
inverter down.
• Set parameters very carefully. After setting a parameter to ‘0’ via communication, set it to
another value. If a parameter has been set to a value other than ‘0’ and a non-zero value
is entered again, an error message is returned. The previously-set value can be identified
by reading the parameter when operating the inverter via communication.
• The addresses 0h03E7 and 0h03E8 are parameters for entering the password. When the
password is entered, the condition will change from Lock to Unlock, and vice versa. When
the same parameter value is entered continuously, the parameter is executed just once.
Therefore, if the same value is entered again, change it to another value first and then re-
enter the previous value. For example, if you want to enter 244 twice, enter it in the
following order: 244 0 244.
• If the communication parameter settings are initialized by setting the address 0h03E2 to
[1: All Grp] or [8: COM Grp], or if any Macro function item is modified by setting the
address 0h03E4, all the communication parameter settings are reverted to the factory
default. If this happens, the inverter may not be able to properly receive responses from
the upper-level devices due to the changes in the settings.
• If there is an undefined address in the addresses for reading multiple consecutive data
defined in the common area, the undefined address returns0xFFFF while all the others
return normal response. If all the consecutive addresses are undefined, one return code
is received from the first undefined address only.
• If there is an undefined address in the addresses for writing into multiple consecutive data
defined in the common area, or if the value that is being written is not a valid one, no error
response about the wring operation is returned. If all the consecutive addresses are
undefined, or if all the date is invalid, one return code is received from the first undefined
address only.
It may take longer to set the parameter values in the inverter memory control area because all
data is saved to the inverter. Be careful as communication may be lost during parameter setup if
parameter setup is continues for an extended period of time.
376
RS-485 Communication Features
• When auto change mode selection (AP1–55) is set to ‘0 (None)’ or ‘1 (Aux)’, and if 5
motors are operated, including the main motor, the interlock numbers 1,2,3,4,5 refer
to the monitors connected to Relay 1,2,3,4,5 (If interlock numbers 1,2,3,4,5 are
connected to Relay 1,2,3,4,5 at the inverter output terminal).
• If auto change mode selection (AP1-55) is set to ‘2 (Main)’, and the main and
377
RS-485 Communication Features
auxiliary motors are connected to the inverter output terminal Relay 1,2,3,4, Interlock
1,2,3,4 are the monitors connected to Relay 1,2,3,4. Set COM-04 Int485 Mode.
2 Set the Device Object Instances for COM-21 and 22 and dfine the values. The device
object instances must have unique values.
3 Set COM-01 (Int485 St ID) by entering a value (for BACnet, the Int485 station ID must
be set within a range of 0–127). The station ID value set at COM-01 must be within the
value range defined by the Max Master Property of different Master for MS/TP token
passing.
4 Test the network and make sure the BACnet communication is working properly.
Group Code Name LCD display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
0 12001)
1 24001)
2 48001)
3 9600
Communication
03 Baudrate 9600 bps 4 19200
Speed
5 38400
6 56Kbps1)
7 76.8Kbps
8 115.2Kbps1)
0 D8/PN/S1
COM Communication 1 D8/PN/S2
04 Int485 Mode D8/PN/S1
Mode 2 D8/PE/S1
3 D8/PO/S1
Maximum
number of BAC Max
20 127 1–127 -
BACnet Master
Masters
BACnet device BAC Dev
21 237 0–4194 -
number 1 Inst1
BACnet device BAC Dev
22 0 0–999 -
number 2 Inst2
BACnet device BAC
23 0 0–32767 -
password PassWord
1) 1200 bps, 2400 bps, 4800 bps, 56Kbps, 115.2Kbps cannot be set in communication
speed setting in case of BACnet communication.
378
RS-485 Communication Features
Code Description
Refers to MACID setting parameter used in BACnet. All MACIDs of the
COM-01 inverter using BACnet must be set before connecting to BUS. MACID
Int485 ST ID must have the unique value from the Network to be connected to
(MAC ID) MACID. If BACnet is used, the value must be within 0–127.
Communication is not available if the value is not included in the range.
COM-03
Sets the communication speed to use in the network.
Baud Rate
COM-20 Range for Max Master that is the number of devices currently connected
BAC Mas Master to the communication Line is 1–127, and the default value is 127.
BACnet Device Instance is used to identify BACnet Device, and must be
set as the unique value in the BACnet network. It is used efficiently when
finding BACnet Device of other Devices while installing.
The following formula is used to calculate the Device Instance value:
COM-21–22
(COM-21 X 1000) + COM-22
BAC Dev
Therefore, in the Device Instance value, COM-21 takes the thousands
Inst 1–2
and higher places (fourth digit and over) and COM-22 takes the
hundreds and lower places (third digit and below). COM-21 and COM-22
have the ranges of 0–4194 and 0–999 respectively, because Device
Instance can have the value within 0–4,194,302.
Refers to the password used for Warm/Cold Start. COM-23 Password
parameter can be set within 0–32767, and the default value is 0. If the
parameter setting range is set to 1–32768, the Password value set at
COM-23
BACnet Master and the value set at COM-23 must be the same to
BAC Password
operate Warm/Cold Start.
If COM-23 Password is set to ‘0’, the password of BACnet Master is
ignored and Warm/Cold Start is operated.
Note
MaxMaster and MACID affect performing Network communication. It is recommended to set as
small value as possible, and to set the continuous value for MACID. If the values are set as
explained above, efficient Token Passing Configuration is possible because each Master tries to
give Token to Device set as its own (MACD+1).
379
RS-485 Communication Features
380
RS-485 Communication Features
Object Type
Property
Device BI BV AI AO MSI MVI
Firmware Revision O
Appl Software Revision O
Location O
Protocol Version O
Protocol Revision O
Services Supported O
Object Types Supported O
Object List O
Max APDU Length O
APDU Timeout O
Number APDU Retries O
Max Master O
Max Info Frames O
Device Address Binding O
Database Revision O
Preset Value O O O O O O
Description O O O O O O O
Status Flags O O O O O O
Event State O O O O O O
Reliability O O O O O O
Out-of-Service O O O O O O
Number of states O O
State text O O
Units O O
Polarity O
Active Text O O
Inactive Text O O
381
RS-485 Communication Features
You can read/write in Location and Description only if it is the device object. You can write a
maximum of 29 words.
• When PowerOn Resume (COM-96) is set to ‘yes’, value is saved even if the power of the
inverter is disconnected. When PowerOn Resume (COM-96) is set to ‘no’, value is not
saved if the power of the inverter is disconnected.
• A value higher than the maximum frequency (DRV-20) cannot be used. The maximum
frequency can be set by using the keypad. This value can be used when Freq Ref Src
(DRV-07) is set to ‘Int 485’.
• AV2, AV3 and AV4 are used to provide acceleration/deceleration rate and frequency
reference commands. These can be written in AUTO mode only.
382
RS-485 Communication Features
5: LostPreset
383
RS-485 Communication Features
384
RS-485 Communication Features
BI12 P1 P1 state R
BI13 P2 P2 state R
BI14 P3 P3 state R
385
RS-485 Communication Features
BI15 P4 P4 state R
BI16 P5 P5 state R
BI17 P6 P6 state R
BI18 P7 P7 state R
BI19 Relay1 Relay1 state* R
BI20 Relay2 Relay2 state* R
BI21 Relay3 Relay3 state* R
BI22 Relay4 Relay4 state* R
BI23 Relay5 Relay5 state* R
BI24 Q1 Q1 state R
BI25 SpeedSearch Speed search operating R
BI26 HWOCS H/W OCS occurred R
BI27 SWOCS S/W OCS occurred R
BI28 RunningDwell Dwell operating state R
BI29 SteadyState Steady state R
BI30 Warning Warning state R
Display Description
serviceserror+7 Inconsistent parameters
propertyerror+9 Invalid data type
serviceserror+10 Invalid access method
serviceserror+11 Invalid file start
serviceserror+29 Service request denied
objecterror+31 Unknown object
propertyerror+0 Property other
propertyerror+27 Read access denied
propertyerror+32 Unknown property
propertyerror+37 Value out of range
propertyerror+40 Write access denied
propertyerror+42 Invalid array index
clienterror+31 Unknown device
resourceserror+0 Resources other
clienterror+30 Time out
abortreason+4 Segmentation not supported
rejectreason+4 Invalid tag
clienterror+0xFF No invoke id
securityerror+26 Password failure
387
RS-485 Communication Features
Item Standards
388
RS-485 Communication Features
389
RS-485 Communication Features
• When PowerOn Resume (COM-96) is set to ‘yes’, value is saved even if the power of the
inverter is disconnected. If PowerOn Resume (COM-96) is set to ‘no’, value is not saved
when the power of the inverter is disconnected.
• Cannot set the value higher than the maximum frequency (DRV-20). The maximum
frequency can be set by using the keypad. This value can be used when Freq Ref Src
(DRV-07) is set to ‘Int 485’.
390
RS-485 Communication Features
391
Table of Functions
8 Table of Functions
This chapter lists all the function settings for the H100 series inverter. Use the references
listed in this document to set the parameters. If an entered set value is out of range, the
392
Table of Functions
messages that will be displayed on the keypad are also provided in this chapter. In these
situations, the [ENT] key will not operate to program the inverter.
Jump
00 - Jump Code 1–99 9 O p.68
Code
0.00, Low
Target Cmd
01 0h1101 Freq– High 0.00 O p.86
frequency Frequency
Freq
Keypad 0 Reverse
Keypad
02 0h1102 run 1 O p.84
Run Dir 1 Forward
direction
0.75~
20.0
90kW
Accelerati 110~
03 0h1103 Acc Time 0.0–600.0 (sec) 60.0 O p.111
on time 250kW
315~
100.0
500kW
0.75~
30.0
90kW
Decelerat 110~
04 0h1104 Dec Time 0.0–600.0 (sec) 90.0 O p.111
ion time 250kW
315~
150.0
500kW
0 Locked
HAND-
OFF- KPD H.O.A During
05 0h1105 1 1: During Run Δ p.75
AUTO Lock Run
Key Lock
2 Unlocked
393
Table of Functions
Comm. Prope
Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Initial value Ref.
Address rty*
2 Fx/Rx-2
3 Int 485
4 Field Bus
Time
5
Event
0 Keypad-1
1 Keypad-2
2 V1
4 V2
Frequenc
5 I2
y Freq Ref
07 0h1107 0: Keypad-1 Δ p.86
reference Src 6 Int 485
source
7 FieldBus
9 Pulse
108 V3
11 I3
0 V/F
Control Control p.121,
09 0h1109 Slip 0: V/F Δ
mode Mode 1 p.157,
Compen
0.00, Low
Jog Jog
11 0h110B Freq–High 10.00 O p.148
frequency Frequency
Freq
Jog run
Jog Acc
12 0h110C accelerati 0.0–600.0 (sec) 20.0 O p.148
Time
on time
Jog run
Jog Dec
13 0h110D decelerati 0.0–600.0 (sec) 30.0 O p.148
Time
on time
14 0h110E Motor Motor 0 0.2 Kw Dependent on Δ p.210
8
‘10(V3)~11(I3)’ of DRV-07 are available when Extension IO option is equipped. Refer to
Extension IO option manual for more detailed information.
394
Table of Functions
Comm. Prope
Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Initial value Ref.
Address rty*
395
Table of Functions
Comm. Prope
Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Initial value Ref.
Address rty*
37.0 kW
16
(50.0HP)
45.0 kW
17
(60.0HP)
55.0 kW
18
(75.0HP)
75.0kW
19
(100.0HP)
90.0kW
20
(125.0HP)
110.0kW
21
(150.0HP)
132.0kW
22
(220.0HP)
160.0kW
23
(250.0HP)
185.0kW
24
(300.0HP)
220.0kW
25
(350.0HP)
250.0kW
26
(400.0HP)
315.0kW
27
(500.0HP)
355.0kW
28
(550.0HP)
400.0kW
29
(650.0HP)
500.0kW
30
(800.0HP)
15 0h110F Torque Torque 0 Manual 0: Manual Δ p.125
396
Table of Functions
Comm. Prope
Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Initial value Ref.
Address rty*
0.75~
Forward 2.0
90kW
169 0h1110 Torque Fwd Boost 0.0–15.0 (%) Δ p.125
boost 110~
1.0
500kW
0.75~
Reverse 2.0
90kW
17 0h1111 Torque Rev Boost 0.0–15.0 (%) Δ p.125
boost 110~
1.0
500kW
Base 30.00–400.00
18 0h1112 Base Freq 60.00 Δ p.121
frequency (Hz)
Start 0.01–10.00
19 0h1113 Start Freq 0.50 Δ p.121
frequency (Hz)
Maximum 40.00-400.00
20 0h1114 Max Freq 60.00 Δ p.133
frequency (Hz)
Hz
Select 0
Hz/Rpm Display
21 0h1115 speed 0: Hz Display O p.101
Sel RPM
unit 1
Display
Hand
mode HAND 0.00, Low Freq-
25 0h1119 0.00 O p.81
operation Cmd Freq High Freq
frequency
Hand HAND
0
mode Parameter
operation
HAND Ref 0: HAND
26 0h111A Frequenc Δ p.81
Mode Follow Parameter
y 1
reference AUTO
source
kW/HP 0 kW
kW/HP Unit
30 0h111E unit 1:HP O -
Sel 1 HP
selection
9
DRV-16–17 are displayed when DRV-15 is set to ‘0 (Manual)’.
397
Table of Functions
Comm. Prope
Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Initial value Ref.
Address rty*
0 None
SmartDo
Smart 1
91 0h115B SmartCopy wnload 0:None Δ
Copy
SmartUpl
3
oad
Display
I/O S/W
98 0h1162 I/O,S/W - - - X -
Ver
Version
398
Table of Functions
1210 V3
13 I3
0 M+(G*A)
1 M* (G*A)
2 M/(G*A)
M+[M*(G*A)
3
]
Auxiliary
command Aux Calc M+G*2 *(A- 0:
0211 0h1202
calculation Type
4
50) M+(G*A)
Δ p.143
type M*[G*2*(A-
5
50)
M/[G*2*(A-
6
50)]
M+M*G*2*(
7
A-50)
Auxiliary
Aux Ref
03 0h1203 command -200.0-200.0 (%) 100.0 O p.143
Gain
gain
0 Keypad
1 Fx/Rx-1
Second 2 Fx/Rx-2
Cmd 2nd
04 0h1204 command 1: Fx/Rx-1 Δ p.137
Src 3 Int 485
source
4 FieldBus
5 Time Event
0 Keypad-1
Second
Freq 2nd 0:
05 0h1205 frequency 1 Keypad-2 O p.137
Src Keypad-1
source
2 V1
10
‘12(V3)~13(I3)’ of BAS-01 are available when Extension IO option is equipped. Refer to
Extension IO option manual for more detailed information.
11
BAS-02–03 are displayed when BAS-01 is not ‘0 (None)’.
399
Table of Functions
1012 V3
11 I3
0 Linear
V/F 1 Square
V/F
07 0h1207 pattern 0: Linear Δ p.121
Pattern 2 User V/F
options
3 Square 2
Acc/Dec 0 Max Freq
Ramp T 0: Max
08 0h1208 standard Δ p.111
Mode 1 Delta Freq Freq
frequency
0 0.01 sec
Time scale Time
09 0h1209 1 0.1 sec 1: 0.1 sec Δ p.111
settings Scale
2 1 sec
Input 0 60 Hz
60/50 Hz
10 0h120A power 0: 60 Hz Δ p.245
Sel 1 50 Hz
frequency
Number of
Pole
11 0h120B motor 2-48 Δ p.157
Number
poles
Dependen
Rated slip Rated
12 0h120C 0-3000 (RPM) t on motor Δ p.157
speed Slip
setting
Motor
Rated
13 0h120D rated 0.0-1000.0 (A) Δ p.157
Curr
current
12
‘10(V3)~11(I3)’ of BAS-05 are available when Extension IO option is equipped. Refer to
Extension IO option manual for more detailed information.
400
Table of Functions
13
BAS-41–48 are displayed when BAS-07 or M2-25 is set to ‘2 (User V/F)’.
401
Table of Functions
14
BAS-50–56 are displayed whenIN-65-71 is set to ‘Speed–L/M/H’.
402
Table of Functions
15
BAS-72–83 are displayed when IN-65–71is set to ‘Xcel-L/M/H’
403
Table of Functions
16
ADV-03–04 are displayed when ADV-01 is set to ‘1 (S-curve)’.
404
Table of Functions
Start 0 Acc
07 0h1307 Start Mode 0: Acc Δ p.128
Mode 1 DC-Start
0 Dec
1 DC-Brake
Stop
08 0h1308 Stop Mode 2 Free-Run 0: Dec Δ p.129
Mode
Power
4
Braking
0 None
Selection of
Forward
prohibited Run 1
09 0h1309 Prev 0: None Δ p.107
rotation Prevent
direction Reverse
2
Prev
17
ADV-05–06 are displayed when ADV-02 is set to ‘1 (S-curve)’.
18
ADV-11 is displayed when ADV-10 is set to ‘1 (YES)’.
405
Table of Functions
Output 0.75~
DC- 0.00
blocking 0.00- 60.00 90kW
1420 0h130E
time before
Block
(sec)
Δ p.129
Time 110~
DC braking 2.00
500kW
DC-
DC braking 0.00- 60.00
15 0h130F Brake 1.00 Δ p.129
time (sec)
Time
DC-
DC braking
16 0h1310 Brake 0–200 (%) 50 Δ p.129
rate
Level
DC-
DC braking Startfrequency-
17 0h1311 Brake 5.00 Δ p.129
frequency 60 Hz
Freq
Dwell
Acc Start frequency-
frequency
20 0h1314 Dwell Maximum 5.00 Δ p.155
on
Freq frequency (Hz)
acceleration
Dwell
Acc
operation
21 0h1315 Dwell 0.0-60.0 (sec) 0.0 Δ p.155
time on
Time
acceleration
Dwell
Dec Start frequency-
frequency
22 0h1316 Dwell Maximum 5.00 Δ p.155
on
Freq frequency (Hz)
deceleration
Dwell
Dec
operation
23 0h1317 Dwell 0.0-60.0 (sec) 0.0 Δ p.155
time on
Time
deceleration
19
ADV-12 is displayed when ADV-07 is set to ‘1 (DC-Start)’.
20
ADV-14 is displayed when ADV-08 is set to ‘1 (DC-Brake)’.
406
Table of Functions
Frequency Freq 0 No
24 0h1318 0: No Δ p.133
limit Limit 1 Yes
Frequency
Freq 0.00-Upper limit
25 0h1319 lower limit 0.50 Δ p.133
Limit Lo frequency (Hz)
value
Lower limit
Frequency
Freq frequency-
26 0h131A upper limit Max freq Δ p.133
Limit Hi Maximum
value
frequency (Hz)
Frequency Jump 0 No
27 0h131B 0: No Δ p.136
jump Freq 1 Yes
Jump 0.00-Jump
Jump
2821 0h131C frequency
Lo 1
frequency upper 10.00 O p.136
lower limit1 limit1 (Hz)
Jump frequency
Jump
Jump Hi lower limit1-
29 0h131D frequency 15.00 O p.136
1 Maximum
upper limit1
frequency (Hz)
Jump 0.00-Jump
Jump
30 0h131E frequency frequency upper 20.00 O p.136
Lo 2
lower limit2 limit2 (Hz)
Jump frequency
Jump
Jump Hi lower limit2-
31 0h131F frequency 25.00 O p.136
2 Maximum
upper limit2
frequency (Hz)
Jump 0.00-Jump
Jump
32 0h1320 frequency frequency upper 30.00 O p.136
Lo 3
lower limit3 limit3 (Hz)
Jump frequency
Jump
Jump Hi lower limit3-
33 0h1321 frequency 35.00 O p.136
3 Maximum
upper limit3
frequency (Hz)
21
ADV-28–33 are displayed when ADV-27 is set to ‘1 (Yes)’.
407
Table of Functions
Energy
E-Save
52 0h1334 saving point 0.0-100.0 (sec) 20.0 Δ p.232
Det T
search time
Acc/Dec
Xcel
time 0.00-Maximum
60 0h133C Change 0.00 Δ p.115
transition frequency (Hz)
Fr
frequency
0 During Run
Cooling fan Fan 1 Always ON 0: During
64 0h1340 O p.244
control Control Run
Temp
2
Control
Up/Down 0 No
U/D
operation
65 0h1341 Save 0: No O p.150
frequency
Mode 1 Yes
save
0 None
1 V1
Output 3 V2
contact 4 I2
On/Off
66 0h1342 On/Off 0: None O p.282
Ctrl Src 6 Pulse
control
options 7
23 V3
8 I3
67 0h1343 Output On-Ctrl Output contact 90.00 Δ p.282
22
ADV-51 is displayed when ADV-50 is set to ‘1 (Manual)’.
ADV-52 is displayed when ADV-50 is set to ‘2 (Auto)’.
23
‘10(V3)~11(I3)’ of ADV-66 are available when Extension IO option is equipped. Refer to
Extension IO option manual for more detailed information.
408
Table of Functions
Compensati
on
frequency
CompFr
7625 0h134C limit of
eq Limit
0.00-10.00 Hz 1.00 Δ p.289
regeneratio
n evasion
for press
24
ADV-71–72 are displayed when ADV-70 is set to ‘1 (DI Dependent)’.
25
ADV-76–78 are displayed when ADV-74 is set to ‘1 (Yes)’.
409
Table of Functions
410
Table of Functions
411
Table of Functions
Speed Flying
0
search Start-1 0:
70 0h1446 SS Mode Δ p.234
mode Flying Flying Start-1
selection 1
Start-2
0000-
Bit
1111
Speed
search
Bit
on
0
accelerat
ion
Restart
after
Speed
Bit trips
search Speed
71 0h1447 1 (other 0000 Δ p.234
operation Search
than LV
selection
trip)
Restart
after
Bit instantan
2 eous
interrupti
on
Bit Power-
3 on run
Speed SS Sup- 0.75~
7227 0h1448
search Current
50–120 (%) 90
250kW
O p.234
26
CON-21–22 are displayed when DRV-15 is set to ‘Auto 2’.
27
CON-72 is displayed after Flying Start-1 and when any CON-71 bit is set to ‘1’.
412
Table of Functions
28
CON-73–75 are displayed when any CON-71bit is set to ‘1’.
29
CON-78–83 are displayed when CON-77 is set to ‘1 (Yes)’.
413
Table of Functions
Energy 0.75~
10.0
buffering KEB Acc 90kW
83 0h1453 0.0-600.0 O p.190
acceleration Time 110~
time 30.0
500kW
30
‘IN-05’ setting range can be changed according to the ‘IN-06’ settings.
414
Table of Functions
p.오류
!
책갈피
가
V1 input at
V1 –Volt 정의되
1231 0h150C minimum
x1’
-10.00- 0.00 (V) 0.00 O
voltage (%) 어
있지
않습니
다.
p.오류
!
책갈피
가
Output at V1
V1 –Perc 정의되
13 0h150D minimum -100.00-0.00 (%) 0.00 O
y1’
voltage (%) 어
있지
않습니
다.
14 0h150E
V1 maximum V1 –Volt
-12.00- 0.00 (V) -10.00 O p.오류
input voltage x2’ !
31
IN-12–17 are displayed when IN-06 is set to ‘1 (Bipolar)’.
415
Table of Functions
p.오류
!
책갈피
가
Output at V1
V1 –Perc 정의되
15 0h150F maximum -100.00-0.00 (%) -100.00 O
y2’
voltage (%) 어
있지
않습니
다.
V2 rotation 0 No
V1
16 0h1510 direction 0: No O p.88
Inverting
change 1 Yes
17 0h1511
V1quantizatio V1 0.0032, 0.04- 0.04 O p.88
n change Quantizing 10.00 (%)
Temperature 0.00 - 100.00
2033 0h1514
monitor
T1 Monitor
(%)
- X p.309
32
* Quantizing is disabled if ‘0’ is selected.
33
IN-20 is displayed when the analog current/voltage input circuit selection switch (SW3) is
selected on T1.
34
IN-35–47 are displayed when the analog current/voltage input circuit selection switch
(SW4) is selected on V2.
416
Table of Functions
I2 input filter
52 0h1534 I2 Filter 0–10000 (msec) 10 O p.93
time
I2 minimum
53 0h1535 input power I2 Curr x1 0.00-20.00 (mA) 4.00 O p.93
supply
Output at I2
54 0h1536 maximum I2 Perc y1 0.00-100.00 (%) 0.00 O p.93
current (%)
I2 maximum I2 Curr x1 -
55 0h1537 I2 Curr x2 20.00 O p.93
input current 24.00 (mA)
Output at I2
56 0h1538 maximum I2 Perc y2 0.00-100.00 (%) 100.00 O p.93
current (%)
35
* Quantizing is disabled if ‘0’ is selected.
36
IN-50–62 are displayed when the analog current/voltage input circuit selection switch
(SW5) is selected on I2.
417
Table of Functions
62 0h153E
I2 Quantizing I2 0.0037 0.04 O p.93
level Quantizing 0.04-10.00 (%)
P1 Px 0 None
65 0h1541 terminal P1 Define 1: Fx Δ p.103
configuration 1 Fx
P2 Px
66 0h1542 terminal P2 Define 2 Rx 2: Rx Δ p.103
configuration
P3 Px
67 0h1543 terminal P3 Define 3 RST 5: BX Δ p.329
configuration
P4 Px
External
68 0h1544 terminal P4 Define 4 3: RST Δ p.328
Trip
configuration
P5 Px
69 0h1545 terminal P5 Define 5 BX 7: Sp-L Δ p.328
configuration
P6 Px
70 0h1546 terminal P6 Define 6 JOG 8: Sp-M Δ p.148
configuration
P7 Px
71 0h1547 terminal P7 Define 7 Speed-L 9: Sp-H Δ p.101
configuration
8 Speed-M p.101
9 Speed-H p.101
11 XCEL-L p.113
12 XCEL-M p.113
13 XCEL-H p.113
XCEL
14 p.119
Stop
37
* Quantizing is disabled if ‘0’ is selected.
418
Table of Functions
419
Table of Functions
420
Table of Functions
Multi-function
input terminal DI On
85 0h1555 0–10000 (msec) 10 O p.138
On filter Delay
Multi-function
DI Off
86 0h1556 input terminal 0–10000 (msec) 3 O p.138
Delay
Off filter
000 0000 –
111 1111
Multi-function
DI NC/NO A Terminal 000
87 0h1557 input terminal 0 Δ p.138
Sel (NO) 0000
selection
B Terminal
1
(NC)
Multi-step
InCheck
89 0h1559 command 1–5000 (msec) 1 Δ p.101
Time
delay time
000 0000 –
111 1111
Multi-function
000
90 0h155A input terminal DI Status Contact O p.138
0 0000
status (Off)
1 Contact
38
‘53(Interlock6)~55(Interlock8)’ of IN-65~71 are available when Extension IO option is
equipped. Refer to Extension IO option manual for more detailed information
421
Table of Functions
39
Quantizing is disabled if ‘0’ is selected.
422
Table of Functions
423
Table of Functions
424
Table of Functions
425
Table of Functions
Multi-
function DO DO Status
41 0h1629 00 0000 X p.295
output Status (00 0000 – 11 1111)
monitor
Multi- DO On
50 0h1632 0.00-100.00 (sec) 0.00 O p.301
function Delay
426
Table of Functions
Multi-
function DO Off
51 0h1633 0.00-100.00 (sec) 0.00 O p.301
output Delay
Off delay
Q1,Relay5-Relay1
Multi- (00 0000 – 11 1111)
function DO
A contact
52 0h1634 output NC/NO 0 00 0000 Δ p.301
(NO)
contact Sel
selection B contact
1
(NC)
Fault
TripOut
53 0h1635 output 0.00-100.00 (sec) 0.00 O p.300
OnDly
On delay
Fault
TripOut
54 0h1636 output 0.00-100.00 (sec) 0.00 O p.300
OffDly
Off delay
Timer TimerO
55 0h1637 0.00-100.00 (sec) 0.00 O p.254
On delay n Delay
Timer Off TimerOf
56 0h1638 0.00-100.00 (sec) 0.00 O p.254
delay f Delay
Detected FDT
0.00-Maximum
57 0h1639 frequenc Freque 30.00 O p.295
frequency (Hz)
y ncy
Detected
FDT 0.00-Maximum
58 0h163A frequenc 10.00 O p.295
Band frequency (Hz)
y band
0 Frequency
Output
1
Current
Pulse
TO Output
61 0h163D output 2 0: Frequency O p.293
Mode Voltage
item
DCLink
3
Voltage
4 Output Power
427
Table of Functions
428
Table of Functions
40
If AP1-40 is set to ‘4(Serve Drv)’, MaxComID is ‘8’, and if COM-02 is set to ‘4(BACnet),
MaxComID is ‘127’. Otherwise MaxComID is ‘250’.
41
COM-02 is automatically set to ‘6(Modbus Master)’ when AP1-40 is set to ‘2 or 3’.
Otherwise a user can set the parameter value at user’s choice.
429
Table of Functions
8 115.2 Kbps42
Built-in 0 D8/PN/S1
communic 1 D8/PN/S2
Int485 0:
04 0h1704 ation O p.341
Mode 2 D8/PE/S1 D8/PN/S1
frame
setting 3 D8/PO/S1
Transmiss
ion delay Resp
05 0h1705 0-1000 (msec) 5 O p.341
after Delay
reception
Communic FBus
ation S/W Ver
0643 0h1706 - - O -
option S/W
version
Communi
cation
07 0h1707 FBus ID 0-255 1 O -
option
inverter ID
FIELD
BUS FBUS
08 0h1708 communic BaudRat - 12 Mbps O -
ation e
speed
Communi
cation
FieldBus
09 0h1709 option - - O -
LED
LED
status
BACnet
BAC
maximum
20 0h1714 Max 1~127 127 O p.377
master
Master
number
21 0h1715 BACnet BAC 0~4194 237 O p.377
42
115,200 bps
43
COM-06–09 are displayed only when a communication option card is installed.
Please refer to the communication option manual for details.
430
Table of Functions
Number of
ParaStat
30 0h171E output 0-8 3 O p.348
usNum
parameters
Output
Communi Para
31 0h171F 0000-FFFF Hex 000A O p.348
cation Status-1
address1
Output
Communi Para
32 0h1720 0000-FFFF Hex 000E O p.348
cation Status-2
address2
Output
Para
Communi
33 0h1721 Statuss- 0000-FFFF Hex 000F O p.348
cation
3
address3
Output
Communi Para
34 0h1722 0000-FFFF Hex 0000 O p.348
cation Status-4
address4
Output
Communi Para
35 0h1723 0000-FFFF Hex 0000 O p.348
cation Status-5
address5
Output
Communi Para
36 0h1724 0000-FFFF Hex 0000 O p.348
cation Status-6
address6
37 0h1725 Output Para 0000-FFFF Hex 0000 O p.348
431
Table of Functions
432
Table of Functions
433
Table of Functions
434
Table of Functions
53
44 Interlock6
54 Interlock7
55 Interlock8
Communi
cation
multi- Virt DI 0000 0000
86 0h1756 0000 0000 Δ p.345
function Status – 1111 1111
input
monitoring
44
‘53 (Interlock6)~55(Interlock8)’ of ADV-66 are available when Extension IO option is
equipped. Refer to Extension IO option manual for more detailed information.
435
Table of Functions
PID mode 0 No
01 0h1801 PID Sel 0: No Δ p.159
selection 1 Yes
E-PID 0 No
02 0h1802 E-PID Sel 0: No O p.178
selection 1 Yes
PID output PID
03 0h1803 - - X p.159
monitor Output
PID
PID Ref
04 0h1804 reference - - X p.159
Value
monitor
PID
PID Fdb
05 0h1805 feedback - - X p.159
Value
monitor
436
Table of Functions
11 I3
PID
reference 1 PID Ref 1 Unit Min–Unit Unit
11 0h180B O p.159
keypad Set Max Default
value
0 None
1 V1
3 V2
PID 4 I2
reference 1
PIDRef1A 6 Pulse
12 0h180C auxiliary 0: None Δ p.159
uxSrc
source 7 Int 485
selection
8 FieldBus
EPID1
10
Output
11 E-PID Fdb
45
‘10(V3)~11(I3)’ of PID-10 are available when Extension IO option is equipped. Refer to
Extension IO option manual for more detailed information.
437
Table of Functions
13 I3
0 M+(G*A)
1 M*(G*A)
2 M/(G*A)
3 M+(M*(G*A))
M+G*2*(A-
4
50)
M*(G*2*(A-
5
PID 50))
reference 1 PID M/(G*2*(A- 0:
13 0h180D auxiliary Ref1AuxM 6 50)) O p.159
M+(G*A)
mode od
selection M+M*G*2*(A
7
-50)
8 (M-A)^2
9 M^2+A^2
10 MAX(M,A)
11 MIN(M,A)
12 (M + A)/2
13 Root(M+A)
PID
reference PID Ref1
14 0h180E -200.0–200.0 (%) 0.0 O p.159
auxiliary Aux G
gain
46
‘12(V3)~13(I3)’ of PID-12 are available when Extension IO option is equipped. Refer to
Extension IO option manual for more detailed information.
438
Table of Functions
11 I3
PID
reference 2 PID Ref 2 Unit Min–Unit Unit
16 0h1810 O p.159
keypad Set Max Default
setting
0 None
1 V1
3 V2
4 I2
6 Pulse
PID
reference 2 PID 7 Int 485
17 0h1811 auxiliary Ref2AuxS 0: None Δ p.159
8 FieldBus
source rc
selection EPID1
10
Output
EPID1 Fdb
11
Val
12
48 V3
47
‘10(V3)~11(I3)’ of PID-15 are available when Extension IO option is equipped. Refer to
Extension IO option manual for more detailed information.
48
‘12(V3)~13(I3)’ of PID-17 are available when Extension IO option is equipped. Refer to
439
Table of Functions
440
Table of Functions
11 I3
0 None
1 V1
3 V2
4 I2
6 Pulse
PID 7 Int 485
feedback
PID Fdb 8 FieldBus
21 0h1815 auxiliary 0: None Δ p.159
Aux Src
source EPID1
selection 10
Output
EPID1 Fdb
11
Val
12
50 V3
13 I3
0 M+(G*A)
PID
1 M*(G*A)
feedback PID
0:
22 0h1816 auxiliary FdbAuxM 2 M/(G*A) O p.159
M+(G*A)
mode od
3 M+(M*(G*A))
selection
4 M+G*2*(A-
49
‘10(V3)~11(I3)’ of PID-20 are available when Extension IO option is equipped. Refer to
Extension IO option manual for more detailed information.
50
‘12(V3)~13(I3)’ of PID-21 are available when Extension IO option is equipped. Refer to
Extension IO option manual for more detailed information.
441
Table of Functions
442
Table of Functions
443
Table of Functions
PID 4 ˚C
controller PID Unit
50 0h1832 5 inWC 1: % O p.159
unit Sel
selection 6 inM
7 mBar
8 Bar
9 Pa
10 kPa
11 Hz
12 rpm
444
Table of Functions
445
Table of Functions
446
Table of Functions
EPID 1 1 Always ON
EPID1
01 0h1901 Mode 2 During Run 0: None O p.178
Mode
Selection
DI
3
dependent
EPID1out
put EPID1
0252 0h1902
monitor Output
-100.00–100.00% 0.00 X p.178
value
EPID1 EPID1
03 0h1903 standard - - X p.178
Ref Val
monitor
value
EPID1
feedback EPID1
04 0h1904 - - X p.178
monitor Fdb Val
value
EPID1erro
EPID1
05 0h1905 r monitor - - X p.178
Err Val
value
51
EPID Group is displayed when PID-02 code is set to 'Yes'.
52
EPID-02–20 are displayed when EPID-01 code is not ‘0 (None)’.
447
Table of Functions
953 V3
10 I3
EPID1
keypad EPID1 Unit Min–Unit
07 0h1907 Unit Min O p.178
command Ref Set Max
value
0 V1
2 V2
3 I2
EPID1
4 Int485
feedback EPID1
08 0h1908 0: V1 O p.178
source FdbSrc 5 FieldBus
selection
7 Pulse
854 V3
9 I3
EPID1
EPID1
09 0h1909 proportion 0.00–300.00 (%) 50.00 O p.178
P-Gain
al gain
EPID1
EPID1 I-
10 0h190A integral 0.0–200.0 (sec) 10.0 O p.178
Time
time
53
‘9(V3)~10(I3)’ of EPID-06 are available when Extension IO option is equipped. Refer to
Extension IO option manual for more detailed information.
54
‘8(V3)~9(I3)’ of EPID-08 are available when Extension IO option is equipped. Refer to
Extension IO option manual for more detailed information.
448
Table of Functions
449
Table of Functions
EPID2 1 Always ON
EPID2
31 0h191F Mode 2 During Run 0: None O p.178
Mode
selection
DI
3
dependent
EPID2
55 output EPID2
32 0h1920 -100.00–100.00% 0.00 X p.178
monitor Output
value
EPID2
reference EPID2
33 0h1921 - - X p.178
monitor Ref Val
value
EPID2
feedback EPID2
34 0h1922 - - X p.178
monitor Fdb Val
value
EPID2
error EPID2
35 0h1923 - - X p.178
monitor Err Val
value
55
EPID-32–50 are displayed when EPID-31 code is not ‘0 (None)’.
450
Table of Functions
956 V3
10 I3
EPID2
keypad EPID2 Unit Min–Unit
37 0h1925 Unit Min O p.178
command Ref Set Max
value
0 V1
2 V2
3 I2
EPID2
4 Int 485
feedback EPID2
38 0h1926 0: V1 O p.178
source FdbSrc 5 FieldBus
selection
7 Pulse
857 V3
9 I3
EPID2
EPID2
39 0h1927 proportion 0.00–300.00 (%) 50.0 O p.178
P-Gain
al gain
56
‘9(V3)~10(I3)’ of EPID-36 are available when Extension IO option is equipped. Refer to
Extension IO option manual for more detailed information.
57
‘8(V3)~9(I3)’ of EPID-38 are available when Extension IO option is equipped. Refer to
Extension IO option manual for more detailed information.
451
Table of Functions
452
Table of Functions
X Unit Min–
100 30000
Unit Min–
X10
3000.0
Values
EPID2
vary
EPID2 unit Unit100 Unit Min–
50 0h1932 X1 depending O p.178
0% value % 300.00 on the unit
setting
X Unit Min–
0.1 30.000
X Unit Min–
0.01 3.0000
453
Table of Functions
454
Table of Functions
58
Set PID-1 to 'YES' to configure AP1-40.
455
Table of Functions
Bypass Regul 0 No
4159 0h1A29
selection Bypass
0: No Δ p.38
1 Yes
Number of
Num of
42 0h1A2A auxiliary 1–5 5 Δ p.256
Aux
motors
Select starting Starting
43 0h1A2B 1–5 1 Δ p.256
auxiliary motor Aux
Display the
number of Aux
44 0h1A2C running Motor - - X p.256
auxiliary Run
motors
Display
auxiliary Aux
45 0h1A2D - - X p.256
motors 1– 4 Priority 1
priority
Display
auxiliary Aux
46 0h1A2E - - X p.256
motors 5– 8 Priority 2
priority
Auxiliary motor 0 No
Aux All
48 0h1A30 options for 1: Yes O p.256
Stop 1 Yes
inverter stop
0 FILO
Aux
Auxiliary motor 1 FIFO
49 0h1A31 On/Off 0: FILO Δ p.256
stop order.
Seq Op time
2
Order
59
Set AP1-40 to ' Single Ctrl ' to configure AP1-41.
456
Table of Functions
457
Table of Functions
60
API-60 only appears when AP1-40 MMC Sel is set to '2' or '3'.
458
Table of Functions
#6 auxiliary
Stop Low Freq–
75 0h1A4B motor stop 20.00 O p.256
Freq 6 High Freq
frequency
#7 auxiliary
Stop Low Freq–
76 0h1A4C motor stop 20.00 O p.256
Freq 7 High Freq
frequency
#8 auxiliary
Stop Low Freq–
77 0h1A4D motor stop 20.00 O p.256
Freq 8 High Freq
frequency
#1 auxiliary
Aux1
motor’s
80 0h1A50 Ref 0.00–Unit Band 0.00 O p.256
reference
Comp
compensation
#2 auxiliary Aux2
81 0h1A51 motor Ref 0.00–Unit Band 0.00 O p.256
reference Comp
compensation
#3 auxiliary Aux3
82 0h1A52 motor Ref 0.00–Unit Band 0.00 O p.256
reference Comp
compensation
#4 auxiliary Aux4
83 0h1A53 motor Ref 0.00–Unit Band 0.00 O p.256
reference Comp
compensation
#5 auxiliary Aux5
84 0h1A54 motor Ref 0.00–Unit Band 0.00 O p.256
reference Comp
compensation
#6 auxiliary Aux6
85 0h1A55 motor Ref 0.00–Unit Band 0.00 O p.256
reference Comp
compensation
459
Table of Functions
Operation
time(Day) of AuxRun
96 0h1A60 Auxiliary motor Time 0 – 65535 0 O
selected in Day
[AP1-95]
61
AP1-95~98 is available when MMC and Master Follower functions are performed.
460
Table of Functions
Operation time
of Auxiliary
AuxRun
97 0h1A61 motor selected 00:00 - 23:59 00:00 O
Time Min
in [AP1-95]
(Hour:Minute)
0 None
1 All
2 Aux 1
3 Aux 2
Deleting
operation time AuxRun 4 Aux 3
98 0h1A62 0: None O
of Auxiliary Time Clr 5 Aux 4
motor
6 Aux 5
7 Aux 6
8 Aux 7
9 Aux 8
461
Table of Functions
Base
Low Freq Load Fit
02 0h1B02 Freq*15%–Load 30.00 Δ p.199
load curve Lfreq
Fit HFreq
Current Load
11 0h1B0B - - X p.199
load curve Curve Cur
Power load Load
12 0h1B0C - - X p.199
curve Curve Pwr
0 None
DI
Pump 1
Pump clean Dependent
15 0h1B0F Clean 0: None O p.192
setting1 Output
Mode1 2
Power
3 Output
62
Set the operation mode to AUTO to configure AP2-01.
462
Table of Functions
Pump 1 Start
Pump clean
16 0h1B10 Clean 2 Stop 0: None Δ p.192
setting2
Mode2
Start and
3
Stop
Pump clean PC Curve
17 0h1B11 0.1–200.0 (%) 100.0 O p.192
load setting Rate
Pump clean
PC Curve
18 0h1B12 reference 0.0–100.0 (%) 5.0 O p.192
Band
band
Pump clean
PC Curve
19 0h1B13 operation 0.0–6000.0 (sec) 60.0 O p.192
DT
delay time
Pump clean
PC Start
20 0h1B14 start delay 0.0–6000.0 (sec) 10.0 O p.192
DT
time
0 speed
operating PC Step
21 0h1B15 0.1–6000.0 (sec) 5.0 O p.192
time at Fx/Rx DT
switching
Pump clean PC Acc
22 0h1B16 0.0–600.0 (sec) 10.0 O p.192
Acc time Time
Pump clean PC Dec
23 0h1B17 0.0–600.0 (sec) 10.0 O p.192
Dec time Time
Forward step
FwdStead
24 0h1B18 maintaining 0.0–600.0 (sec) 10.0 O p.192
yTime
time
Forward
step FwdStead 0.00, Low Freq–
25 0h1B19 30.00 O p.192
maintaining yFreq High Freq
frequency
Reverse Rev
26 0h1B1A step running SteadyTi 0.0–600.0 (sec) 10.0 O p.192
time me
Reverse Rev 0.00, Low Freq–
27 0h1B1B 30.00 O p.192
step SteadyFre High Freq
463
Table of Functions
Dec Valve
Dec Valve Low Freq–
38 0h1B26 operation 40.00 O p.198
Freq High Freq
frequency
464
Table of Functions
Lubrication
Lub Op
46 0h1B2E operation 0.0–600.0 (sec) 5.0 O p.189
Time
time
Saved Cost
Saved
93 0h1B5D over 1000 - - X p.191
Cost2
unit
Saved CO2 CO2
94 0h1B5E conversion Factor 0.0–5.0 0.0 O p.191
Factor
Saved CO2 Saved
95 0h1B5F - - X p.191
(Ton) CO2 – 1
63
AP2-48–49 are displayed when IN-65–71is set to ‘Pre-Heat’.
465
Table of Functions
Saved Reset 0 No
97 0h1B61 0: No Δ p.191
energy reset Energy 1 Yes
466
Table of Functions
64
The date format can be changed according to the AP3-06 settings.
467
Table of Functions
Time Period2
Period2 0: 00–24: 00
14 0h1C0E Start time 24: 00 O p.213
Start T (min)
configuration
Time Period2
Period2 Period2 Start T –
15 0h1C0F End time 24: 00 O p.213
Stop T 24: 00 (min)
configuration
Time Period2
Day of the Period2 000 0000 –
16 0h1C10 000 0000 O p.213
week Day 111 1111 (Bit)
configuration
Time Period3
Period3 0: 00–24: 00
17 0h1C11 Start time 24: 00 O p.213
Start T (min)
configuration
Time Period3
Period3 Period3 Start T –
18 0h1C12 End time 24: 00 O p.213
Stop T 24: 00 (min)
configuration
Time Period3
Day of the Period3 000 0000 –
19 0h1C13 000 0000 O p.213
week Day 111 1111 (Bit)
configuration
Time Period4
Period4 0: 00–24: 00
20 0h1C14 Start time 24: 00 O p.213
Start T (min)
configuration
Time Period4
Period4 Period4 Start T –
21 0h1C15 End time 24: 00 O p.213
Stop T 24: 00 (min)
configuration
Time Period
Day of the Period4 000 0000 –
22 0h1C16 000 0000 O p.213
week Day 111 1111 (Bit)
configuration
Except1
Date Except1 0: 00–24: 00
30 0h1C1E 24: 00 O p.213
Start time Start T (min)
configuration
Except1 Except1 Except1 StartT –
31 0h1C1F 24: 00 O p.213
Date Stop T 24: 00 (min)
468
Table of Functions
469
Table of Functions
Except6
Except6 01/01–12/31
47 0h1C2F Date 01/01 O p.213
Date (Date)
configuration
Except7
Date Start Except7 0: 00–24: 00
48 0h1C30 24: 00 O p.213
time Start T (min)
configuration
Except7
Date End Except7 Except7 StartT –
49 0h1C31 24: 00 O p.213
time Stop T 24: 00 (min)
configuration
Except7
Except7 01/01–12/31
50 0h1C32 Date 01/01 O p.213
Date (Date)
configuration
Except8
Date Start Except8 0: 00–24: 00
51 0h1C33 24: 00 O p.213
time Start T (min)
configuration
Except8 Except8 Except8 StartT –
52 0h1C34 24: 00 O p.213
Date End Stop T 24: 00 (min)
470
Table of Functions
Except8
Except8 01/01–12/31
53 0h1C35 Date 01/01 O p.213
Date (Date)
configuration
Time Event 0 No
Time
70 0h1C46 function 0: NO Δ p.213
Event En 1 Yes
configuration
Time Event
T-Event 0000 0000 –
71 0h1C47 configuration 0000 0000 X p.213
Status 1111 1111
status
Time Event T-Event1 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
72 0h1C48 1 connection Δ p.213
Period –1111 1111 1111 0000
status
0 None
1 Fx
2 Rx
3 Speed-L
4 Speed-M
5 Speed-H
7 Xcel-L
8 Xcel-M
471
Table of Functions
22 EPID1 Run
EPID1
23
ITermClr
24 Pre Heat
25 EPID2 Run
EPID2
26
ITermClr
Sleep
27
Wake Chg
28 PID Step
Ref L
PID Step
29
Ref M
30 PID Step
Ref H
Time Event
T-Event2 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
74 0h1C4A 2 connection Δ p.213
Period –1111 1111 1111 0000
configuration
Identical to the
Time Event T-Event2
75 0h1C4B setting range for 0: None Δ p.213
2 functions Define
AP3-73
Time Event
T-Event2 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
76 0h1C4C 3 connection Δ p.213
Period –1111 1111 1111 0000
configuration
Identical to the
Time Event T-Event3
77 0h1C4D setting range for 0: None Δ p.213
3 functions Define
AP3-73
472
Table of Functions
Time Event
T-Event5 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
80 0h1C50 5 connection Δ p.213
Period –1111 1111 1111 0000
configuration
Identical to the
Time Event T-Event5
81 0h1C51 setting range for 0: None Δ p.213
5 functions Define
AP3-73
Time Event 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
T-Event6
82 0h1C52 6 connection Δ p.213
Period –1111 1111 1111 0000
configuration
Identical to the
Time Event T-Event6
83 0h1C53 setting range for 0: None Δ p.213
6 functions Define
AP3-73
Time Event
T-Event7 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
84 0h1C54 7 connection Δ p.213
Period –1111 1111 1111 0000
configuration
Same setting
Time Event T-Event7
85 0h1C55 range for 0: None Δ p.213
7 functions Define
AP3-73
Time Event
T-Event8 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
86 0h1C56 8 connection Δ p.213
Period –1111 1111 1111 0000
configuration
473
Table of Functions
Number of
Retry
09 0h1D09 automatic 0–10 0 O p.238
Number
restarts
Automatic
Retry
10 0h1D0A restart delay 0.1–600.0 (sec) 5.0 O p.238
Delay
time
Keypad 0 None
Lost
command
11 0h1D0B KPD 1 Warning O p.320
loss operation
Mode 0: None
mode 2 Free-Run
474
Table of Functions
65
PRT-13–15 are displayed when PRT-12 is not set to ‘0 (NONE)’.
475
Table of Functions
0 None
Operation at
motor Thermal
34 0h1D22 1 Free-Run 0: None O p.309
overheat -T Sel
detection
2 Dec
476
Table of Functions
Motor
overheat Thermal
3866 0h1D26
detection Monitor
- - X p.309
sensor
Electronic 0 None
thermal
ETH Trip 1 Free-Run
40 0h1D28 prevention 0: None O p.307
Sel
fault trip
selection 2 Dec
0 Self-cool
Motor cooling Motor
41 0h1D29 Forced- 0: Self-cool O p.307
fan type Cooling 1
cool
Electronic
ETH 1 ETH Cont–150
42 0h1D2A thermal one 120 O p.307
min (%)
minute rating
Electronic
thermal
ETH
43 0h1D2B prevention 50–120 (%) 100 O p.307
Cont
continuous
rating
Fire
Fire mode
44 0h1D2C Mode 0~9999 3473 O p.230
password
PW
0 None
Fire
Fire mode
4567 0h1D2D
setting
Mode 1 Fire Mode 0: None O p.320
Sel
2 Test Mode
66
PRT-38 is displayed when PRT-34 is not set to ‘0 (NONE)’.
67
PRT-45 can only be set when PRT-44 is in Fire mode. To change the mode in PRT-44,
create a new password for PRT-44.
477
Table of Functions
68
PRT-46–47 are displayed when PRT-45 is not set to ‘0 (NONE)’.
69
When Fire mode is set at PRT-45, PRT-46 is automatically set to forward, and the
frequency set at PRT-47 cannot be edited. When PRT-45 is set to Test mode, PRT-46 and
PRT-47 settings are editable.
478
Table of Functions
0 None
Pipe break 1 Warning
PipeBro
60 0h1D3C detection 0: None O p.206
kenSel 2 Free-Run
setting
3 Dec
Pipe break
PipeBro
61 0h1D3D detection 0.0–100.0 (%) 97.5 O p.206
ken Lev
variation
Pipe break PipeBro 0.0–6000.0
62 0h1D3E 10.0 O p.206
detection time ken DT (Sec)
Braking DB
66 0h1D42 resistor Warn % 0–30 (%) 0 O p.324
configuration ED
0 None
Level detect 1 Warning
70 0h1D46 mode LDT Sel 0: None O p.202
selection 2 Free-Run
3 Dec
479
Table of Functions
2 Output
Voltage
3 kW
4 HP
5 V1
6 V2
7 I2
Level detect LDT 0: Output
72 0h1D48 O p.202
source Source PID Ref Current
8
Value
9 PID Fdb
Value
10 PID
Output
11 EPID1 Fdb
Val
EPID2 Fdb
12
Val
13 V3
14 I3
Level detect LDT
73 0h1D49 0–9999 (sec) 2 O p.202
delay time DlyTime
Level detect
LDT Source
74 0h1D4A standard set Source setting O p.202
Level setting
value
480
Table of Functions
Operation 0 None
mode on Opt Trip
80 0h1D50 1 Free-Run 1: Free-Run O p.329
optional card Mode
trip 2 Dec
Low voltage
LVT
81 0h1D51 trip decision 0.0–60.0 (sec) 0.0 Δ p.327
Delay
delay time
Low voltage 0 No
trip decision LV2
82 0h1D52 0: No Δ p.327
during Trip Sel
operation 1 Yes
Remaining
capacitor life CAP.Dia
83 0h1D53 10–100 (%) 0 O p.332
diagnosis gPerc
level
0 None
3 Cap.Init
Capacitor life
CAP.
85 0h1D55 diagnosis 50.0–95.0 (%) 0.0 Δ p.332
Level1
level 1
70
PRT-84 is displayed when PRT-83 is set to more than ‘0(%)’. PRT- 84 can only be set in
Auto-State.
481
Table of Functions
71
PRT-86 is read only.
72
PRT-96-98 are displayed when PRT-70 is not set to ‘0 (NONE)’.
482
Table of Functions
483
Table of Functions
0.75 kW
2
Motor M2- (1.0HP)
06 0h1E06 - Δ p.241
capacity Capacity 1.1 kW
3
(1.5HP)
1.5 kW
4
(2.0HP)
2.2 kW
5
(3.0HP)
484
Table of Functions
3.7 kW
7
(5.0HP)
4.0 kW
8
(5.5HP)
5.5 kW
9
(7.5HP)
7.5 Kw
10
(10.0HP)
11.0 kW
11
(15.0HP)
15.0 kW
12
(20.0HP)
18.5 kW
13
(25.0HP)
22.0 kW
14
(30.0HP)
30.0 kW
15
(40.0HP)
37.0 kW
16
(50.0HP)
45.0 kW
17
(60.0HP)
55.0 kW
18
(75.0HP)
75.0kW
19
(100.0HP)
90.0kW
20
(125.0HP)
21 110.0kW
485
Table of Functions
(150.0HP)
132.0kW
22
(200.0HP)
160.0kW
23
(250.0HP)
185.0kW
24
(300.0HP)
220.0kW
25
(350.0HP)
250.0kW
26
(400.0HP)
315.0kW
27
(500.0HP)
355.0kW
28
(550.0HP)
400.0kW
29
(650.0HP)
500.0kW
30
(800.0HP)
Base M2-Base 30.00–400.00
07 0h1E07 60.00 Δ p.241
frequency Freq (Hz)
0 V/F
Control M2-Ctrl
08 0h1E08 Slip 0: V/F Δ p.241
mode Mode 2
Compen
Number of
M2-Pole
10 0h1E0A motor 2–48 Δ p.241
Num
poles
M2-
Rated slip Dependent on
11 0h1E0B Rated 0–3000 (RPM) Δ p.241
speed motor settings
Slip
Motor M2-
12 0h1E0C rated Rated 1.0–1000.0 (A) Δ p.241
current Curr
486
Table of Functions
73
Refer to <4.15 Output Voltage Setting>
487
Table of Functions
Frequency reference at
01 Output Freq - - -
trip
Acceleration/
03 Inverter State - - -
Deceleration state at trip
04 DC section state DCLink Voltage - - -
488
Table of Functions
3 Output Voltage
4 Output Power
5 WHour
Counter
6 DCLink Voltage
7 DI Status
8 DO Staus
9 V1 Monitor(V)
10 V1 Monitor(%)
13 V2 Monitor(V)
Monitor mode 3:
23 Monitor Line-3 14 V2 Monitor(%) p.302
display 3 OutputVoltage
15 I2 Monitor(mA)
16 I2 Monitor(%)
17 PID Output
18 PID Ref Value
19 PID Fdb Value
20 EPID1 Output
21 EPID1 Ref Val
22 EPID1 Fdb Val
23 EPID2 Output
489
Table of Functions
Monitor mode 0 No
24 Mon Mode Init 0: No p.302
initialize 1 Yes
Option slot 1
3074 type display
Option-1 Type - - p.252
Option slot 2
31 Option-2 Type - - p.252
type display
Option slot 3
32 Option-3 Type - - p.252
type display
0 No
1 All Grp
2 DRV Grp
3 BAS Grp
4 ADV Grp
5 CON Grp
6 IN Grp
Parameter
40 Parameter Init 7 OUT Grp 0: No p.246
initialization
8 COM Grp
9 PID Grp
10 EPI Grp
11 AP1 Grp
12 AP2 Grp
13 AP3 Grp
14 PRT Grp
74
Please refer to the communication option manual for details.
490
Table of Functions
15 M2 Grp
0 No
Trip history
44 Erase All Trip 0: No p.252
deletion
1 Yes
User registration 0 No
45 UserGrpAllDel 0: No p.250
code deletion 1 Yes
Read 0 No
46 Parameter Read 0: No p.246
parameters 1 Yes
Parameter 0 No
47 Write parameters 0: No p.246
Write 1 Yes
0 No
48 Save parameters Parameter Save 0: No p.246
1 Yes
Hide parameter
50 View Lock Set 0-9999 Un-locked p.247
mode
Password
51 View Lock Pw 0-9999 Password p.247
protection (hide
491
Table of Functions
Lock parameter
52 Key Lock Set 0–9999 Un-locked p.247
edit
Password for
53 locking Key Lock Pw 0–9999 Password p.247
parameter edit
Additional title 0 No
60 Add Title Up 0: No p.252
update 1 Yes
Simple 0 No
61 parameter Easy Start On 1: Yes p.251
setting 1 Yes
Power 0 No
62 consumption WHCount Reset 0: No p.251
initialization 1 Yes
Accumulated
70 inverter motion On-time 00000DAY 00:00 - p.304
time
Accumulated
71 inverter Run-time 00000DAY 00:00 - p.304
operation time
Accumulated 0 No
inverter
72 Time Reset 0: No p.304
operation time
initialization 1 Yes
Accumulated
74 cooling fan Fan Time 00000DAY 00:00 - p.304
operation time
Reset of 0 No
accumulated
75 Fan Time Rst 0: No p.304
cooling fan
operation time 1 Yes
75
The date format can be changed according to the AP3-06 settings.
492
Table of Functions
493
Table of Functions
494
Table of Functions
495
Table of Functions
Macro Macro
Code LCD Display Initial Value Code LCD Display Initial Value
Code Code
PID Unit PID
26 PID-51 4: x0.01 27 AP-1 8 5.00
Scale Sleep1Freq
AP1- Pre-PID AP1- Pre-PID
28 30.00 29 120.0
21 Freq 22 Delay
Retry
30 PRT-8 RST Restart 11 31 PRT-9 3
Number
PRT- PRT- Lost KPD
32 Retry Delay 4.0 33 3: Dec
10 011 Mode
PRT- Lost Cmd PRT- Lost Cmd
34 2: Dec 35 4.0
12 Mode 13 Time
PRT- PRT-
36 ETH Trip Sel 1: Free Run 37 ETH 1 min 120
40 42
PRT- PRT- DB
38 Stall Level 1 130 39 10
52 66 Warn %ED
PRT- PRT- 0: Output
40 LDT Sel 1: Warning 41 LDT Source
70 72 Current
LDT
PRT- LDT Band Source/10% PRT-
42 43 LDT Freq 20.00
75 Width of the Max. 76
value
M2-Acc M2-Dec
44 M2-4 10.0 45 M2-5 20.0
Time Time
M2-Ctrl 1: Slip
46 M2-8 47 M2-28 M2-Stall Lev 125
Mode Compen
M2-ETH 1
48 M2-29 120
min
496
Table of Functions
497
Table of Functions
Lost Lost
32 PRT-11 KPD 3: Dec 33 PRT-12 Cmd 3: Hold Input
Mode Mode
ETH ETH 1
34 PRT-40 1: Free Run 35 PRT-42 120
Trip Sel min
Stall
36 PRT-52 130 37 PRT-70 LDT Sel 1: Warning
Level 1
LDT LDT Source
LDT
38 PRT-72 0: Output Current 39 PRT-75 Band /10% of the Max.
Source
Width value
LDT
LDT
40 PRT-76 10.00 41 PRT-77 Restart 500.0
Freq
DT
M2-
M2-V/F
42 M2-25 1: Square 43 M2-28 Stall 110
Patt
Lev
M2-
44 M2-29 ETH 1 110
min
498
Table of Functions
LCD
Macro Macro LCD
Code Displa Initial Value Code Initial Value
Code Code Display
y
0.75~90
20.0
kW
Jump 110~250
0 - 1: CODE 1 DRV-3 Acc Time 60.0
Code kW
315~500
100.0
kW
0.75~90
30.0
kW
Dec 110~250 Freq Ref
2 DRV-4 90.0 3 DRV-7 1: Keypad-2
Time kW Src
315~500
150.0
kW
JOG
DRV- V/F
4 Frequ 15.00 5 BAS-7 1: Square
11 Pattern
ency
Acc
BAS- BAS- Dec
6 Time- 20.0 7 30.0
70 71 Time-1
1
Acc
BAS- BAS- Dec
8 Time- 22.5 9 32.5
72 73 Time-2
2
Acc
BAS- BAS- Dec
10 Time- 25.0 11 35.0
74 75 Time-3
3
Acc
BAS- BAS- Dec
12 Time- 27.5 13 37.5
76 77 Time-4
4
Acc
BAS- BAS- Acc
14 Time- 30.0 15 32.5
78 80 Time-6
5
Dec
BAS- BAS- Acc
16 Time- 42.5 17 35.0
81 82 Time-7
6
Dec
BAS- ADV- Power-
18 Time- 45.0 19 1: Yes
83 10 on Run
7
E-
ADV- ADV- FAN
20 Save 2: Auto 21 2: Temp Control
50 64 Control
Mode
U/D
ADV- Save CON- Carrier
22 1: Yes 23 3.0
65 Mod 4 Freq
e
499
Table of Functions
LCD
Macro Macro LCD
Code Displa Initial Value Code Initial Value
Code Code Display
y
0.75~90
20.0
kW
Jump 110~250
0 - 1: CODE 1 DRV-3 Acc Time 60.0
Code kW
315~500
100.0
kW
0.75~90
30.0
kW
Dec 110~250 Freq Ref
2 DRV-4 90.0 3 DRV-7 1: Keypad-2
Time kW Src
315~500
150.0
kW
JOG
DRV- V/F
4 Frequ 15.00 5 BAS-7 1: Square
11 Pattern
ency
Acc
BAS- BAS- Dec
6 Time- 20.0 7 30.0
70 71 Time-1
1
Acc
BAS- BAS- Dec
8 Time- 22.5 9 32.5
72 73 Time-2
2
Acc
BAS- BAS- Dec
10 Time- 25.0 11 35.0
74 75 Time-3
3
Acc
BAS- BAS- Dec
12 Time- 27.5 13 37.5
76 77 Time-4
4
Acc
BAS- BAS- Acc
14 Time- 30.0 15 32.5
78 80 Time-6
5
Dec
BAS- BAS- Acc
16 Time- 42.5 17 35.0
81 82 Time-7
6
Dec
BAS- ADV- Power-
18 Time- 45.0 19 1: Yes
83 10 on Run
7
E-
ADV- ADV- FAN
20 Save 2: Auto 21 2: Temp Control
50 64 Control
Mode
SS
CON- CON- KEB
24 Mod 1: Flying Start-2 25 1: Yes
70 77 Select
e
500
Table of Functions
LCD
Macro Macro LCD
Code Displa Initial Value Code Initial Value
Code Code Display
y
0.75~90
20.0
kW
Jump 110~250
0 - 1: CODE 1 DRV-3 Acc Time 60.0
Code kW
315~500
100.0
kW
0.75~90
30.0
kW
Dec 110~250 Freq Ref
2 DRV-4 90.0 3 DRV-7 1: Keypad-2
Time kW Src
315~500
150.0
kW
JOG
DRV- V/F
4 Frequ 15.00 5 BAS-7 1: Square
11 Pattern
ency
Acc
BAS- BAS- Dec
6 Time- 20.0 7 30.0
70 71 Time-1
1
Acc
BAS- BAS- Dec
8 Time- 22.5 9 32.5
72 73 Time-2
2
Acc
BAS- BAS- Dec
10 Time- 25.0 11 35.0
74 75 Time-3
3
Acc
BAS- BAS- Dec
12 Time- 27.5 13 37.5
76 77 Time-4
4
Acc
BAS- BAS- Acc
14 Time- 30.0 15 32.5
78 80 Time-6
5
Dec
BAS- BAS- Acc
16 Time- 42.5 17 35.0
81 82 Time-7
6
Dec
BAS- ADV- Power-
18 Time- 45.0 19 1: Yes
83 10 on Run
7
E-
ADV- ADV- FAN
20 Save 2: Auto 21 2: Temp Control
50 64 Control
Mode
OUT- Rela 10: Over
26 27 PID-1 PID Sel 1: Yes
32 y2 Voltage
PID PID Ref
28 PID-3 - 29 PID-4 -
Outp Value
501
Table of Functions
LCD
Macro Macro LCD
Code Displa Initial Value Code Initial Value
Code Code Display
y
0.75~90
20.0
kW
Jump 110~250
0 - 1: CODE 1 DRV-3 Acc Time 60.0
Code kW
315~500
100.0
kW
0.75~90
30.0
kW
Dec 110~250 Freq Ref
2 DRV-4 90.0 3 DRV-7 1: Keypad-2
Time kW Src
315~500
150.0
kW
JOG
DRV- V/F
4 Frequ 15.00 5 BAS-7 1: Square
11 Pattern
ency
Acc
BAS- BAS- Dec
6 Time- 20.0 7 30.0
70 71 Time-1
1
Acc
BAS- BAS- Dec
8 Time- 22.5 9 32.5
72 73 Time-2
2
Acc
BAS- BAS- Dec
10 Time- 25.0 11 35.0
74 75 Time-3
3
Acc
BAS- BAS- Dec
12 Time- 27.5 13 37.5
76 77 Time-4
4
Acc
BAS- BAS- Acc
14 Time- 30.0 15 32.5
78 80 Time-6
5
Dec
BAS- BAS- Acc
16 Time- 42.5 17 35.0
81 82 Time-7
6
Dec
BAS- ADV- Power-
18 Time- 45.0 19 1: Yes
83 10 on Run
7
E-
ADV- ADV- FAN
20 Save 2: Auto 21 2: Temp Control
50 64 Control
Mode
ut
PID PID- PID Ref
30 PID-5 - 31 4: I2
Fdb 10 1 Src
502
Table of Functions
LCD
Macro Macro LCD
Code Displa Initial Value Code Initial Value
Code Code Display
y
0.75~90
20.0
kW
Jump 110~250
0 - 1: CODE 1 DRV-3 Acc Time 60.0
Code kW
315~500
100.0
kW
0.75~90
30.0
kW
Dec 110~250 Freq Ref
2 DRV-4 90.0 3 DRV-7 1: Keypad-2
Time kW Src
315~500
150.0
kW
JOG
DRV- V/F
4 Frequ 15.00 5 BAS-7 1: Square
11 Pattern
ency
Acc
BAS- BAS- Dec
6 Time- 20.0 7 30.0
70 71 Time-1
1
Acc
BAS- BAS- Dec
8 Time- 22.5 9 32.5
72 73 Time-2
2
Acc
BAS- BAS- Dec
10 Time- 25.0 11 35.0
74 75 Time-3
3
Acc
BAS- BAS- Dec
12 Time- 27.5 13 37.5
76 77 Time-4
4
Acc
BAS- BAS- Acc
14 Time- 30.0 15 32.5
78 80 Time-6
5
Dec
BAS- BAS- Acc
16 Time- 42.5 17 35.0
81 82 Time-7
6
Dec
BAS- ADV- Power-
18 Time- 45.0 19 1: Yes
83 10 on Run
7
E-
ADV- ADV- FAN
20 Save 2: Auto 21 2: Temp Control
50 64 Control
Mode
Value
PID- PID PID- PID P-
32 0.5000 33 35.00
11 Ref 1 25 Gain 1
503
Table of Functions
LCD
Macro Macro LCD
Code Displa Initial Value Code Initial Value
Code Code Display
y
0.75~90
20.0
kW
Jump 110~250
0 - 1: CODE 1 DRV-3 Acc Time 60.0
Code kW
315~500
100.0
kW
0.75~90
30.0
kW
Dec 110~250 Freq Ref
2 DRV-4 90.0 3 DRV-7 1: Keypad-2
Time kW Src
315~500
150.0
kW
JOG
DRV- V/F
4 Frequ 15.00 5 BAS-7 1: Square
11 Pattern
ency
Acc
BAS- BAS- Dec
6 Time- 20.0 7 30.0
70 71 Time-1
1
Acc
BAS- BAS- Dec
8 Time- 22.5 9 32.5
72 73 Time-2
2
Acc
BAS- BAS- Dec
10 Time- 25.0 11 35.0
74 75 Time-3
3
Acc
BAS- BAS- Dec
12 Time- 27.5 13 37.5
76 77 Time-4
4
Acc
BAS- BAS- Acc
14 Time- 30.0 15 32.5
78 80 Time-6
5
Dec
BAS- BAS- Acc
16 Time- 42.5 17 35.0
81 82 Time-7
6
Dec
BAS- ADV- Power-
18 Time- 45.0 19 1: Yes
83 10 on Run
7
E-
ADV- ADV- FAN
20 Save 2: Auto 21 2: Temp Control
50 64 Control
Mode
Set
PID- PID PID- PID Out
34 15.0 35 1: Yes
26 I- 36 Inv
504
Table of Functions
LCD
Macro Macro LCD
Code Displa Initial Value Code Initial Value
Code Code Display
y
0.75~90
20.0
kW
Jump 110~250
0 - 1: CODE 1 DRV-3 Acc Time 60.0
Code kW
315~500
100.0
kW
0.75~90
30.0
kW
Dec 110~250 Freq Ref
2 DRV-4 90.0 3 DRV-7 1: Keypad-2
Time kW Src
315~500
150.0
kW
JOG
DRV- V/F
4 Frequ 15.00 5 BAS-7 1: Square
11 Pattern
ency
Acc
BAS- BAS- Dec
6 Time- 20.0 7 30.0
70 71 Time-1
1
Acc
BAS- BAS- Dec
8 Time- 22.5 9 32.5
72 73 Time-2
2
Acc
BAS- BAS- Dec
10 Time- 25.0 11 35.0
74 75 Time-3
3
Acc
BAS- BAS- Dec
12 Time- 27.5 13 37.5
76 77 Time-4
4
Acc
BAS- BAS- Acc
14 Time- 30.0 15 32.5
78 80 Time-6
5
Dec
BAS- BAS- Acc
16 Time- 42.5 17 35.0
81 82 Time-7
6
Dec
BAS- ADV- Power-
18 Time- 45.0 19 1: Yes
83 10 on Run
7
E-
ADV- ADV- FAN
20 Save 2: Auto 21 2: Temp Control
50 64 Control
Mode
Time
1
505
Table of Functions
506
Table of Functions
507
Table of Functions
Macr Macr
LCD LCD
o Code Initial Value o Code Initial Value
Display Display
Code Code
0.75~90
20.0
kW
Jump DRV- 110~250
0 - 1: CODE 1 Acc Time 60.0
Code 3 kW
315~500
100.0
kW
0.75~90
30.0
kW
DRV- 110~250 DRV- Freq Ref
2 Dec Time 90.0 3 1: Keypad-2
4 kW 7 Src
315~500 150.
kW 0
DRV- JOG BAS- V/F
4 15.00 5 1: Square
11 Frequency 7 Pattern
BAS- BAS- Dec
6 Acc Time-1 20.0 7 30.0
70 71 Time-1
BAS- BAS- Dec
8 Acc Time-2 22.5 9 32.5
072 73 Time-2
BAS- BAS- Dec
10 Acc Time-3 25.0 11 35.0
74 75 Time-3
BAS- BAS- Dec
12 Acc Time-4 27.5 13 37.5
76 77 Time-4
BAS- BAS- Acc
14 Acc Time-5 30.0 15 32.5
78 80 Time-6
BAS- Dec Time- BAS- Acc
16 42.5 17 35.0
81 6 82 Time-7
BAS- Dec Time- ADV- Power-on
18 45.0 19 1: Yes
83 7 10 Run
ADV- E-Save ADV- FAN
20 2: Auto 21 2: Temp Control
50 Mode 64 Control
ADV- U/D Save CON Carrier
22 1: Yes 23 3.0
65 Mode -4 Freq
CON CON KEB
24 SS Mode 1: Flying Start-2 25 1: Yes
-70 -77 Select
508
Table of Functions
OUT-
26 Relay 2 10: Over Voltage 27 PID-1 PID Sel 1: Yes
32
PID Ref
28 PID-3 PID Output - 29 PID-4 -
Value
PID Fdb PID Ref 1
30 PID -5 - 31 PID-10 4: I2
Value Src
PID Ref 1 PID P-Gain
32 PID-11 50.00 33 PID-25 40.00
Set 1
34 PID-26 PID I-Time 1 15.0 35 PID-36 PID Out Inv 1: Yes
PID Unit
36 PID-50 PID Unit Sel 3: °F 37 PID-51 2: x1
Scale
AP1- Pre-PID AP1- Pre-PID
38 30.00 39 120.0
21 Freq 22 Delay
Retry
40 PRT-8 RST Restart 11 41 PRT-9 0
Number
PRT- PRT- Lost KPD
42 Retry Delay 10.0 43 3: Dec
10 11 Mode
PRT- Lost Cmd 3: Hold PRT- 1: Free
44 45 ETH Trip Sel
12 Mode Input 40 Run
PRT- PRT-
46 ETH 1 min 120 47 Stall Level 1 130
42 52
PRT- PRT- 0: Output
48 LDT Sel 1: Warning 49 LDT Source
70 72 Current
LDT
PRT- LDT Band Source/10% PRT-
50 51 LDT Freq 10.00
75 Width of the Max. 76
value
PRT LDT Restart M2-
52 300.0 53 M2-V/F Patt 1: Square
77 DT 25
M2- M2-ETH 1
54 M2 28 M2-Stall Lev 110 55 110
29 min
509
Table of Functions
Mac Mac
ro LCD ro
Code Initial Value Code LCD Display Initial Value
Cod Display Cod
e e
0.75~9
0 30.0
kW
110~25
Jump
0 - 1:CODE 1 DRV-3 Acc Time 0 90.0
Code
kW
315~50
0 150.0
kW
0.75~90
50.0
kW
110~250
Dec 150.0 Freq Ref
2 DRV-4 kW 3 DRV-7 1: Keypad-2
Time Src
315~50
0 250.0
kW
Control DRV- JOG
4 DRV-9 1: Slip Compen 5 15.00
Mode 11 Frequency
DRV- JOG Acc DRV- JOG Dec
6 30.0 7 50.0
12 Time 13 Time
DRV- Torque
8 1: Auto1 9 BAS-7 V/F Pattern 1: Square
15 Boost
BAS- Acc BAS-
10 30.0 11 Dec Time-1 50.0
70 Time-1 71
BAS- Acc BAS-
12 32.0 13 Dec Time-2 52.0
72 Time-2 73
BAS- Acc BAS-
14 34.0 15 Dec Time-3 54.0
74 Time-3 75
BAS- Acc BAS-
16 36.0 17 Dec Time-4 56.0
76 Time-4 77
BAS- Acc BAS-
18 38.0 19 Dec Time-5 58.0
78 Time-5 79
BAS- Acc BAS-
20 40.0 21 Dec Time-6 59.0
80 Time-6 81
510
Table of Functions
511
Table of Functions
512
Table of Functions
513
Table of Functions
Macr Macr
LCD LCD
o Code Initial Value o Code Initial Value
Display Display
Code Code
0.75~90
30.0
kW
Jump DRV- 110~250
0 - 1: CODE 1 Acc Time 90.0
Code 3 kW
315~500
150.0
kW
0.75~90
60.0
kW
DRV- 110~250 DRV- Freq Ref
2 Dec Time 180.0 3 1: Keypad-2
4 kW 7 Src
315~500
300.0
kW
JOG
DRV- Control DRV-
4 1: Slip Compen 5 Frequenc 20.00
9 Mode 11
y
DRV- JOG Acc DRV- JOG Dec
6 30.0 7 60.0
12 Time 13 Time
DRV- Torque BAS- V/F
8 1: Auto1 9 1: Square
15 Boost 7 Pattern
BAS- Acc Time- BAS- Dec
10 30.0 11 50.0
70 1 71 Time-1
BAS- Acc Time- BAS- Dec
12 32.0 13 52.0
72 2 73 Time-2
BAS- Acc Time- BAS- Dec
14 34.0 15 54.0
74 3 75 Time-3
BAS- Acc Time- BAS- Dec
16 36.0 17 56.0
76 4 77 Time-4
ADV- Power-on ADV- Freq
24 1: Yes 25 40.00
10 Run 25 Limit Lo
ADV- FAN ADV- U/D Save
26 2: Temp Control 27 1: Yes
64 Control 65 Mode
CON Carrier CON
28 3.0 29 SS Mode 0: Flying Start-1
-4 Freq -70
CON KEB OUT-
30 1: Yes 31 Relay 2 14: Run
-77 Select 32
514
Table of Functions
Macr Macr
LCD LCD
o Code Initial Value o Code Initial Value
Display Display
Code Code
0.75~90
30.0
kW
Jump DRV- 110~250
0 - 1: CODE 1 Acc Time 90.0
Code 3 kW
315~500
150.0
kW
0.75~90
60.0
kW
DRV- 110~250 DRV- Freq Ref
2 Dec Time 180.0 3 1: Keypad-2
4 kW 7 Src
315~500
300.0
kW
JOG
DRV- Control DRV-
4 1: Slip Compen 5 Frequenc 20.00
9 Mode 11
y
DRV- JOG Acc DRV- JOG Dec
6 30.0 7 60.0
12 Time 13 Time
DRV- Torque BAS- V/F
8 1: Auto1 9 1: Square
15 Boost 7 Pattern
BAS- Acc Time- BAS- Dec
10 30.0 11 50.0
70 1 71 Time-1
BAS- Acc Time- BAS- Dec
12 32.0 13 52.0
72 2 73 Time-2
BAS- Acc Time- BAS- Dec
14 34.0 15 54.0
74 3 75 Time-3
BAS- Acc Time- BAS- Dec
16 36.0 17 56.0
76 4 77 Time-4
PID- PID- PID
32 PID Sel 1: Yes 33 -
1 3 Output
PID- PID Ref PID- PID Fdb
34 - 35 -
4 Value 5 Value
PID- PID Ref 1 PID- PID Ref 1
36 4: I2 37 5.000
10 Src 11 Set
PID- PID P- PID- PID I-
38 50.00 39 2.5
25 Gain 1 26 Time 1
515
Table of Functions
Macr Macr
LCD LCD
o Code Initial Value o Code Initial Value
Display Display
Code Code
0.75~90
30.0
kW
Jump DRV- 110~250
0 - 1: CODE 1 Acc Time 90.0
Code 3 kW
315~500
150.0
kW
0.75~90
60.0
kW
DRV- 110~250 DRV- Freq Ref
2 Dec Time 180.0 3 1: Keypad-2
4 kW 7 Src
315~500
300.0
kW
JOG
DRV- Control DRV-
4 1: Slip Compen 5 Frequenc 20.00
9 Mode 11
y
DRV- JOG Acc DRV- JOG Dec
6 30.0 7 60.0
12 Time 13 Time
DRV- Torque BAS- V/F
8 1: Auto1 9 1: Square
15 Boost 7 Pattern
BAS- Acc Time- BAS- Dec
10 30.0 11 50.0
70 1 71 Time-1
BAS- Acc Time- BAS- Dec
12 32.0 13 52.0
72 2 73 Time-2
BAS- Acc Time- BAS- Dec
14 34.0 15 54.0
74 3 75 Time-3
BAS- Acc Time- BAS- Dec
16 36.0 17 56.0
76 4 77 Time-4
PID- PID Unit PID- PID Unit
40 5: inWC 41 3: x0.1
50 Sel 51 Scale
AP1- Pre-PID PRT- RST
42 30.00 43 11
21 Freq 8 Restart
PRT- Retry PRT- Retry
44 3 45 4.0
9 Number 10 Delay
PRT- Lost KPD PRT- Lost Cmd
46 3: Dec 47 3: Hold Input
11 Mode 12 Mode
516
Table of Functions
Macr Macr
LCD LCD
o Code Initial Value o Code Initial Value
Display Display
Code Code
0.75~90
30.0
kW
Jump DRV- 110~250
0 - 1: CODE 1 Acc Time 90.0
Code 3 kW
315~500
150.0
kW
0.75~90
60.0
kW
DRV- 110~250 DRV- Freq Ref
2 Dec Time 180.0 3 1: Keypad-2
4 kW 7 Src
315~500
300.0
kW
JOG
DRV- Control DRV-
4 1: Slip Compen 5 Frequenc 20.00
9 Mode 11
y
DRV- JOG Acc DRV- JOG Dec
6 30.0 7 60.0
12 Time 13 Time
DRV- Torque BAS- V/F
8 1: Auto1 9 1: Square
15 Boost 7 Pattern
BAS- Acc Time- BAS- Dec
10 30.0 11 50.0
70 1 71 Time-1
BAS- Acc Time- BAS- Dec
12 32.0 13 52.0
72 2 73 Time-2
BAS- Acc Time- BAS- Dec
14 34.0 15 54.0
74 3 75 Time-3
BAS- Acc Time- BAS- Dec
16 36.0 17 56.0
76 4 77 Time-4
PRT- ETH Trip PRT- ETH 1
48 1: Free Run 49 120
40 Sel 42 min
PRT- Stall PRT- PipeBrok
50 130 51 1: Warning
52 Level 1 60 en Sel
Pipe
PRT- PipeBrok PRT-
52 90.0 53 Broken 22.0
61 en Lev 62
DT
517
Table of Functions
Macr Macr
LCD LCD
o Code Initial Value o Code Initial Value
Display Display
Code Code
0.75~90
30.0
kW
Jump DRV- 110~250
0 - 1: CODE 1 Acc Time 90.0
Code 3 kW
315~500
150.0
kW
0.75~90
60.0
kW
DRV- 110~250 DRV- Freq Ref
2 Dec Time 180.0 3 1: Keypad-2
4 kW 7 Src
315~500
300.0
kW
JOG
DRV- Control DRV-
4 1: Slip Compen 5 Frequenc 20.00
9 Mode 11
y
DRV- JOG Acc DRV- JOG Dec
6 30.0 7 60.0
12 Time 13 Time
DRV- Torque BAS- V/F
8 1: Auto1 9 1: Square
15 Boost 7 Pattern
BAS- Acc Time- BAS- Dec
10 30.0 11 50.0
70 1 71 Time-1
BAS- Acc Time- BAS- Dec
12 32.0 13 52.0
72 2 73 Time-2
BAS- Acc Time- BAS- Dec
14 34.0 15 54.0
74 3 75 Time-3
BAS- Acc Time- BAS- Dec
16 36.0 17 56.0
76 4 77 Time-4
66 Warn %E 70
D
LDT
PRT- LDT PRT- LDT Source /10%
56 0: Output Current 57 Band
72 Source 75 of the Max. value
Width
LDT
PRT- PRT-
58 LDT Freq 15.00 59 Restart 100.0
76 77
DT
518
Table of Functions
Macr Macr
LCD LCD
o Code Initial Value o Code Initial Value
Display Display
Code Code
0.75~90
30.0
kW
Jump DRV- 110~250
0 - 1: CODE 1 Acc Time 90.0
Code 3 kW
315~500
150.0
kW
0.75~90
60.0
kW
DRV- 110~250 DRV- Freq Ref
2 Dec Time 180.0 3 1: Keypad-2
4 kW 7 Src
315~500
300.0
kW
JOG
DRV- Control DRV-
4 1: Slip Compen 5 Frequenc 20.00
9 Mode 11
y
DRV- JOG Acc DRV- JOG Dec
6 30.0 7 60.0
12 Time 13 Time
DRV- Torque BAS- V/F
8 1: Auto1 9 1: Square
15 Boost 7 Pattern
BAS- Acc Time- BAS- Dec
10 30.0 11 50.0
70 1 71 Time-1
BAS- Acc Time- BAS- Dec
12 32.0 13 52.0
72 2 73 Time-2
BAS- Acc Time- BAS- Dec
14 34.0 15 54.0
74 3 75 Time-3
BAS- Acc Time- BAS- Dec
16 36.0 17 56.0
76 4 77 Time-4
M2- M2-Acc M2- M2-Dec
60 10.0 61 20.0
4 Time 5 Time
M2- M2-Ctrl M2- M2-V/F
62 1: Slip Compen 63 1: Square
8 Mode 25 Patt
M2- M2-Stall M2- M2-ETH
64 125 65 120
28 Lev 29 1 min
519
Table of Functions
520
Table of Functions
521
Table of Functions
522
Troubleshooting
9 Troubleshooting
This chapter explains how to troubleshoot a problem when inverter protective functions,
fault trips, warning signals, or faults occur. If the inverter does not work normally after
following the suggested troubleshooting steps, please contact the LS ELECTRIC customer
service center.
• Level: When the fault is corrected, the trip or warning signal disappears and the fault is
not saved in the fault history.
• Latch: When the fault is corrected and a reset input signal is provided, the trip or
warning signal disappears.
• Fatal: When the fault is corrected, the fault trip or warning signal disappears only after
the user turns off the inverter, waits until the charge indicator light goes off, and turns
the inverter on again. If the inverter is still in a fault condition after powering it on again,
please contact the supplier or the LS ELECTRIC customer service center.
523
Troubleshooting
524
Troubleshooting
525
Troubleshooting
Option Protection
526
Troubleshooting
527
Troubleshooting
528
Troubleshooting
529
Troubleshooting
530
Troubleshooting
531
Troubleshooting
532
Troubleshooting
533
Troubleshooting
While the
inverter is in Change the carrier frequency to the
operation, a Noise occurs due to switching inside minimum value.
control unit the inverter.
malfunctions or Install a micro surge filter in the
noise occurs. inverter output.
Connect the inverter to a ground
terminal.
Check that the ground resistance is
less than 100Ω for 200 V inverters
and less than 10Ω for 400 V
When the
inverters.
inverter is
An earth leakage breaker will interrupt
operating, the Check the capacity of the earth
the supply if current flows to ground
earth leakage leakage breaker and make the
during inverter operation.
breaker is appropriate connection, based on
activated. the rated current of the inverter.
Lower the carrier frequency.
Make the cable length between the
inverter and the motor as short as
possible.
The motor Check the input voltage and
vibrates balance the voltage.
Phase-to-phase voltage of 3-phase
severely and
power source is not balanced. Check and test the motor’s
does not rotate
normally. insulation.
534
Troubleshooting
535
Troubleshooting
536
Maintenance
10 Maintenance
This chapter explains how to replace the cooling fan, the regular inspections to complete,
and how to store and dispose of the product. An inverter is vulnerable to environmental
conditions and faults also occur due to component wear and tear. To prevent breakdowns,
please follow the maintenance recommendations in this section.
• Before you inspect the product, read all safety instructions contained in this manual.
• Before you clean the product, ensure that the power is off.
• Clean the inverter with a dry cloth. Cleaning with wet cloths, water, solvents, or detergents
may result in electric shock or damage to the product .
537
Maintenance
Is there any
abnormal Visual
vibration or inspection
Motor All noise? No abnormality -
Check for
Is there any
overheating or
abnormal smell?
damage.
538
Maintenance
539
Maintenance
Do not run an insulation resistance test (Megger) on the control circuit as it may result in
damage to the product.
540
Maintenance
The RTC feature and any other features related to the RTC feature, such as the time event
control, do not work properly when the battery runs out. Refer to the following battery
specifications when a battery replacement is required.
Nominal voltage: 3 V
Life span (approximately): 53,300 hrs (inverter on) / 25,800 hrs (inverter off)
ESD (Electrostatic discharge) from the human body may damage sensitive electronic
components on the PCB. Therefore, be extremely careful not to touch the PCB or the
components on the PCB with bare hands while you work on the main PCB.
To prevent damage to the PCB from ESD, touch a metal object with your hands to discharge
any electricity before working on the PCB, or wear an anti-static wrist strap and ground it on a
metal object.
541
Maintenance
542
Maintenance
4 Loosen the screws securing the front cover, and remove the front cover by lifting it. The
main PCB is exposed.
5 Locate the RTC battery holder on the main PCB, and replace the battery.
543
Maintenance
6 Reattach the front cover, the power cover, and the keypad back onto the inverter body
Ensure that the inverter is turned off and DC link voltage has dropped to a safe level before
opening the terminal cover and installing the RTC battery.
544
Maintenance
10.3.1 Storage
If you are not using the product for an extended period, store it in the following way:
• Store the product in the same environmental conditions as specified for operation
(Refer to Installation Considerationson page 10).
• When storing the product for a period longer than 3 months, store it between -10 ˚C
and 30 ˚C, to prevent depletion of the electrolytic capacitor.
• Do not expose the inverter to snow, rain, fog, or dust.
• Package the inverter in a way that prevents contact with moisture. Keep the moisture
level below 70% in the package by including a desiccant, such as silica gel.
• Do not allow the inverter to be exposed to dusty or humid environments. If the inverter
is installed in such environments (for example, a construction site) and the inverter will
be unused for an extended period, remove the inverter and store it in a safe place.
10.3.2 Disposal
When disposing of the product, categorize it as general industrial waste. Recyclable
materials are included in the product, so recycle them whenever possible. The packing
materials and all metal parts can be recycled. Although plastic can also be recycled, it can
be incinerated under controlled conditions in some regions.
If the inverter has not been operated for a long time, capacitors lose their charging
characteristics and are depleted. To prevent depletion, turn on the product once a year and
allow the device to operate for 30-60 min. Run the device under no-load conditions.
545
Technical Specification
11 Technical Specification
546
Technical Specification
HP 7.5 10 15 20 25
Applied Motor
kW 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5
547
Technical Specification
548
Technical Specification
549
Technical Specification
HP 40 50 60 75 100 125
Applied Motor
kW 30 37 45 55 75 90
550
Technical Specification
Model H100 XXXX–4 1100 1320 1600 1850 2200 2500 3150 3550 4000 5000
HP 150 200 250 300 350 400 500 550 650 800
Applied Motor
kW 110 132 160 185 220 250 315 355 400 500
Rated Capacity
170 201 248 282 329 367 467 520 587 733
(kVA)
Rated
Three
Rated Current 223 264 325 370 432 481 613 683 770 962
Phase
output (A)
Output Frequency 0–400 Hz
Weight (kg) 55.8 55.8 74.7 74.7 120.0 120.0 185.5 185.5 185.5 265
Items Description
552
Technical Specification
Items Description
(7EA) Forward
P1-P7 direction
operation
Reset
Emergency Reverse direction operation
stop External trip
Multi step Jog operation
speed Multi step acc/dec-high/med/low
frequency- Second motor selection
high/med/low Frequency reduction
DC braking Fix analog command frequency
during stop Transtion from PID to general operation
Frequency Pre Heat
increase Pump Cleaning
3-wire RTC(Time Event)
Select
acc/dec/stop
MMC
Interlock
Pulse
0–32 kHz, Low Level: 0–0.8 V, High Level: 3.5–12 V
train
Multi
function
open Less than DC 26 V, 50 mA
collector
terminal
Fault output
Fault N.O.: Less than AC 250 V 2A, DC 30 V,
and inverter
signal 3A
operation
relay N.C.: Less than AC 250 V 1A, DC 30 V
status output
terminal 1A
Output
Multi
function Less than AC 250 V, 5 A
relay Less than DC 30 V, 5 A
terminal
Analog 0–12 Vdc(0–20 mA): Select frequency, output current,
output output voltage, DC terminal voltage, and others.
Pulse
Maximum 32 kHz, 0–12 V
train
Over current Over voltage trip
Protection
Trip trip Temperature sensor trip
function
External Inverter over heat
553
Technical Specification
Items Description
signal trip Option trip
ARM short Output imaging trip
circuit current Inverter overload trip
trip Fan trip
Over heat trip Low voltage trip during operation
Input imaging Low voltage trip
trip Analog input error
Ground trip Motor overload trip
Motor over Pipe broken trip
heat trip Keypad command lost trip
I/O board link Damper trip
trip Level Detect trip
No motor trip MMC Interlock trip
Parameter PumpCleannig trip
writing trip
Emergency
stop trip
Command
loss trip
External
memory error
CPU
watchdog trip
Motor under
load trip
554
Technical Specification
Items Description
recommended that less than 75% load is applied.
Relative humidity less than 95% RH (to avoid
Ambient humidity
condensation forming)
Storage
-20 C-65 C (-4–149 F)
temperature.
Prevent contact with corrosive gases, inflammable
Surrounding gases, oil stains, dust, and other pollutants.
environment (0.75~90kW Pollution Degree 3 Environment)
(110~500kW Pollution Degree 2 Environment)
Maximum 3,280 ft (1,000m) above sea level for standard
operation.
Operation
After that the driver rated voltage and the rated output
altitude
current derating by 1% for every extra 328 ft (100m) up
to 13,123 ft (4,000m).
Operation
Less than 1.0 G (9.8 m/sec2).
oscillation
Pressure 70-106 kPa
555
Technical Specification
37–90 kW (3-phase)
556
Technical Specification
110–185 kW (3-phase)
557
Technical Specification
220–500 kW (3-phase)
Units: mm
Items W1 W2 W3 H1 H2 H3 D1 A B Φ
0008H100-2 160 137 - 232 216.5 10.5 181 5 5 -
0015H100-2 160 137 - 232 216.5 10.5 181 5 5 -
0022H100-2 160 137 - 232 216.5 10.5 181 5 5 -
0037H100-2 160 137 - 232 216.5 10.5 181 5 5 -
3-
phase 0055H100-2 160 137 - 232 216.5 10.5 181 5 5 -
200 V
0075H100-2 160 137 - 232 216.5 10.5 181 5 5 -
0110H100-2 160 137 - 232 216.5 10.5 181 5 5 -
0150H100-2 180 157 - 290 273.7 11.3 205.3 5 5 -
0185H100-2 220 193.8 - 350 331 13 223.2 6 6 -
3- 0008H100-4 160 137 - 232 216.5 10.5 181 5 5 -
558
Technical Specification
Items W1 W2 W3 H1 H2 H3 D1 A B Φ
phase 0015H100-4 160 137 - 232 216.5 10.5 181 5 5 -
400 V
0022H100-4 160 137 - 232 216.5 10.5 181 5 5 -
Units : inches
559
Technical Specification
Items W1 W2 W3 H1 H2 H3 D1 A B Φ
0008H100-2 6.30 5.39 - 9.13 8.52 0.41 7.13 0.20 0.20 -
0015H100-2 6.30 5.39 - 9.13 8.52 0.41 7.13 0.20 0.20 -
0022H100-2 6.30 5.39 - 9.13 8.52 0.41 7.13 0.20 0.20 -
0037H100-2 6.30 5.39 - 9.13 8.52 0.41 7.13 0.20 0.20 -
3-
phase 0055H100-2 6.30 5.39 - 9.13 8.52 0.41 7.13 0.20 0.20 -
200 V
0075H100-2 6.30 5.39 - 9.13 8.52 0.41 7.13 0.20 0.20 -
0110H100-2 6.30 5.39 - 9.13 8.52 0.41 7.13 0.20 0.20 -
0150H100-2 7.09 6.18 - 11.42 10.78 0.45 8.08 0.20 0.20 -
0185H100-2 8.66 7.63 - 13.78 13.03 0.51 8.79 0.24 0.24 -
0008H100-4 6.30 5.39 - 9.13 8.52 0.41 7.13 0.20 0.20 -
560
Technical Specification
Items W1 W2 W3 H1 H2 H3 D1 A B Φ
1850H100-4 14.96 11.81 11.81 27.76 26.99 0.37 15.59 0.35 0.35 -
2200H100-4 17.32 12.60 - 36.31 35.26 0.61 17.32 0.43 0.43 -
2500H100-4 17.32 12.60 - 36.31 35.26 0.61 17.32 0.43 0.43 -
3150H100-4 23.62 16.54 - 39.37 38.27 0.59 19.69 0.55 0.55 -
3550H100-4 23.62 16.54 - 39.37 38.27 0.59 19.69 0.55 0.55 -
4000H100-4 23.62 16.54 - 39.37 38.27 0.59 19.69 0.55 0.55 -
5000H100-4 30.55 19.69 - 41.50 40.20 0.79 19.69 0.55 0.55 -
• Install appropriate branch circuit protection based on required local codes and the
user manual.
• The device is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100kA, 240Vac
maximum(200V class) and 480 Vac maximum(400V class) when protected by branch circuit
protection devices specified in this manual.
3- 3.7 30 15 30 MC-32a 32
Phase 5.5 ABS53c 50 50 EBS53c 50 MC-50a 55
561
Technical Specification
562
Technical Specification
Maximum allowed prospective short-circuit current at the input power connection is defined
in IEC 60439-1 as 100 kA. LSLV-H100 is suitable for use in a circuit capable of delivering
not more than 100kA RMS at the drive’s maximum rated voltage, depending on the
selected MCCB. RMS symmetrical amperes for recommended MCCB are the following
table.
563
Technical Specification
564
Technical Specification
Use Class H or RK5 UL Listed Input Fuse and UL Listed Breaker Only. See the table above for
the Voltage and Current rating of the fuse and the breaker.
Attention
Utiliser UNIQUEMENT des fusibles d’entrée homologués de Classe H ou RK5 UL et des
disjoncteurs UL . Se reporter au tableau ci-dessus pour la tension et le courant nominal des
fusibless et des disjoncteurs.
565
Technical Specification
566
Technical Specification
P1–P7/
CM/VR/V1/I2/AO/Q1/EG/24/
M3 2.2 ~ 2.5 / 0.22 ~ 0.25
TI/TO/SA,SB,SC/S+,S-,SG
A1/B1/C1
Apply rated torques to the terminal screws. Loose screws may cause short circuits and
malfunctions. Tightening the screw too much may damage the terminals and cause short
circuits and malfuctions. Use copper wires only with 600 V, 90 ℃ rating for the power terminal
wiring, and 300 V, 75 ℃ rating for the control terminal wiring.
Attention
Appliquer des couples de marche aux vis des bornes. Des vis desserrées peuvent provoquer
des courts-circuits et des dysfonctionnements. Ne pas trop serrer la vis, car cela risque
d’endommager les bornes et de provoquer des courts-circuits et des dysfonctionnements.
Utiliser uniquement des fils de cuivre avec une valeur nominale de 600 V, 90 ℃ pour le câblage
de la borne d’alimentation, et une valeur nominale de 300 V, 75 ℃ pour le câblage de la
borne de commande.
567
Technical Specification
Note
568
Technical Specification
• It is not necessary to use option type dynamic braking unit for H100
0.75~18.5kW(200V) and 0.75~30kW(400V) because basically the dynamic braking
unit is built in.
• You must refer to dynamic braking unit manual for usage recommended dynamic
braking unit in the table above due to changeable table.
• Resistance/watt/breaking torque/%ED of DB Resistor for Type A DB Unit refer to the
table of “11.7.6 DB Resistors" and Resistance of DB Resistor for type B and C refer
to the manual of DB Unit.
Group 2:
G N B2 P/B1
Terminals Functions
G Ground Terminal
B2 Terminal for connection with B2 of DBU
B1 Terminal for connection with B1 of DBU
N Terminal for connection with N of Inverter
P Terminal for connection with P1 of Inverter
* Note: READ DBU User manual certainly when selecting DB resistors.
Group 3:
Group 4:
569
Technical Specification
Terminals Functions
G Ground Terminal
B2 Terminal for connection with B2 of DBU
B1 Terminal for connection with B1 of DBU
N Terminal for connection with N of Inverter
P Terminal for connection with P of Inverter
Group 5:
Terminals Functions
P(+) Terminal for connection with P of Inverter
N(-) Terminal for connection with N of Inverter
B1 Terminal for connection with B1 of DBU
B2 Terminal for connection with B2 of DBU
N.C Unused
E Ground Terminal
Group6:
570
Technical Specification
P(+) N(-) B1 B2 E
Terminals Functions
P(+) Terminal for connection with P of Inverter
N(-) Terminal for connection with N of Inverter
B1 Terminal for connection with B1 of DBU
B2 Terminal for connection with B2 of DBU
E Unused
Note
You must refer to dynamic braking unit manual for choice the braking resistor to use
the dynamic braking unit.
571
Technical Specification
0.75~90kW
110~500kW
11.7.4 Dimensions
572
Technical Specification
-Group1 - Group2
80
2-
Dynamic
RESE
POWE
RUN
231
24
25
OHT
OCT
166.2
1
2
5
5. 15
80
123 27
130
7
5
-Group3 - Group4
- Group5
573
Technical Specification
Capacity Hole
Hole size
of position for
Voltage Dimension (mm) Weight for
applied installation
installation
motor (mm)
(V) (kW) W H H2 D W1 H1 (kg) ()
15 1.50
22 1.55
220
37 1.57
75 1.84
140 227.4 192 76.4 125 215.4 M4
15 1.53
22 1.55
440
37 1.56
75 1.85
574
Technical Specification
- Group6
F Hole Hole
R Capacit % position for Weig size for
Dimension (mm)
A Volta y of E installation ht installati
M ge applied D (mm) on
E motor
W H H2 D W1 H1 (Kg) ()
220
37 [kW] 50 3.77
A [V]
Fra 37 [kW] 50 200 219 190 160 208.5 3.84
440
me
[V] 75 [kW] 50 3.98
575
Technical Specification
11.7.6 DB Resistors
Torque 100% Torque 150%
Product Wattage Wattage Wattage Wattage
DB unit Resistor Resistor
(kW) [W] [W] [W] [W]
(Ω) (Ω)
(%ED=5%) (%ED=10%) (%ED=5%) (%ED=10%)
0.75 - 200 100 200 150 150 300
1.5 - 100 200 400 60 300 600
2.2 - 60 300 600 50 400 800
3.7 - 40 500 1000 33 600 1200
3-
Phase 5.5 - 33 600 1200 20 800 1600
200 V
7.5 - 20 800 1600 15 1200 2400
11 - 15 1200 2400 10 2400 4800
15 - 10 2400 4800 8 2400 4800
18.5 - 8 2400 4800 6 2600 5200
0.75 - 900 100 200 600 150 300
1.5 - 450 200 400 300 300 600
576
Technical Specification
Note
577
Technical Specification
• It is not necessary to use option type dynamic braking unit for H100 0.75~18.5kW(200V)
and 0.75~30kW(400V) because basically the dynamic braking unit is built in.
• The resistance/rated capacity/breaking torque/%ED of DB Resistor are valid only for the
DB unit of type A and the values of DB Resistor for type B and C refer to the manual of
DB Unit..
• Rating Watt of DBU has to be doubled when %ED is doubled.
The continuous rated current of the inverter is limited based on the carrier frequency. Refer
to the following graph.
578
Technical Specification
200 V 400 V
Item Unit 0.75– 0.75– 22– 37– 75– 110-
400 kW 500 kW
18.5 kW 18.5 kW 30 kW 55 kW 90 kW 355 kW
fs,def kHz 3 3 3 3 3 2 1.5 1.5
fs,c kHz 8 8 8 - - - 2 4
fs,ma
kHz 15 15 15 10 7 5 4 4
x
DR1
% 70 65 65 - - - 95 92
%
DR2
% 60 55 50 60 55 76 75 65
%
579
Technical Specification
The continuous rated current of the inverter is limited based on the input voltage. Refer to
the following graph.
Ambient temperature and installation type determine the constant-rated current of the
inverter. Refer to the following graph. A 2.5% current derating is applied during operation
when the ambient temperature is above 40℃. The inverter must be operated at less than
75% of its rated capacity when the ambient temperature is above 50℃.
580
Applying Drives to Single-
phase Input Application
12.1 Introduction
LSLV-H100 is a three-phase standard variable frequency drive(VFD). When applying
single-phase power to a three-phase VFD, there are several constraints that need to be
considered. Standard Pulse-Width-Modulated (PWM) VFDs use a 6-pulse diode rectifier.
The 6-pulse rectification results in 360 Hz DC bus ripple when used with a three-phase 60
Hz supply.
However, under single-phase use, the DC bus ripple becomes 120 Hz and the VFDs DC
bus circuit is subject to higher stress in order to deliver equivalent power.
Additionally, input currents and harmonics increase beyond those encountered with three-
phase input.
Input current distortion of 90% THD and greater can be expected under single-phase input,
compared to approximately 40% with three-phase input as indicated in Figure 2.
Therefore, single-phase use requires the three-phase VFD power rating be reduced
(derated) to avoid over stressing the rectifier and DC link components.
581
Applying Drives to Single-
phase Input Application
In addition, the input current through the remaining two phases on the diode bridge
converter will approximately double, creating another derating consideration for the VFD.
Input current harmonic distortion will increase beyond that with a three-phase supply
making the overall input power factor low. Input current distortion over 100% is likely under
single-phase conditions without a reactor.
Therefore, the reactor is always required. When using a motor that is selected by the three-
phase drive rating criteria when using single-phase input, it may result in poor performance,
premature drive failure. The selected drive of single-phase current ratings must meet or
exceed the motor current rating.
In case of single-phase input, the rating of the inverter is smaller than that of the motor.
Please check the rating table of 11.1.
582
Applying Drives to Single-
phase Input Application
For single-phase input AC voltage, products with 90 kW or less are within -5% to + 10% of
240/480 Vac. Products with 110 kW or more are in the range of -5% to + 10% of 380/500
Vac. Standard product with three-phase voltage input has an allowable range of +10% to –
15%. Therefore, a stricter input voltage tolerance of +10 to –5% applies when using the
drive with a single-phase supply. The average bus voltage with single-phase input is lower
than the equivalent of a three-phase input.
Therefore, the maximum output voltage (motor voltage) will be lower with a single-phase
input. The minimum input voltage must be no less than 228Vac for 240 volt models and
456Vac for 480 volt models, to ensure motor voltage production of 207Vac and 415Vac,
respectively.
Thus, if full motor torque must be developed near base speed (full power) it will be
necessary to maintain a rigid incoming line voltage so that adequate motor voltage can be
produced. Operating a motor at reduced speed (reduced power), or using a motor with a
base voltage that is lower than the incoming AC supply rating (ex. 208Vac motor with a
583
Applying Drives to Single-
phase Input Application
12.4 Wiring
Please connect single-phase input to R(L1) and T(L3).
584
Product Warranty
Product Warranty
Warranty Information
Fill in this warranty information form and keep this page for future reference or when warranty
service may be required.
LS ELECTRIC
Product Name Date of Installation
Standard Inverter
Name
(or company)
Contact Info.
Name
Contact info.
Warranty Period
The product warranty covers product malfunctions, under normal operating conditions, for
12 months from the date of installation. If the date of installation is unknown, the product
warranty is valid for 18 months from the date of manufacturing. Please note that the
product warranty terms may vary depending on purchase or installation contracts.
585
Product Warranty
Non-Warranty Service
A service fee will be incurred for malfunctions in the following cases:
• intentional abuse or negligence
• power supply problems or from other appliances being connected to the product
• acts of nature (fire, flood, earthquake, gas accidents, etc.)
• modifications or repair by unauthorized persons
• missing authentic LS ELECTRIC rating plates
• expired warranty period
586
UL mark
The UL mark applies to products in the United States and Canada. This mark indicates that
UL has tested and evaluated the products and determined that the products satisfy the UL
standards for product safety. If a product received UL certification, this means that all
components inside the product had been certified for UL standards as well. Suitable for
Installation in a Compartment Handing Conditioned Air
CE mark
The CE mark indicates that the products carrying this mark comply with European safety
and environmental regulations. European standards include the Machinery Directive for
machine manufacturers, the Low Voltage Directive for electronics manufacturers and the
EMC guidelines for safe noise control.
Low Voltage Directive
We have confirmed that our products comply with the Low Voltage Directive (EN 61800-5-1).
EMC Directive
The Directive defines the requirements for immunity and emissions of electrical equipment
used within the European Union. The EMC product standard (EN 61800-3) covers
requirements stated for drives.
EAC mark
The EAC (EurAsian Conformity) mark is applied to the products before they are placed on
the market of the Eurasian Customs Union member states.
It indicates the compliance of the products with the following technical regulations and
requirements of the Eurasian Customs Union:
Technical Regulations of the Customs Union 004/2011 “On safety of low voltage
equipment”
Technical Regulations of the Customs Union 020/2011 “On electromagnetic compatibility of
technical products”
587
588
589
590
Index
[
A
[AUTO] key ........................................................................................ 53
A terminal (Normally Open) ............................................. 139
[DOWN] key..................................................................................... 53
A1/C1/B1 terminal....................................................................... 40
[ESC] key ............................................................................................. 53
AC power input terminal ..... Refer to R/S/T terminal
[HAND] key....................................................................................... 53
Acc/Dec pattern ................................................................ 79, 117
[LEFT] key............................................................................................ 53
linear pattern ......................................................117
[Mode] key ........................................................................................ 53
S-curve pattern ..................................................117
[MULTI] key ....................................................................................... 53 Acc/Dec reference .................................................................... 113
[MULTI] key configuration ..................................................... 55 Delta Freq...........................................................112
[OFF] key............................................................................................. 53 Max Freq ............................................................112
[PROG / Ent] key........................................................................... 53 Acc/Dec reference frequency .......................................... 112
Ramp T Mode ....................................................112
[RIGHT] key ....................................................................................... 53
Acc/Dec stop ....................................................................... 79, 120
[UP] key................................................................................................ 53
Acc/Dec time................................................................................ 111
Acc/Dec time switch frequency ........................116
2 configuration via multi-function terminal ..........113
maximum frequency ......................................... 111
24 terminal ............................................................................... 40, 41 operation frequency ..........................................113
2nd motor operation ............................................................... 243 Acc/Dec time configuration................................................. 79
2nd operation mode ................................................................ 137 accelerating start .......................................................................... 80
2ndcommand source ........................................ 137 add User group
Shared command (Main Source).................... 137 UserGrp SelKey ............................................... 251
Shared command (Main Source))................... 137
ADV (advanced) ............................................................................ 60
ADV (Expanded funtction group)................................. 408
3 advanced features group....................................................... 60
591
목차
analog input selection switch (SW2)............................. 96 main reference .................................................. 143
analog input selection switch (SW4)............................. 36 auxiliary motor PID compensation ................. 283, 284
593
목차
cursor keys ........................................................................................ 53 dynamic braking (DB) resistor configuration....... 326
[DOWN] key ........................................................ 53
[LEFT] key ........................................................... 53
[RIGHT] key......................................................... 53
E
[UP] key ............................................................... 53
earth leakage breaker............................................................ 547
Easy Start On................................................................................ 252
D
EEP Rom Empty.......................................................................... 247
damper.............................................................................................. 188 EG terminal ....................................................................................... 40
Damper Err Trip ..................... Refer to Damper Err Trip electronic thermal overheating protection (ETH)
damper operation .................................................................... 188 .......................................................................................................... 310
damper open delay time .................................. 188 EMC filter ............................................................................................ 43
DB resistor asymmetric power source ..................................43
braking resistor circuit ....................................... 326 disabling ........................................... 43, 44, 45, 46
DB Warn %ED .................................................. 326 enable ...................................................................44
DB Warn %ED.................................................................. 326, 540 enabling ...................................................44, 45, 46
emergency stop fault trip.................................Refer to BX
DC braking after start............................................................ 128
Enclosed Type 1 ......................................................................... 568
DC braking after stop............................................................ 130
energy saving............................................................................... 192
DC braking frequency ........................................................... 130
energy saving operation ..................................................... 234
DC link voltage ........................................................................... 141
automatic energy saving operation................. 234
Dec valve ramping ................................................................... 200
manual energy saving operation..................... 234
deceleration stop ......................................................................... 80 EPID (EPID control) group..................................................... 60
delta wiring ....................................................................................... 43 EPID (External PID function group) ............................. 452
derating ............................................................................... 242, 592 EPID control
digital output................................................................................ 298 external PID ...................................................... 178
display ................................................................................................... 54 EPID control group ..................................................................... 60
command source ................................................ 54 ETH .................Refer to electronic thermal overheating
display mode table .............................................. 59
protection (ETH)
display modes ..................................................... 58
frequency reference............................................ 54 E-Thermal ........................................................................................ 537
operation mode ................................................... 54 Exception Date ............................................................................ 215
rotational direction ............................................... 54 Exhaust Fan (MC3) ................................................................... 504
disposal ................................................................................. 551, 559
external 24V power terminal.... Refer to 24 terminal
draw operation ........................................................................... 141
External Trip ................................................................................... 538
Drive group........................... Refer to DRV (Drive group)
external trip signal.................................................................... 321
DRV (Drive function group) ................................................. 60
DRV (Drive group) .................................................................... 397
F
dwell operation........................................................................... 155
Acc/Dec dewel frequency ................................ 155 falut trips.......................................................................................... 536
acceleration dwell ............................................. 155
fan life estimation ..................................................................... 337
deceleration dwell ............................................. 155
594
fan replacement level ....................................... 337 Over Load Trip .................................................. 339
fan time .............................................................. 337 Over Voltage ..................................................... 339
fan operation warning .......................................................... 340 ParaWrite Trip ................................................... 339
Pipe Broken Trip ............................................... 339
fan replacement warning.................................................... 541
Pipe Broken Warning ....................................... 340
Fan Trip.................................................................................. 329, 538 Under Load Trip ................................................ 339
Fan Warning...................................................................... 329, 540 FE (Frame Error).......................................................................... 356
fatal ...................................................................................................... 536 ferrite...................................................................................................... 40
fault ...................................................................................................... 339 fieldbus..................................................................................... 86, 103
fatal ..................................................................... 536 communication option ...................................... 137
latch .................................................................... 536 FIFO/FILO......................................................................................... 263
level .................................................................... 536
filter time constant...................................................................... 88
major fault .......................................................... 339
fault monitoring ............................................................................ 75 filter time constant number.............................................. 138
multiple fault trips ................................................ 76 Fire mode........................................................................................ 232
fault signal output terminal ........ Refer to A1/C1/B1 Fire Mode Warning........................................... 540
terminal flow compensation .................................................................. 191
maximum compensation value ....................... 191
fault trip mode............................................................................... 59
flux braking .................................................................................... 316
fault/warning list ........................................................................ 339
forward or reverse run prevention .............................. 107
braking resistor braking rate warning .............. 340
capacitor lifetime warning................................. 340 free-run stop........................................................................ 81, 131
CleanRPTErr Trip ............................................. 339 frequency hold by analog input ................................... 100
CPU Watch Dog fault trip ................................. 340
frequency jump ................................................................. 81, 136
Damper Err Trip................................................. 339
E-Thermal .......................................................... 339 frequency limit ................................................................... 81, 133
External Trip ...................................................... 339 frequency jump ................................................. 136
fan replacement warning.................................. 340 frequency upper and lower limit value ............ 134
Fan Trip .............................................................. 339 maximum/start frequency ................................ 133
Fan Warning ...................................................... 340 frequency reference ....................................................... 87, 128
Fire mode Warning ........................................... 340 frequency reference for 0–10V input ........................... 88
Ground Trip........................................................ 339
frequency reference for -10–10V Input ...................... 92
In Phase Open .................................................. 339
IO Board Trip ..................................................... 339 frequency reference source configuration ............... 78
Level Detect trip ................................................ 339 frequency setting ......................................................................... 86
Level Detect Warning ....................................... 340
I2 current input .....................................................94
Lost Command ................................................. 340
I2 voltage input.....................................................96
Low Battery Warning ........................................ 340
keypad ..................................................................87
Low Voltage ....................................................... 340
RS-485 .................................................................99
Low Voltage2 ..................................................... 339
TI pulse input........................................................97
No Motor Trip..................................................... 339
V1 voltage input ...................................................88
NTC Open ......................................................... 339
frequency setting (Pulse train) terminal...Refer to TI
Option Trip-x ...................................................... 339
Out Phase Open ............................................... 339 terminal
Over Current1 ................................................... 339 frequency setting(voltage) terminal..........Refer to V1
Over Current2 ................................................... 339
terminal
Over Heat .......................................................... 339
595
목차
frequency upper and lower limit value input power voltage ............................................................... 246
Frequency lower limit value ............................. 134 input power voltage settings........................................... 246
Frequency upper limit value............................. 134
input terminal ..................................................................... 38, 139
fuse specifications..................................................................... 578
A (NO) or B (NC) terminal configuration......... 139
bit setting ........................................................... 139
G CM terminal..........................................................38
I2 terminal.............................................................39
ground.................................................................................................. 28 NO/NC configuration ........................................ 139
P1–P7 terminal ....................................................38
class 3 ground ..................................................... 29
TI terminal ............................................................39
ground cable specifications................................ 14
V1 terminal ...........................................................38
ground fault trip ............................... Refer to Ground Trip
VR terminal ..........................................................38
Ground Trip.................................................................................... 537 input terminal contact
A contact............................................................ 321
H B contact............................................................ 321
Input terminal function group ...... Refer to IN (Input
H100 expansion common area parameter........... 365 terminal function group)
control area parameter (Read/Write) .............. 376 inspection
memory control area parameter (Read/Write)
annual inspection.............................................. 552
....................................................................... 379
bi-annual inspection ......................................... 554
monitor area parameter (read only) ................ 366
daily inspection ................................................. 551
half duplex system ................................................................... 342
installation.......................................................................................... 17
basic configuration diagram...........................18
I installation flowchart ............................................17
location .................................................................11
I/O point map.............................................................................. 393 mounting the Inverter ..........................................19
I2 39 side-by-side installation .......................................12
wiring.....................................................................26
analog input selection switch (SW4) ................. 39
frequency setting(current/voltage) terminal ...... 39 installation conditions............................................................... 10
I2 Terminal ......................................................................................... 94 INV Over Load
IA (illegal data address)........................................................ 356 Inv Over Load Warning .................................... 540
Inverter OLT ................................................................................... 537
ID (illegal data value) ............................................................. 356
inverter overload protection (IOLT)............................. 322
IF (illegal function) .................................................................... 356
Inverter overload warning.................................................. 340
IN (Input terminal function group) .................... 60, 418
IO Board connection fault trip...... Refer to IO Board
In Phase Open............................................................................. 537
Trip
initializing accumulated electric energy count... 254
IO Board Trip ................................................................................ 539
input and output specifications..560, 596, 597, 598
IP 20 .................................................................................................... 568
input open-phase fault trip.............. Refer to In Phase
IP 20 Type external dimensions..................................... 570
Open
input phase open
input open-phase protection ............................ 320
input power frequency ......................................................... 246
596
keypad features
J
fault monitoring ....................................................75
Jog operation............................................................................... 148 navigating directly to different codes..................68
FWD Jog............................................................ 148 navigating through the codes .............................66
Jog frequency.................................................... 148 operation modes..................................................62
Jog operation 2 by terminal input .................... 149 parameter settings...............................................70
selecting a display mode ....................................61
Jog operation 2-Rev Jog by terminal input ......... 149
selecting the status bar display item ..................73
jump frequency .......................................................................... 136 setting the monitor display items........................72
switching between groups in Parameter Display
K mode................................................................64
switching between groups in User & Macro
mode................................................................65
keypad .................................................................................................. 52
keypad title update ................................................................. 254
[AUTO] key .......................................................... 53
[ESC] key ............................................................. 53 keypad trip mode ..................................................................... 493
[HAND] key.......................................................... 53 kinetic energy buffering....................................................... 229
[Mode] key ........................................................... 53
[MULTI] key ...................................................53, 56
[OFF] key ............................................................. 53 L
[PROG / Ent] key ................................................ 53
code information ................................................. 57 latch ..................................................................................................... 536
Config mode (CNF) .......................................... 494 LCD display ....................................................................................... 54
configuration mode ............................................. 59 leakage breaker .......................................................................... 575
cursor keys........................................................ 53
learning basic features ............................................................. 78
display ............................................................52, 54
display item .......................................................... 57 level...................................................................................................... 536
display mode ....................................................... 58 level dectectiontrip restart time..................................... 203
LCD brightness/contrast................................... 254
Level Detect................................................................................... 539
monitor mode ...................................................... 59
monitor mode cursor........................................... 55 Level Detect Warning....................................... 540
monitor mode item .............................................. 55 Level Detect Trip ........................................................................ 339
navigating between groups ................................ 58 level detection control .......................................................... 203
operating status.............................................55, 57
lift-type load...................................................................... 117, 125
operation keys ..................................................... 52
operation mode ................................................... 56 linear pattern ................................................................................ 117
parameter group ................................................. 56 linear V/F operation ................................................................... 80
parameter mode ................................................. 59 linear V/F pattern operation............................................. 121
parameter value .................................................. 57
base frequency ................................................. 121
rotational direction ............................................... 56
start frequency .................................................. 121
S/W version ....................................................... 254
load tuning..................................................................................... 201
set value............................................................... 57
setting range ........................................................ 57 Lost Command ........................................................................... 539
status bar configuration ...................................... 55 command loss fault trip warning ..................... 340
trip mode .............................................................. 59 command loss trip ............................................ 340
User & Macro mode ........................................... 59 Lost Command Warning.................................. 540
wiring length ........................................................ 40 Lost KeyPad ................................................................................... 538
keypad display................................................................................ 54 Lost KeyPad Warning ...................................... 540
597
목차
Low Battery Basic .................................................................. 255
low battery warning ........................................... 541 Circulation Pump .............................................. 255
Compressor ...................................................... 255
low battery warning................................................................ 327
Constant Torque ............................................... 255
low voltage .................................................................................... 330 Coolong Tower.................................................. 255
low voltage fault trip ................................. 330, 340 Supply Fan ........................................................ 255
Low Voltage................................................................................... 537 Vacuum Pump .................................................. 255
Low voltage fault trip during operation .......Refer to magnetic contactor ................................................................. 575
Low Voltage2 Trip main capacitor life estimation......................................... 335
Low Voltage2................................................................................ 537 CAP Level 1 ...................................................... 336
CAP Level 2 ...................................................... 336
LowLeakage PWM ................................................................... 241
maintenance ................................................................................. 551
LS INV 485 communication.............................................. 348
manual torque boost .................................................... 80, 125
LS INV 485 Detailed Read Protocol............................ 353
master ................................................................................................ 343
LS INV 485 Detailed Write Protocol........................... 354
maximum allowed prospective short-circuit
LS INV 485 error code .......................................................... 356
current ............................................................................................. iii
FE (Frame Error)............................................... 356
megger test ....................................................................... 552, 555
IA (illegal data address) .................................... 356
ID (illegal data value)...................................... 356 Metasys-N2 ................................................................................... 344
IF (illegal function) ............................................. 356 analog input....................................................... 394
WM (write mode error) ..................................... 356 analog output .................................................... 393
LS INV 485 protocol ............................................................... 352 binary input........................................................ 395
LSINV 485 ....................................................................................... 344 binary output ..................................................... 394
communication standard ................................. 392
lubrication ....................................................................................... 190
error code .......................................................... 396
lubrication operation.............................................................. 190 I/O point map .................................................... 393
protocol .............................................................. 392
metasys-N2 communication ............................................ 392
M
Metasys-N2 I/O map
M2 (Secondary Motor function group)................... 489 analog input....................................................... 394
M2 (secondary motor-related features) group..... 60 analog output .................................................... 393
binary input........................................................ 395
Macro
binary output ..................................................... 394
Circulation Pump (MC5)................................... 519 MMC ................................................................................................... 257
Constant Torque (MC7).................................... 532
auto cahnge .............................269, 270, 281, 282
Cooling Tower (MC4)........................................ 516
auto change aux ............................................... 275
Exhaust Fan (MC3) .......................................... 504
basic sequence................................................. 264
Supply Fan (MC2) ............................................ 503
interlock ............................................................. 277
Vacuum Pump (MC6)....................................... 523
Regular Bypass .......................286, 287, 288, 289
Macro function group........................................................... 499
MMC Interlock ............................................................................ 539
Macro group................................................................................. 499
Modbus-RTU ................................................................................ 344
Macro mode .................................................................................... 61
Modbus-RTU communication ........................................ 348
macro selection .......................................................................... 255
Modbus-RTU function code and protocol ........... 358
Macro selection
Modbus-RTU protocol
598
exception code................................................ 361 multi-function output category (Q1 Define) .... 430
read holding resister ......................................... 358 multi-function output on/off control ........... 290
read input resister ............................................. 358 multi-function output terminal and relay settings
momentary power interruption......................... 237, 238 ....................................................................... 298
multi-function output terminal delay time settings
monitoring
....................................................................... 304
monitor mode ...................................................... 59
multi-function relay1 category (Relay 1)......... 429
monitor mode cursor........................................... 55
multi-function relay2 category (Relay 2)......... 430
monitor mode display ......................................... 54
multi-function relay3category (Relay 3).......... 430
monitor mode item .............................................. 55
multi-function relay4 category (Relay 4)......... 430
monitor registration protocol details ................ 355
multi-function relay5 category (Relay 5)......... 430
operation state monitoring................................ 305
trip output by multi-function output terminal and relay
operation time monitoring................................. 307
....................................................................... 303
motor features
multi-function terminal configuration.......................... 81
capacity .............................................................. 157
multiple motor control ......................................................... 257
efficiency ............................................................ 157
no-load current .................................................. 157 multi-step frequency .............................................................. 101
operation display options ................................... 78 setting ................................................................ 101
output voltage adjustment ................................ 127 Speed-L/Speed-M/Speed-H ........................... 102
overheat sensor ................................................ 312 multi-step speed (frequency).............................................. 78
protection ........................................................... 310
rotation control ..................................................... 79
thermal protection(ETH) N
E-Thermal .......................................................................... 310
no motor trip ............................................................................... 332
verifying rotational direction................................ 51
Motor overheat fault trip .................................................... 339 No Motor Trip.............................................................................. 537
599
목차
option trip...............................332, Refer to Option Trip-x P2+ terminal (+ DC link terminal) ......................... 31, 32
Option Trip-1 ................................................................................ 539 P2+/B terminal............................................................................... 31
Option Trip-x P3+ terminals (+ DC link terminal) ................................ 32
option trip ........................................................... 339 parameter........................................................................................... 70
OUT (Output terminal function group) .......... 60, 427 display changed parameter ............................. 250
Out Phase Open ........................................................................ 537 hide parameter mode....................................... 249
initializing the parameters ...................................77
output block by multi-function terminal................ 331
parameter initialization.................................. 248
output open-phase fault trip......Refer to Out Phase parameter lock .................................................. 249
Open parameter settings...............................................70
output terminal............................ Refer to R/S/T terminal password ........................................................... 249
Parameter Initialization ......................................................... 248
Output terminal function group ............Refer to OUT
parameter mode........................................................................... 59
(Output terminal function group)
parameter setting mode ........................................................ 60
output/communication terminal...................................... 39
24 terminal.......................................................... 40 ParaWrite Trip............................................................................... 539
A1/C1/B1 terminal ............................................. 40 parmeter
AO terminal ........................................................ 39 read/write/save ................................................. 247
EG terminal ........................................................ 40 part names ........................................................................................... 3
S+/S-/SG terminal ............................................. 40
parts illustrated ................................................................................. 3
over current trip .......................... Refer to Over Current1
parts life............................................................................................ 335
Over Current1 .............................................................................. 537
capacitor life estimation.................................... 335
Over Current2 .............................................................................. 537 fan life ................................................................ 337
Over Heat........................................................................................ 537 password.............................................................................. 249, 380
over heat fault trip .............................. Refer to Over Heat payback counter ........................................................................ 192
Over Load ....................................................................................... 536 peripheral devices..................................................................... 575
Over Load Warning .......................................... 540 phase-to-phase voltage....................................................... 546
overload fault trip ............................................... 339
PID
overload warning............................................... 340
flow control ........................................................ 158
Over Voltage................................................................................. 537
pressure control ................................................ 158
over voltage trip ............................ Refer to Over Voltage speed control .................................................... 158
overload.......................................................Refer to Over Load temperature control .......................................... 158
overload trip ....................................................... 314 PID (Advanced function group) ..................................... 440
overload warning............................................... 314 PID (PID control) group .......................................................... 60
overload rate ................................................................................ 242
PID control
overload trip.............................................Refer to Over Load PID openloop .................................................... 177
PID operation sleep mode ............................... 175
P PID operation switching ................................... 177
PID reference .................................................... 169
P(+) terminal (+ DC link terminal) ......................... 33, 34 PID control group................ Refer to PID (PID control)
600
pipe break dectection control PRT (protection features) group ....................................... 60
Pipe Broken ....................................................... 207 PRT (Protection function group) ................................... 479
pipe break detection control Pulse output terminal ................. Refer to TO terminal
Pipe Broken ....................................................... 539
pump clean.................................................................................... 194
Pipe Broken Warning........................................ 540
Pump clean trip................... Refer to Pump Clean Trip
Pipe Broken fault trip ........... Refer to PipeBroken Trip
PWM ................................................................................................... 241
PNP mode (Source).................................................................... 41
frequency modulation....................................... 241
PNP/NPN mode selection switch (SW2) ................... 36
NPN mode (Sink)................................................ 42
PNP mode (Source) ........................................... 41 Q
post-installation checklist ....................................................... 48
quantizing .......................................................................................... 90
potentiometer................................................................................. 38
Quantizing
power braking ................................................................................ 81
noise .....................................................................90
power consumption ................................................... 306, 307 quick reference ................................................................................ iv
power input terminalRefer to R/S/T terminal, Refer
to R/S/T terminal, Refer to R/S/T terminal
R
power output terminal ......... Refer to R/S/T terminal,
Refer to R/S/T terminal, Refer to R/S/T terminal R/S/T terminals ........................................31, 32, 33, 34, 544
power terminal board wiring .............................................. 29 R/S/T terminals .............................................................................. 35
power terminals ................................................................... 32, 33 rating
P(+) terminal ..................................................33, 34 derating.............................................................. 592
P(+)/B terminal .................................................... 33 rated motor current ........................................... 157
P1+ terminal ........................................................ 31 rated motor voltage ...........................................211
P2+ terminal ..................................................31, 32 rated slip frequency .......................................... 157
P2+/B terminal..................................................... 31 rated slip speed ................................................ 157
P3+ terminal ........................................................ 32 rating plate........................................................................................... 1
R/S/T terminals................................. 31, 32, 33, 34 reactor.......................................................................................... 18, 19
U/V/W terminal ................................. 31, 32, 33, 34
reactors specifications ........................................................... 578
PowerOn Resume ..................................................................... 308
real-time clock................................................................................ 23
PowerOn Resume by serial communication........ 308
regenerated energy................................................................. 132
Power-on Run .............................................................................. 108
Reset Restart ................................................................................. 110
pre-heating .................................................................................... 209
settings ............................................................. 240
preparing the installation.......................................................... 1
resonance frequency
press regeneration prevention ....................................... 291 carrier frequency............................................... 241
P gain/I gain ....................................................... 292 restarting after a trip
product identification................................................................... 1 Reset Restart .....................................................110
product specification details ............................................ 566 retry number ................................................................................ 110
protocol ripple...................................................................................................... 91
BACnet protocol ................................................ 381 RS-232 ............................................................................................... 343
LS INV 485 protocol ......................................... 352
communication ................................................. 343
Metasys-N2 protocol......................................... 392
601
목차
RS-485 ............................................................................................... 342 sequence common terminal ..Refer to CM terminal
communication .................................................. 343 side-by-side installation .......................................................... 12
converter ............................................................ 343
slave..................................................................................................... 343
integrated communication.................................. 99
setting command and frequency ..................... 346 slip......................................................................................................... 157
signal terminal ...............................................40, 99 slip compensation operation........................................... 157
RS-485 signal input terminal ...... Refer to S+/S-/SG soft fill control
terminal soft fill operation ................................................ 173
RTC battery ........................................................................... 23, 555 speed command loss ............................................................ 323
enabling ............................................................... 23 speed search operation ....................................................... 235
replacing ............................................................ 555 Flying Start-1 ..................................................... 236
specifications ..................................................... 555 Flying Start-2 ..................................................... 236
run prevention options ............................................................... 236
Fwd..................................................................... 107 P/I gain............................................................... 238
Rev ..................................................................... 107 speed unit selection (Hz or Rpm) ................................ 101
square reduction........................................................................... 80
S square reduction load ...................................... 122
V/F pattern operation ....................................... 122
S/W version ................................................................................... 254 stall ....................................................................................................... 316
inverter ............................................................... 254 bit On/Off ........................................................... 317
keypad ............................................................... 254 stall prevention .................................................. 316
S+/S-/SG terminal ....................................................................... 40 start after DC braking............................................................... 80
safe operation mode ............................................................. 153 start at power-on
safety information ...........................................................................ii PowerOn Resume............................................ 109
screw specification Power-on Run................................................... 108
start mode...................................................................................... 128
control circuit terminal screw............................ 581
input/output terminal screw .............................. 581 acceleration start .............................................. 128
screw size .......................................................... 581 start after DC braking ....................................... 128
screw torque ...................................................... 581 Start&End Ramp operation .............................................. 198
S-curve pattern ........................................................................... 117 Station ID......................................................................................... 358
actual Acc/Dec time .......................................... 119 stop mode...................................................................................... 129
secondary motor-related features group.....Refer to DC braking after stop ....................................... 130
M2 (the secondary motor-related features) deceleration stop .............................................. 129
group free run stop ...................................................... 131
power braking ................................................... 132
selecting operation modes ......................................... 62, 81
storage .............................................................................................. 559
auto mode operation .......................................... 82
basic operation .................................................... 83 Supply Fan (MC2) ..................................................................... 503
function codes ..................................................... 84 surge killer ................................................................................ 35, 49
hand mode operation ......................................... 81 SW1 .............. Refer to Terminating Resistor selection
mode keys and indicators .................................. 82
switch (SW1)
Power-on Run/PowerOn Resume in each mode
......................................................................... 85 SW2 .........Refer to PNP/NPN mode selection switch
switching between the modes ........................... 84 (SW2)
602
SW3 .... Refer to V1/T1 (PTC) mode selection switch 1sec ....................................................................112
(SW3) timer ................................................................................................... 256
SW4 ..Refer to analog input selection switch (SW4) protection features groupPRT (protection features)
switch torque.................................................................................................... 26
analog input selection switch (SW4) ................. 36 torque boost................................................................................. 125
analog output selection switch (SW5)............... 36 auto torque boost.............................................. 126
PNP/NPN mode selection switch (SW2).......... 36 manual torque boost ........................................ 125
Terminating Resistor selection switch (SW1)... 36 overexcitation .................................................... 125
V1/T1 (PTC) mode selection switch (SW3) ..... 36 trip ........................................................................................................ 536
Switches............................................................................................... 36 erasing trip history ............................................ 254
fault/waring list .................................................. 339
T
trip no motor trip ........................................332, 334
trip status reset.................................................. 331
troubleshooting ................................................. 541
target frequency
Trip mode........................................................................................... 59
Cmd frequency.................................................. 397
Temperature sensor fault trip ......................... NTC Open Trip mode........................................................................................ 493
603
목차
parameter group ............................................... 351 voltage/current output terminal................ Refer to AO
U&M mode ........................................................ 351
terminal
using the keypad.......................................................................... 61
VR terminal ....................................................................................... 38
V
W
V/F control...................................................................................... 121
warning ................................................................................. 339, 536
linear V/F pattern operation ............................. 121
fault/warning list ................................................ 339
square reductionV/F pattern operation ........... 122
warning message ............................................. 540
user V/F pattern operation ............................... 123
V/F pattern configuration .................................... 80 Warning ............................................................................................ 340
V1 terminal............................................................................... 38, 88 wiring............................................................................................ 14, 26
V1/T1 (PTC) mode selection switch (SW3)............... 36 circuit breaker.................................................... 575
control terminal board wiring ..............................36
V2
copper cable ........................................................26
analog input selection switch (SW4) ................. 39 disassembling the cover .....................................27
V2 input............................................................................................... 96 ferrite .....................................................................40
I2 voltage input .................................................... 96 ground ..................................................................28
Vacuum Pump (MC6) ............................................................ 523 power terminal board ..........................................29
re-assembling the cover .....................................47
variable torque load................................................................ 122
wiring length .........................................................40
vent cover .......................................................................................... 12
WM (write mode error) ........................................................ 356
virtual multi-function input ............................................... 348
Write parameter fault trip .... Refer to ParaWrite Trip
604
www.lselectric.co.kr
LS-ro 127(Hogye-dong) Dongan-gu, Anyang-si, Gyeonggi-Do, 14119, Korea • LS ELECTRIC Tokyo Office (Japan)
■ Seoul Office Tel: 81-3-6268-8241 E-Mail: [email protected]
LS Yongsan Tower, 92, Hangang-daero, Yongsan-gu, Seoul, 04386, Korea • LS ELECTRIC Beijing Office (China)
Tel: 82-2-2034-4033, 4888, 4703 Fax: 82-2-2034-4588 Tel: 86-10-5095-1631 E-Mail: [email protected]
• LS ELECTRIC (Dalian) Co., Ltd. (Dalian, China) Tel: 86-28-8670-3201 E-Mail: [email protected]
Tel: 86-411-8730-6495 E-Mail: [email protected] • LS ELECTRIC Qingdao Office (China)
•LS ELECTRIC (Wuxi) Co., Ltd. (Wuxi, China) Tel: 86-532-8501-2065 E-Mail: [email protected]
Tel: 86-510-6851-6666 E-Mail: [email protected] • LS ELECTRIC Nanjing Office (China)
•LS ELECTRIC Vietnam Co., Ltd. Tel:86-25-8467-0005 E-Mail: [email protected]
Tel: 84-93-631-4099 E-Mail: [email protected] (Hanoi) • LS ELECTRIC Bangkok Office (Thailand)
Tel: 84-28-3823-7890 E-Mail: [email protected] (Hochiminh) Tel: 66-90-950-9683 E-Mail: [email protected]
• LS ELECTRIC Middle East FZE (Dubai, U.A.E.) • LS ELECTRIC Jakarta Office (Indonesia)
Tel: 971-4-886-5360 E-Mail: [email protected] Tel: 62-21-2933-7614 E-Mail: [email protected]
• LS ELECTRIC Europe B.V. (Hoofddorf, Netherlands) • LS ELECTRIC Moscow Office (Russia)
• LS ELECTRIC America Inc. (Chicago, USA) • LS ELECTRIC America Western Office (Irvine, USA)
10310001336
Disclaimer of Liability
LS ELECTRIC has reviewed the information in this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described.
However, LS ELECTRIC cannot guarantee full consistency, nor be responsible for any damages or compensation, since variance
cannot be precluded entirely. Please check again the version of this publication before you use the product.
ⓒ LS ELECTRIC Co., Ltd 2020 All Right Reserved. LSLV-H100 / 2020.05